Sk330nlc-6e Manual

APPLICABLE No.
SK330-6E LC08-06201~
SK330LC-6E YC08-03001~
SK330NLC-6E YC08-03001~
READ, UNDERSTAND AND FOLLOW ALL SAFETY

PRECAUTIONS AND INSTRUCTIONS FOUND IN THIS
MANUAL BEFORE OPERATING THE MACHINE.
Book Code No. S2LC00014ZE03

Printed in Japan 2005.04 (K·E)
Copyright © 2017 Kobelco Construction Machinery Co.,Ltd. All rights reserved. [S2LC00014ZE03] [0428CsCshWbYs]
FOREWORD
GENERAL
• This manual contains procedures to aid the operator gain peak performance through effective, economical machine
operation and maintenance for the KOBELCO SK330(LC)-6E and SK330NLC-6E Hydraulic Excavators.
• Before operating the machine, operators must thoroughly read and understand all safety, Operation and Maintenance
instructions found in this manual. Failure to follow the instructions given in this manual may lead to serious injury to
persons and or equipment failure.
• Operators and persons working with this machine should continually study this manual until proper safety, Operation
and Maintenance procedures are completely understood.
• This manual describes the basic operating techniques. Skill is gained as the operator utilizes these techniques and
perfects them with an actual machine.
• Some illustrated pictures may be different from your machine, as technical improvement is continuous, manuals are
periodically updated to reflect these changes.
• This manual may not contain attachments and optional equipment that are available in your area. Please contact an
authorized KOBELCO Distributor for any optional attachments required.
• Materials and specifications are subject to change without notice.
PERIODIC INSPECTIONS
• After delivery of a machine, the Authorized KOBELCO Distributor will make periodic service inspections. These in-
spections will be free of charge to the owner of the machine and will be at time intervals set by KOBELCO. Contact an
authorized KOBELCO Distributor for any service related questions not explained in this manual.
NOTICE
• The contents of this manual may not reflect the specifications of the machine delivered. Contact an authorized KOBELCO
Distributor to obtain assistance in specifications for machines equipped with options not contained in this manual.
• Owing to the policy of continual improvement, changes may be made by KOBELCO CONSTRUCTION MACHINERY
CO., LTD, to any of its products without any obligation on the part of KOBELCO CONSTRUCTION MACHINERY CO.,
LTD.
• The letter “E” of 6E in the machine model expresses that the engine mounted on this machine is approved by the new
regulation established after the emission rate became more severe. Therefore the last letter “E” in the machine model,
represents the “Emission” or “Ecology”.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Section I – SAFETY PRECAUTIONS ........................................................................................................ 1-0 ~ 1-28
Section II – MACHINE FAMILIARIZATION ................................................................................................. 2-0 ~ 2-45
Section III – BASIC MACHINE OPERATION ............................................................................................... 3-0 ~ 3-24
Section IV – MAINTENANCE ....................................................................................................................... 4-0 ~ 4-55
Section V – TRANSPORTATION ................................................................................................................. 5-0 ~ 5-9
Section VI – SPECIFICATIONS .................................................................................................................... 6-0 ~ 6-18
Section VII – TROUBLESHOOTING ............................................................................................................. 7-0 ~ 7-3
Section VIII – SCHEMATICS .......................................................................................................................... 8-0 ~ 8-8
Section IX – OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT ......................................................................................................... 9-0 ~ 9-10
Section X – SPECIAL PROCEDURES ...................................................................................................... 10-0 ~ 10-8
All rights reserved. Any use of editorial or pictorial content is strictly prohibited without express written permission from KOBELCO CONSTRUCTION MACHINERY CO., LTD.
Section I – SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Table of Contents
GENERAL SAFETY INFORMATION ........................................................................................................... 1-1
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS ............................................................................................................................. 1-1 ~ 1-3
PRE-START SAFETY ................................................................................................................................... 1-4 ~ 1-6
SAFETY DURING OPERATION ................................................................................................................... 1-6 ~ 1-9
INSPECTION & MAINTENANCE SAFETY .................................................................................................. 1-9 ~ 1-11
BATTERY SAFETY ...................................................................................................................................... 1-12
WARNING LABELS & DECALS (EU ONLY) ............................................................................................... 1-13 ~ 1-19
WARNING LABELS & DECALS (OCEANIA ONLY) ................................................................................... 1-20 ~ 1-25
PROHIBITED MACHINE OPERATION ........................................................................................................ 1-26 ~ 1-27
END OF WORK SHIFT SAFETY .................................................................................................................. 1-27
USE FOPS AND FRONT GUARD ................................................................................................................ 1-28
USE SAFETY VALVE AND OVERLOAD ALARM ....................................................................................... 1-28
READ, UNDERSTAND AND FOLLOW ALL SAFETY PRECAUTIONS AND PROCEDURES FOUND IN THIS
MANUAL BEFORE ATTEMPTING ANY OPERATION, INSPECTION OR MAINTENANCE OF THIS MACHINE,
ATTACHMENT OR SYSTEMS. KOBELCO CANNOT ANTICIPATE EVERY POSSIBLE CIRCUMSTANCE THAT
MIGHT INVOLVE A POTENTIAL HAZARD. THE WARNINGS IN THIS PUBLICATION AND ON THE PRODUCT
ARE THEREFORE NOT ALL INCLUSIVE. IF A TOOL, PROCEDURE, WORK METHOD OR OPERATING TECH-
NIQUE NOT SPECIFICALLY RECOMMENDED BY KOBELCO IS USED, YOU MUST SATISFY YOURSELF THAT
IT IS SAFE FOR YOU AND OTHERS. YOU SHOULD ALSO ENSURE THAT THE PRODUCT WILL NOT BE
DAMAGED OR MADE UNSAFE BY THE OPERATION, LUBRICATION, MAINTENANCE AND/OR REPAIR PRO-
CEDURES YOU CHOOSE.
1—0
1.1 GENERAL SAFETY INFORMATION c. CAUTION – Indicates a potentially hazardous situ-
ation which, if not avoided, may result in minor or
moderate injury. It may also be used to alert against
possible damage to the machine and its compo-
DO NOT OPERATE OR PERFORM ANY MAINTE- nents and is represented as follows:
NANCE ON THIS MACHINE UNTIL ALL INSTRUC-
TIONS FOUND IN THIS MANUAL HAVE BEEN
THOROUGHLY READ AND UNDERSTOOD.
IMPROPER OPERATION OR MAINTENANCE OF 4. It is very difficult to forecast every danger that may
THIS MACHINE MAY CAUSE ACCIDENTS AND occur during operation. However, safety can be en-
COULD RESULT IN SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH. sured by fully understanding proper operating proce-
ALWAYS KEEP THIS MANUAL IN THE OPERATOR’S dures for this machine according to methods recom-
SEAT POCKET. mended by KOBELCO.
IF IT IS MISSING OR DAMAGED, PLACE AN OR-
DER WITH AN AUTHORIZED KOBELCO DISTRIBU- 5. While operating the machine, be sure to perform work
TOR FOR A REPLACEMENT. with great care, so as not to damage the machine, or
IF YOU HAVE ANY QUESTIONS, PLEASE CONSULT allow accidents to occur.
AN AUTHORIZED KOBELCO DISTRIBUTOR.
6. Continue studying this manual until all safety, opera-
1. Most accidents, which occur during operation, are due tion and Maintenance procedures are completely un-
to neglect of precautionary measures and safety rules. derstood by all persons working with the machine.
Sufficient care should be taken to avoid these accidents.
Erroneous operation, lubrication or maintenance ser-
vices are very dangerous and may cause injury or 1.2 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
death of personnel. Therefore all precautionary mea-
sures, NOTES, DANGERS, WARNINGS and CAU-
TIONS contained in this manual and on the machine
should be read and understood by all personnel be- THE PROPER AND SAFE LUBRICATION AND MAIN-
fore starting any work with or on the machine. TENANCE FOR THIS MACHINE, RECOMMENDED
BY KOBELCO, IS OUTLINED IN THE OPERATOR’S
2. Operation, inspection, and maintenance should be MANUAL FOR THIS MACHINE.
carefully carried out, and safety must be given the first
IMPROPER PERFORMANCE OF LUBRICATION OR
priority. Messages of safety are indicated with marks.
MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES ARE DANGEROUS
The safety information contained in this manual is in-
AND COULD RESULT IN INJURY OR DEATH. READ
tended only to supplement safety codes, insurance
AND UNDERSTAND THE OPERATOR’S MANUAL
requirements, local laws, rules and regulations.
BEFORE PERFORMING ANY LUBRICATION OR
MAINTENANCE.
3. Messages of safety appear in this manual and on the
machine. All messages of safety are identified by the
The serviceman or mechanic may be unfamiliar with
words “DANGER”, “WARNING” and “CAUTION”.
many of the systems on this machine. This makes it
a. DANGER – Indicates an imminently hazardous important to use caution when performing service
situation which, if not avoided, will result in death work. A knowledge of the system and or components
or serious injury and is represented as follows: is important before the removal or disassembly of any
component.
Because of the size of some of the machine compo-

b. WARNING – Indicates a potentially hazardous situ- nents, the serviceman or mechanic should check the
ation which, if not avoided, could result in death or weights noted in this manual. Use proper lifting pro-
serious injury and is represented as follows: cedures when removing any components. Weight of
components table is shown in Page 6-3 of SECTION
VI – SPECIFICATIONS.
1—1
THE FOLLOWING IS A LIST OF BASIC PRECAUTIONS 8. Use steps and grab handles when mounting or dis-
THAT MUST ALWAYS BE OBSERVED. mounting a machine. Clean any mud, grease, oil or
debris from steps, walkways or work platforms before
1. Read and understand all warning plates and decals using. Always face the machine when using steps,
on the machine before operating, maintaining or re- ladders and walkways. When it is not possible to use
pairing this machine. the designed access system, provide ladders, scaf-
folds, or work platforms to perform safe repair opera-
2. Always wear protective glasses and protective shoes tions.
when working around machines. In particular, wear
protective glasses when using hammers, punches or 9. To avoid back injury, use a hoist when lifting compo-
drifts on any part of the machine or attachments. Use nents which weigh 23 kg (50 lb) or more. Make sure
welders gloves, hood/goggles, apron and the protec- all chains, hooks, slings, etc., are in good condition
tive clothing appropriate to the welding job being per- and are the correct capacity. Be sure hooks are posi-
formed. Do not wear loose fitting or torn clothing. tioned correctly. Lifting eyes are not to be side loaded
Remove all rings from fingers, loose jewelry, confine during a lifting operation.
long hair and loose clothing before working on this
machinery. 10. To avoid burns, be alert for hot parts on machines
which have just been stopped and hot fluids in lines,
3. Disconnect the battery and hang a “Do Not Operate” tubes and compartments.
tag in the Operator’s compartment. Remove ignition
keys. 11. Be careful when removing cover plates. Gradually back
off the last two bolts or nuts located at opposite ends
4. If possible, make all repairs with the machine parked of the cover or device and carefully pry cover loose to
on a level, hard surface. Block the machine so it does relieve any spring or other pressure, before removing
not roll while working on or under the machine. Hang the last two bolts or nuts completely.
a “Do Not Operate” tag in the Operator’s compartment.
12. Be careful when removing filler caps, breathers and
5. Do not work on any machine that is supported only by plugs on the machine. Hold a rag over the cap or plug
lift, jacks or a hoist. Always use blocks or jack stands, to prevent being sprayed or splashed by liquids under
capable of supporting the machine, before perform- pressure. The danger is even greater if the machine
ing any disassembly. has just been stopped because fluids can be hot.
13. Always use the proper tools that are in good condition
and that are suited for the job at hand. Be sure you
DO NOT OPERATE THIS MACHINE UNLESS YOU
understand how to use them before performing any
HAVE READ AND UNDERSTAND THE INSTRUC-
service work.
TIONS IN THE OPERATOR’S MANUAL. IMPROPER
MACHINE OPERATION IS DANGEROUS AND
14. Reinstall all fasteners with the same part number. Do
COULD RESULT IN INJURY OR DEATH.
not use a lesser quality fastener if replacements are
necessary.
6. Relieve all pressure in air, oil or water systems before
any lines, fittings or related items are disconnected or 15. Repairs which require welding should be performed
removed. Always make sure all raised components only with the benefit of the appropriate reference in-
are blocked correctly and be alert for possible pres- formation and by personnel adequately trained and
sure when disconnecting any device from a system knowledgeable in welding procedures. Determine type
that utilizes pressure. of metal being welded and select correct welding pro-
cedure and electrodes, rods or wire to provide a weld
7. Lower the bucket, blade or other attachments to the metal strength equivalent at least to that of the parent
ground before performing any work on the machine. If metal. Make sure to disconnect battery before any
this cannot be done, make sure the bucket, blade or welding procedures are attempted.
other attachment is blocked correctly to prevent it from
dropping unexpectedly.
1—2
16. Do not damage wiring during removal operations. 23. Caution should be used to avoid breathing dust that
Reinstall the wiring so it is not damaged nor will be may be generated when handling components con-
damaged in operation of the machine by contacting taining asbestos fibers. If this dust is inhaled, it can be
sharp corners, or by rubbing against some object or hazardous to your health. Components in KOBELCO
hot surface. Do not connect wiring to a line containing products that may contain asbestos fibers are brake
fluid. pads, brake band and lining assemblies, clutch plates
and some gaskets. The asbestos used in these com-
17. Be sure all protective devices including guards and ponents is usually bound in a resin or sealed in some
shields are properly installed and functioning correctly way. Normal handling is not hazardous as long as air-
before starting a repair. If a guard or shield must be borne dust which contains asbestos is not generated.
removed to perform the repair work, use extra caution
and replace the guard or shield after repair is com-
plete. IF DUST WHICH MAY CONTAIN ASBESTOS IS
PRESENT, THERE ARE SEVERAL COMMON SENSE
18. The maintenance and repair work while holding the GUIDELINES THAT SHOULD BE FOLLOWED.
bucket raised is dangerous due to the possibility of a
falling attachment.
a . Never use compressed air for cleaning.
Do not fail to lower the attachment and place the bucket
to the ground before starting the work. b . Avoid brushing or grinding of asbestos containing
materials.
19. Loose or damaged fuel, lubricant and hydraulic lines, c . For clean up, use wet methods or a vacuum
tubes and hoses can cause fires. Do not bend or strike equipped with a high efficiency particulate air
high pressure lines or install ones which have been (HEPA) filter.
bent or damaged. Inspect lines, tubes and hoses care-
fully. Do not check for leaks with your hands. Very small d . Use exhaust ventilation on permanent machining
(pin hole) leaks can result in a high velocity oil stream jobs.
that will be invisible close to the hose. This oil can e . Wear an approved respirator if there is no other
penetrate the skin and cause personal injury. Use card- way to control the dust.
board, wood or metal to locate pin hole leaks.
f . Comply with applicable rules and regulations for
the work place.
20. Tighten connections to the correct torque. Make sure
that all heat shields, clamps and guards are installed g . Follow environmental rules and regulations for dis-
correctly to avoid excessive heat, vibration or rubbing posal of asbestos.
against other parts during operation. Shields that pro- h . Avoid areas where asbestos particles may be in
tect against oil spray onto hot exhaust components in the air.
event of a line, tube or seal failure must be installed
correctly.
21. Do not operate a machine if any rotating part is dam-

aged or contacts any other part during operation.
Any high speed rotating component that has been
damaged or altered should be checked for balance
before reusing.
22. Be careful when servicing or separating the tracks.

Chips can fly when removing or installing a track pin.
Wear safety glasses and long sleeve protective cloth-
ing. Tracks can unroll very quickly when separated.
Keep away from front and rear of machine. The ma-
chine can move unexpectedly when both tracks are
disengaged from the sprockets. Block the machine to
prevent it from moving.
1—3
1.3 PRE-START SAFETY GER
Many failures that occur during machine operation DAN CAUT
OF Bucke ION
or servicing result from neglecting fundamental safety C L EAR A d am ag
t can co
nt
e ca act and
P E
KEE ING AR
machi b w
CAUTIO ne equi h en
FOR N
some pped
attach with
precautions. The following safety precautions are SW INTER
FERE ments
.
C h ec k
betwee cl ea ra
given to prevent such failures, but they are only a OP cab be
n bu
cket
n ce
M A E R AT
Exerc
forre
WARNING
op
ise ca eration.
and
part of what you must follow. Read, understand and operat re w

MA INTE ION
PREVENT ingBATTERY hen
a buck EXPLOSION
et near
• Batteries give off hydrogen gasses that can
follow all safety precautions found in this manual and N NA
S K UA L N C E
explode and cause
2432
personal injury.
• Keep sparks, openP3 flames
380 and cigarettes away
SK 330-6
from batteries.
on the machine thoroughly before operating the • Keep metallic articles away from batteries.
Ap 330 E • Keep all ventilation caps tightly secured.
machine. pli
cab L C-6 • Never check charge by placing metal articles
across battery terminals.
le m
E • Leave battery box open to improve ventilation
OBSERVE ALL SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

A. OBSERVE SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Follow all safety rules, precautions, and operating
procedures. If there are other personnel and flag-
men working in the area, have them observe the
specified signs.
B. WEAR PROTECTIVE CLOTHING

Wear well fitting safety shoes, hard hat, and work- WEAR PROTECTIVE CLOTHING
ing clothes, and put on protective glasses, face
shield, ear protection and gloves. When necessary,
STORAGE
wear reflective vest. AREA
C. READ AND UNDERSTAND THE OPERATOR’S

MANUAL
Before operating the machine, read and understand
this operator’s manual thoroughly in order to use
the machine effectively and safely. READ MANUAL / KEEP IN MACHINE CAB
D. KEEP OPERATOR’S MANUAL IN MACHINE CAB

Keep this manual in the specified storage area lo-
cated behind the operator’s seat for quick reference.
Should the operator’s manual become lost or dam-
aged, contact an authorized KOBELCO distributor
to order the operator’s manual.
E. HOW TO HANDLE LIFE HAMMER

A life hammer is provided on the left side of cab. HOW TO HANDLE LIFE HAMMER
In case of emergency, take the life hammer, break
the cab glass, and escape from the cab.
In addition, the life hammer is equipped with a cut-
ter on the lever side to cut the seat belt, etc.
F. PREPARE FOR EMERGENCIES

Have a fire extinguisher and first aid kit ready for
emergencies. Know how to operate the fire extin-
guisher and know where the first aid kit is located
for easy access in case of emergency.
PREPARE FOR EMERGENCIES
1—4
G. ENSURE SAFETY AT THE WORK SITE
Know the work area! Before operating the ma-
chine, carefully survey and record the land and
worksite features to prevent the machine from fall-
ing or the soil from caving in.
H. PERFORM PRE-START INSPECTION

Before starting the machine, perform a PRE-START
inspection of the machine. If any problems are
found, repair or replace defective components im- WORKSITE SAFETY – KNOW THE AREA
mediately. DO NOT OPERATE THE MACHINE until
all problem areas are properly repaired.
Always keep the windshield, working lamps, and
mirrors clean for good visibility.
I . ENGAGE SAFETY LOCK LEVER BEFORE LEAV-

ING MACHINE
Before leaving the operator’s seat, move the safety
lock lever to the “LOCKED” (Up) position.
This will not allow operation of any hydraulic c o n - PRE-START INSPECTION OF MACHINE
trols should they be accidentally moved. If the le-
LOCKED
ver is not set to the “LOCKED” position and hydraulic (UP) POSITION
controls are touched accidentally, the machine may
move suddenly resulting in serious injury.
Also before leaving the machine, lower the bucket
to the ground, place the safety lock lever in the
“LOCKED” (Up) position, stop the engine and re-
move the starter switch key.
UNLOCKED
(DOWN) POSITION
J. SIGNS, SIGNALS & FLAGMEN SAFETY LOCK LEVER

Install signs on soft shoulders and ground areas,
have a flagman direct the operation if necessary.
The operator should note marks and follow signals
from the flagman. All personnel should know the
meaning of the signs, marks, and signals. Only one
flagman should give the signs and signals.
K. KEEP FIRE AWAY FROM FUEL AND OIL

Oil, antifreeze, and especially fuel are highly flam-
mable. Never use fire near the machine. KEEP FIRE AWAY FROM FUEL & OIL
Securely tighten all fuel and oil caps. Keep fuel and
oil in the designated storage areas. Promptly clean
up any all spills and dispose of waste properly.
L. USE CAUTION NEAR NOISE

If noise is high during operation, hearing loss may
result. Approved hearing protection should be used
if personnel will be exposed to high noise levels for
a long period of time. USE CAUTION NEAR NOISE
1—5
M. MOUNTING & DISMOUNTING MACHINE
KEEP STEP CLEAN AND
When getting on and off the machine, always main- IN GOOD CONDITION
tain three point contact by using the handrails and
step. Inspect and clean handrails, step, and mount-
ing parts. Remove slippery materials, such as lu-
bricants, and mud. Always place the cab door en-
trance parallel to the tracks before stopping the en-
gine for dismounting.
N. AVOID HOT SURFACES & AREAS USE GRIP BARS

Immediately after the machine is operated, the tem- AND STEP
perature and pressure of the engine coolant, en-
gine oil, and hydraulic oil are very high. Burns may MOUNTING/DISMOUNTING MACHINE
result if caps are removed, or oil, water, or filters
are changed under these conditions. Wait until the
temperature goes down, before attempting to check
fluids or change filters.
O. USE THE PROPER OPTIONAL ATTACHMENT

Use only optional attachments designed for and
approved by KOBELCO. Read, understand and
HOT SURFACES
follow all instructions in the manual accompanying
the optional attachment. Use of any optional attach-
ment not approved by KOBELCO in writing, can
cause serious injury to personnel, damage to the
machine and its components and shorten the life of
the machine. Contact an authorized KOBELCO dis-
tributor for optional attachments available for the
machine.
P. PREVENT FIRES USE PROPER ATTACHMENT

Leaking or spilled fuel, lubricants and hydraulic oil
are fire hazards. Clean and properly dispose of spills
as they occur. Repair or replace all leaking compo-
nents to prevent fire. Also, clean the machine regu-
larly removing all debris to help prevent fires, pay
particular attention to removal of leaves, sticks,
paper etc. Keep fire extinguisher in an accessible
area and know how to use the fire extinguisher
should a fire occur.
PREVENT FIRES– CLEAN UP SPILLS
1.4 SAFETY DURING OPERATION
A. STARTING ENGINE
Sit in the operator’s seat.
Sound the horn before starting the engine to alert
people the machine is being started. Make sure no
one is near the machine.
Do not short circuit the starter circuit or battery to
start the machine. This may cause serious injury or
cause damage the electrical system.
SOUND HORN BEFORE STARTING
1—6
B. PASSENGERS
This equipment is not intended or designed for the
transportation of persons. Never allow persons to
ride on the machine. Serious injury or death can
result from allowing passengers on or in the ma-
chine.
C. TRAVEL
Make certain of the location of the travel motors
before operating travel controls. Sound horn before
moving the machine to inform persons that the ma-
chine is travelling. Position the attachment as shown NO PASSENGERS
in illustration before beginning travel.
Move the machine at slow speeds. Do not turn sud-
denly on rough terrain. Avoid travelling over ob-
stacles. Should it become necessary to travel over
an obstacle, keep the attachment low to the ground
and travel at extremely slow speed.
D. SWING
Make certain the swing area of machine is clear of
all persons and obstacles before operating swing
controls. Sound horn before swinging machine. If
necessary, have a flagman signal operator during TRAVEL MOTORS AT REAR OF MACHINE
operation to help prevent injury to persons or dam-
age to obstacles and equipment. KNOW TRAVEL MOTOR POSITION
E. BOOM, ARM & ATTACHMENTS

Give the work you are doing your undivided atten-
tion. Make certain the attachment being used is
suited for the job at hand. Make certain of obstacles
in the work area and operate the machine within
those limits. If necessary have a flagman signal the
operator to prevent injury to persons or damage to
the machine or obstacles in the work area. ZL11M04116
ALWAYS PLACE ATTACHMENTS ON THE

SWING SAFETY/USE SWING FLASHERS
GROUND AND RAISE THE SAFETY LOCK LE-
VER BEFORE LEAVING THE CAB.
F. OPERATING ON INCLINES OR SLOPES

Operation of this machine on an incline or slope
may cause the machine to become unstable or
unbalanced. Work up and down inclines or slopes
never across. Never swing or turn machine around
on slopes. Build a level area for the machine to op-
erate. Operate controls carefully to prevent sudden
movements which may cause the machine to slide
or tip over. Use a flagman to direct the operator.
BUILD BANKING FOR SLOPE OPERATION
1—7
G. WORKING AROUND UTILITIES
If it is suspected that utility lines such as gas, wa-
ter, phone or electrical power are in the work area,
contact the local utility authority for line location BE-
FORE beginning work in the area. Use extreme
caution around electrical power lines.
Keep a sufficient distance away from electrical lines
during operation. See chart below for minimum dis-
tances.
LINE VOLTAGE Minimum Distance - M (FEET)

0 ~ 50,000 3.0M (10) OR MORE
50,000 ~ 200,000 4.5M (15) OR MORE
200,000 ~ 350,000 6.0M (20) OR MORE
350,000 ~ 500,000 7.5M (25) OR MORE KEEP A SAFE DISTANCE FROM UTILITIES
500,000 ~ 750,000 10.5M (35) OR MORE
750,000 ~ 1,000,000 13.5M (45) OR MORE
H. LIFTING
This machine is an excavator. Use extreme cau-
tion when lifting or moving heavy loads. Use proper
lifting equipment rated at a capacity to handle the
load. NEVER USE BUCKET TEETH TO LIFT OR
MOVE HEAVY LOADS.
I . FROZEN OR SNOW COVERED WORK SITES

Use extreme caution when operating the machine
on frozen or snow covered work sites. Operate all
USE PROPER LIFTING DEVICES
controls slowly and cautiously to prevent sudden
movements that may cause the machine to unex-
pectedly shift, slide or move. Even on the slightest
slope, when snow is present or work area is frozen
can allow a machine to unexpectedly move.
Snow on shoulders or snow drifts can be much
deeper than expected. The machine can easily be-
come buried under such conditions. Use extreme
caution while operating the machine around or in
snow.
USE EXTREME CAUTION ON FROZEN OR SNOW
J. FILLED OR UNSTABLE GROUND

Be certain the condition of the work site is stable
and capable of supporting the machine during op-
eration. Do not operate attachment too close to the
machine. Operation of the machine on shoulders
or filled areas could cause the machine to become
unstable presenting a work hazard.
Position the travel motors to the rear of the ma-
chine, allowing for quick reversal, should the work
area become unstable.
WORK ON STABLE GROUND
1—8
K. RESTRICTED WORK AREAS
In work sites with limited height and swing areas
such as tunnels, bridges, around electrical power
lines, other utilities, or inside structures, use extreme
caution in keeping the machine and its attachment
a safe distance away to prevent personal injury and/
or equipment or structure damage. Use a flagman
to direct the operator.
L. PARKING THE MACHINE

Always park the machine on a firm, level surface.
If no firm level surface is available, block the tracks
and lower attachment to the ground to help prevent BE AWARE OF OBSTACLES
machine movement.
Should the machine be parked on a roadway, move
the machine to the shoulder to allow passing of traf-
fic. Also post reflective warning signs and markers
at a distance from the machine to safely warn mo-
torists. Refer to local code and regulations regard- 120°
ing the posting of work area warnings and mark- CHOCK
TRACKS
ers.
M. STABILIZE ATTACHMENTS
Stabilize all attachments removed from the machine
to prevent the attachment falling over.
PARKING SAFETY
1.5 INSPECTION & MAINTENANCE SAFETY

A. “TAG-OUT” MACHINE
Before performing any inspection or maintenance
procedures to the machine, fill out and post to the
operator’s controls a “DO NOT OPERATE” tag to
warn persons not to start the machine. Also inform
the supervisor and all operators that the machine
is under inspection or maintenance and they will
be informed when the machine is ready for normal
operation.
STABILIZE ATTACHMENTS WHEN REMOVED
B. TOOLS & EQUIPMENT

Use the proper tools and equipment for the task at
hand. Know the proper use of the tools and equip-
ment before starting any inspection or maintenance
procedures.
C. PERSONAL EQUIPMENT
Wear well fitting work clothes, hard hat, safety shoes
and gloves. Confine long hair, loose clothing and
remove all jewelry before attempting any inspec-
tion or maintenance procedures to this machine or
attachments. USE PROPER TOOLS
1—9
D. STOP THE ENGINE
LOCKED
BE CERTAIN TO TURN ENGINE OFF AND (UP) POSITION
PLACE THE SAFETY LOCK LEVER IN THE
“LOCKED” (UP) POSITION before attempting any
inspection or maintenance procedures to the ma-
chine. Failure to stop engine could result in serious
bodily injury or death.
E. SET THE ATTACHMENT

Always set the machine in the hydraulic oil check
position on firm level ground before attempting any
STOP ENGINE/ENGAGE SAFETY LOCK LEVER
inspection or maintenance procedures to the ma-
chine. If it is not possible to put the machine in this
position, secure the boom, arm and attachment to
help prevent sudden movement. ALWAYS PLACE
ATTACHMENTS ON THE GROUND AND RAISE
THE SAFETY LOCK LEVER BEFORE LEAVING
THE CAB.
F. CLEAN THE MACHINE

HYDRAULIC OIL CHECK POSITION
Keep the machine clean and free of debris, excess
or spilled lubricants, fuel and fluids. Use approved
solvents, detergents and water to clean the machine
and its components on a regular basis.
Be careful not to allow water to reach electrical com-
ponents. Serious damage can occur to the electri-
cal system by allowing water to reach the electrical
components. Never clean inside of cab, or electri-
cal components with pressurized water or steam.
G. PRESSURIZED FLUIDS & LUBRICANTS KEEP MACHINE CLEAN

Always release pressure from hydraulic reservoir,
engine coolant, fuel system and all systems con- DEPRESS RUBBER CAP
taining pressure before removing any caps or com- TO RELEASE PRESSURE
ponents. BE CAUTIOUS OF HOT FLUIDS AND
GASSES FROM SYSTEMS ON MACHINES THAT
HAVE JUST BEEN STOPPED. ALLOW SUFFI-
CIENT TIME FOR SYSTEMS TO COOL BEFORE
PERFORMING ANY INSPECTION OR MAINTE-
NANCE PROCEDURES.
H. SUPPORT THE MACHINE RELEASE HYDRAULIC TANK PRESSURE

If it becomes necessary to raise the machine for
inspection or maintenance, always support the
machine by positioning the machine as shown in
the illustration and use safety supports or blocks,
with a sufficient capacity rating to support the ma-
90~110°
chine, under the tracks. NEVER INSPECT OR PER-
FORM MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES UNDER
SUPPORT
A RAISED MACHINE THAT IS NOT SUFFI-
CIENTLY SUPPORTED.
SUPPORT THE MACHINE
1 — 10
I. REFUELING
Move the machine to a well ventilated area for refu-
eling. Use only specified fuel as described in the
MAINTENANCE section of this operator’s manual.
Immediately clean up all spilled fuel and dispose of
it properly. After refueling is complete, securely
tighten fuel cap.
J. HYDRAULIC PRESSURE
Under normal conditions, all circuits of the hydrau-
REFUELING
lic system are under extreme pressure. When in-
specting for leaks, use a small piece of cardboard,
wood or metal to locate leaks. SMALL (PINHOLE)
LEAKS CAN BE DANGEROUS IF CONTACT
WITH SKIN OR EYES IS MADE. Wear approved
safety glasses or face shield, gloves, hard hat,
safety shoes and work clothes during all inspection
and maintenance procedures.
K. TRACK SHOE TENSION

The grease used to adjust the track shoe tension is CHECKING FOR HIGH PRESSURE LEAKS
under extreme pressure in the cylinder. Use extreme
caution when adjusting track shoe tension. KEEP
FACE, HANDS AND LEGS AWAY FROM THE
GREASE NIPPLE AREA. Carefully and slowly
loosen the grease nipple when lessening track shoe
tension. Never loosen grease nipple more than one
complete turn.
L. ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Before performing any inspection or maintenance
to the electrical system, or performing any welding USE CAUTION WHEN ADJUSTING TRACKS
procedures, disconnect the negative (–) cables from
the battery terminals. Not disconnecting the nega-
tive (–) cable could cause extensive damage to the
electrical system.
DISCONNECT BATTERY
NEGATIVE (-) CABLE WHEN
M. USE APPROVED WORK LIGHTS
INSPECTING ELECTRICAL
Use only approved work lights when performing OR WELDING
inspection and maintenance procedures to prevent
possible fire or explosion. Certain types of work
lights should not be used due to the possibility of
ignition of certain flammable gasses and fluids from ELECTRICAL SYSTEM PRECAUTION
the machine.
N. DISPOSE OF WASTE PROPERLY

Dispose of oils, fuel, coolant, solvents, filters, bat-
teries etc. according to federal, state and local codes
and regulations regarding hazardous waste dis-
posal. Contact local authorities for proper disposal
methods of such materials.
USE PROPER LIGHTING
1 — 11
1.6 BATTERY SAFETY
A. WEAR PROPER PROTECTIVE CLOTHES

Wear long sleeve shirt, gloves and approved safety
glasses or face shield when working with or around
batteries. Battery electrolyte (acid) will cause se-
vere burns if allowed to make contact with clothing,
skin or eyes.
Should electrolyte (acid) come in contact with
WEAR PROTECTIVE CLOTHES
clothes, skin or eyes, immediately remove effected
clothing, flush area with clean water for 15 minutes
and get prompt medical attention.
B. KEEP AWAY FROM FIRE OR FLAMES

Never allow batteries in the vicinity of fire or flames
and do not smoke when working with batteries.
Explosive hydrogen gas is produced by the elec-
trolyte (acid) in the batteries. Always work with bat- KEEP AWAY FROM FIRE OR FLAMES
teries in a well ventilated area.
NEGATIVE (-) CABLE
C. CHARGING BATTERY
Charge battery off of and away from machine in a
well ventilated area. When charging battery, remove
POSITIVE (+) CABLE
cell covers to allow gasses to escape.
Avoid breathing gasses from battery. Wear ap-
proved safety equipment when working with bat-
teries.
D. USING BOOSTER CABLES MAKE CERTAIN OF THE POSITIVE (+) AND

Wear proper safety equipment when working with NEGATIVE (-) TERMINALS
batteries.
If using another machine or vehicle to boost batter-

IMPROPER BOOSTER CABLE CONNECTIONS CAN
ies, make certain the machine or vehicle DOES NOT
CAUSE AN EXPLOSION RESULTING IN PERSONAL
touch the disabled machine.
INJURY.
Make certain of the positive (+) and negative (–) CONNECT BOOSTER CABLES USING FOLLOWING
terminals on the booster battery and the disabled PROCEDURE.
machine before connecting booster cables. 1. CONNECT BOOSTER CABLE TO POSITIVE (+)
BATTERY TERMINAL OF DISCHARGED BAT-
Connect the positive (+) cable first, then connect
TERY. CONNECT OTHER END OF BOOSTER
negative (–). CABLE TO POSITIVE BATTERY TERMINAL OF
When disconnecting, disconnect the negative (–) NORMAL BATTERY.
cable first, then disconnect the positive (+) cable. 2. CONNECT OTHER BOOSTER CABLE TO NEGA-
TIVE (–) BATTERY TERMINAL OF NORMAL BAT-
Refer to BASIC MACHINE OPERATION section of TERY. CONNECT OTHER END OF BOOSTER
this manual for proper procedures for use of booster CABLE TO UPPER FRAME OF TROUBLED MA-
cables. CHINE.
3. START ENGINE AND REMOVE BOOSTER CABLES
IN REVERSE ORDER.
1 — 12
1.7 WARNING LABELS & DECALS (EU ONLY)
Warning labels and decals are affixed to the machine SUPPLEMENTARY EXPLANATION
to remind operators and personnel specific safety The content of pictograph in ISO warning labels is de-
precautions in certain areas of the machine. The fol- scribed on the foot of a label in detail, so read it with good
lowing are illustrated examples of all warning labels understanding.
and decals along with their locations.
1. SWING-DANGER 3. ACCUMULATOR CONTAINS PRESSURIZED GAS

Located on each side of the rear counterweight. -CAUTION
Part Number - ZL11M04124 (2REQ'D) Located on accumulator.
Part Number - YN20T01358P1
YN20T01358P1
ZL11M04124
ACCUMULATOR CONTAINS PRESSUREIZED GAS.

Pressurized gas can cause severe injury as a result
of explosion.
2. PRESSURIZED HOT OIL-WARNING • Do not disassemble.
Located on hydraulic tank. • Do not remove plug in service.
Part Number - YN20T01355P1 • Do not dispose without relieving gas by loosening
plug
4. ENGINE RUNNING-CAUTION
Located on engine cover.
YN20T01355P1
YN20T01363P1
Pressurized hot oil can

cause burns. Rotating engine fan, hot engine parts and drive belt
Depress cap slowly with can cause severe injury.
engine off to relieve Do not open engine cover or service engine with
hydraulic tank pressure. engine running.
1 — 13
5. HANDLING BATTERY-DANGER AND WARNING
Located on battery box access cover.
Part Number - YN20T01356P1 Improper booster cable connections
can cause an explosion resulting in
personal injury.
Connect booster cables using
following procedure.
1. Connect booster cable to positive
(+) battery terminal of discharged
battery. Connect other end of
booster cable to positive battery
terminal of normal battery.
2. Connect other booster cable to
negative (–) battery terminal of
normal battery. Connect other end
of booster cable to upper frame of
troubled machine.
YN20T01356P1
3. Start engine and remove booster
cables in reverse order.
CONNECTING A BOOSTER CABLE (RED)
NORMAL BATTERY
AVOID ACID BURNS

DISCHARGED BATTERY
• Electrolyte is an acid and can cause injury
or blindness if it contacts with skin or eyes. TO THE UPPER FRAME OF A
(BLACK) TROUBLED MACHINE
• Wear eye protection and protective clothing
when handling or servicing batteries.
• If electrolyte contacts skin or eyes, flush
affected areas immediately with clean water
and seek medical attention
6. BOOSTER CABLE-WARNING
DANGER EXPLOSIVE GASES Part Number - ZL11N01104
Cigarettes, flames or sparks could cause battery to explode. Always
shield eyes and face from battery. Do not charge or use booster cables
or adjust post connections without proper instruction and training.
KEEP VENT CAPS TIGHT AND LEVEL

POISON CAUSES SEVERE BURNS
Contains sulfuric acid. Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing. In
event of accident flush with water and call a physician immediately.
KEEP OUT OF REACH OF CHILDREN
PREVENT BATTERY EXPLOSION

• Batteries give off hydrogen gasses that can ZL11N01104
explode and cause personal injury.

• Keep sparks, open flames and cigarettes away
from batteries.
• Keep metallic articles away from batteries.
• Keep all ventilation caps tightly secured. Electric hazard may cause injury
• Never check charge by placing metal articles when mishandling the cable.
Read operator manual for safe
• Leave battery box open to improve ventilation
when charging. and proper handling.
1 — 14
7. PRESSURIZED HOT OIL & 8. DO NOT CLIMB-WARNING 9. STOP ENGINE-WARNING
COOLANT-WARNING Located on fuel tank. Located on engine radiator.
Located on top of engine radiator. Part Number - ZL11N02604 Part Number - ZL11N05204
Part Number - ZL11N00404
ZL11N00404 ZL11N02604 ZL11N05204
10. HOT PARTS-CAUTION 11. STOP ENGINE-WARNING 13. HEAVY LIFT SWITCH-
Located on engine radiator. Located on engine radiator. WARNING
Part Number - ZL11N00504 Part Number - ZL11N05104 Located inside cab R.H.
Part Number - YT20T01351P1
ZL11N00504 ZL11N05104
YN20T01351P1
12. DO NOT CLIMB UPON ENGINE COVER-WARNING

Located on engine cover. Turning off heavy lift switch while
Part Number - ZL11M02708 lifting a load can cause unexpected
lowering of load,resulting in severe
HEAVY LIFT SWITCH injury or death.
ON
OFF Never turn off heavy lift switch while
lifting a load.
ZL11M02708
1 — 15
14. SWING BRAKE RELEASE-CAUTION 16. POWER BOOST SWITCH-WARNING
Located on rear cover. Located inside cab R.H.
Part Number - YN20T01353P1 Part Number - YN20T01351P1
YN20T01353P1
The swing parking brake release switch

are installed on the rear side this cover.
Swing parking brake release switch YN20T01351P1
• While operating swing aciton,

when the parking brake can not
be released, set the toggle
switch to "RELEASE" position,
and the parking brake is
released. Usually, this toggle
switch should be set to Releasing power boost switch while
"NORMAL" position and contact lifting a load can cause unexpected
our service shop immediately. lowering of load, resulting in severe
POWER BOOST SWITCH injury or death.
15. BUCKET TO CAB CONTACT-CAUTION Never use power boost switch for
Located inside cab R.H. lifting a load.
17. NIBBLER & BREAKER OPERATION-CAUTION

Located on right hand operator console. (OPT)
Part Number - YT20T01354P1
YN20T01354P1
YN20T01350P1
Do not set this switch to nibbler combined flow

operation position when using breaker.
Bucket can contact and
damage cab when
CAUTION
FOR machine equipped with
INTERFERE some attachments.
Check clearance
between bucket and
cab before operation.
Exercise care when
operating a bucket near
cab.
1 — 16
18. DO NOT PINCH YOUR HAND(S)-CAUTION 20. KEEP CLEAR WORKING AREA-DANGER
Located on operator seat support. Located on arm.
Part Number - ZL11M03708 Part Number - ZL11M07508 (2-REQ'D)
ZL11M03708
Be careful not to pinch

your hand(s) when
ZL11M07508
operating the lever.
19. SAFETY LOCK LEVER-WARNING 21. DO NOT PINCH YOUR HAND(S)-CAUTION

Located on control stand. Located inside cab R.H.
Part Number - ZL11N04204 Part Number - ZL11N03704
ZL11N04204 ZL11N03704
Machine may move suddenly and cause serious

personal injury if a control lever is accidentally Be careful not to pinch
touched be sure the safety lock lever is disengaged your hand(s) when
and in the locked position before exiting the cab. operating the lever.
1 — 17
22. READ OPERATOR'S MANUAL-WARNING 25. ELECTRICAL POWER LINES-WARNING
Located inside cab R.H. Located inside cab R.H.
Part Number - ZL11N00104 Part Number - ZL11N01304
ZL11N00104 ZL11N01304
23. LIFTING FRONT WINDOW-WARNING 26. ENGINE OIL PAN DRAIN PLUG-CAUTION
Located inside cab front window. Located on frame.
Part Number - ZL11M06008 Part Number - LC20T01016P1 (ME158710)
ENGINE OIL PAN DRAIN PLUG

DO NOT OVER TIGHTEN AT INSTALL PLUG
STANDARD TIGHTENING TORQUE = 5~8 kgf·m
(AFTER TIGHTENING BY HAND, TIGHTEN WITH
RATCHET WRENCH AT ANGLE OF 15~30°)
STANDARD TOOL : L = 250 mm MIDDLE TYPE
ZL11M06008
RATCHET WRENCH ME158710
24. ADJUSTING TRACK 27. ENGINE AUTO IDLING STOP-NOTICE

TENSION-WARNING Located inside cab R.H.
Located inside cab R.H. Part Number - YN20T01696P1
Part Number - ZL11N07704
YN20T01696P1
When an auto idling stop

switch is ON, after raising
a safety lock lever, engine
stops after fixed time
progress.
ZL11N07704 Applicable No. LC09-06323~
YC09-03088~
1 — 18
28. ENGINE AUTO IDLING STOP-WARNING
Located inside cab R.H.
YN20T01685P1
When you do the work which has

fear, such as fall of a load,
when engine stops, please be sure
to turn OFF an auto idling stop
switch.
The auto idling stop function for

cutting down generating of the useless
fuel consumption and an exhaust gas at
the time of a stop in this machine is
carried. When you use it, be careful of
the following things.
· When you start the engine again after an
auto idling stop, please be sure to start
after once returning a key switch at
ACC or OFF and also returning a throttle
potentiometer to Lo. But the engine cannot
be again started until a buzzer stops,
after engine stops.
· When you leave from a cab for a long
time, please be sure to turn OFF
a starter switch.
· When the engine coolant temperature error
are displayed with the LCD or lamp, it
does not operate, even if the auto idling
stop switch is turned on ON.
Please read the operator's manual.
Applicable No. LC09-06323~
YC09-03088~
1 — 19
1.8 WARNING LABELS & DECALS (OCEANIA ONLY)
Warning labels and decals are affixed to the machine to remind operators and personnel specific safety precau-
tions in certain areas of the machine. The following are illustrated examples of all warning labels and decals along
with their locations.
1. SWING – DANGER 4. PREVENT BATTERY EXPLOSIONS – WARNING

Located on each side of the rear counterweight. Located on battery box access cover.
Part Number - YN20T01003P2 (2-REQ'D) Part Number - YN20T01001P1

• Batteries give off hydrogen gasses that can
explode and cause personal injury.
from batteries.
• Keep all ventilation caps tightly secured.
• Never check charge by placing metal articles
when charging. YN20T01001P1
5. BOOSTER CABLE – WARNING

2. HOT COOLANT – WARNING Located on battery box access cover.
Located on top of engine radiator. Part Number - YN20T01015P2
Improper booster cable connections

can cause an explosion resulting in
Steam of hot coolant can cause injury or personal injury.
blindness.
Connect booster cables using following
Never loosen or open radiator cap when procedure.
coolant is hot and under pressure. 1. Connect booster cable to positive (+)
Before opening radiator cap: battery terminal of discharged battery.
Connect other end of booster cable to
• Cool down engine completely. positive battery terminal of normal
• Cover radiator with cloth rag. battery.
2. Connect other booster cable to
• Loosen cap slowly to relieve pressure. negative(–) battery terminal of normal
YN20T01010P1 battery. Connect other end of booster
cable to upper frame of troubled machine.
3. Start engine and remove booster
cables in reverse order.
CONNECTING A BOOSTER CABLE (RED)
NORMAL BATTERY
DISCHARGED BATTERY
3. STOP ENGINE – WARNING (BLACK)
TO THE UPPER FRAME OF A
TROUBLED MACHINE
Located on top of engine radiator. YN20T01015P2
6. AVOID ACID BURNS – WARNING
AVOID ACID BURNS

• Electrolyte is an acid and can cause injury
or blindness if it contacts with skin or eyes.
Rotating parts can cause personal injury. • Wear eye protection and protective clothing
when handling or servicing batteries.
Keep away from fan and belt when engine is
• If electrolyte contacts skin or eyes, flush
running. affected areas immediately with clean water
Stop engine before servicing. and seek medical attention.
YN20T01009P1 YN20T01017P1
1 — 20
7. PRESSURIZED HOT OIL – WARNING 10. HANDLING BATTERY – DANGER
Located on top of hydraulic tank. Located on battery box access cover.
Part Number - YN20T01405P1 Part Number - PY20T01069P1
DANGER EXPLOSIVE GASES

Cigarettes, flames or sparks could cause battery to explode. Always
shield eyes and face from battery. Do not charge or use booster cables
or adjust post connections without proper instruction and training.
KEEP VENT CAPS TIGHT AND LEVEL

POISON CAUSES SEVERE BURNS
Contains sulfuric acid. Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing. In
Pressurized hot oil can event of accident flush with water and call a physician immediately.
KEEP OUT OF REACH OF CHILDREN
cause burns. PY20T01069P1
Depress cap slowly with
engine off to relieve
hydraulic tank pressure.
YN20T01405P1
8. DO NOT CLIMB – WARNING 11. HOT PARTS – CAUTION 12. ROTATING & HOT PARTS –
Located on fuel tank. Located on engine cover. CAUTION
Part Number - 2432T6111 Part Number - YN20T01220P1 Located on engine cover.
Rotating engine fan, hot

engine parts and drive belt
can cause severe injury.
Do not open engine cover
or service engine with
engine running.
Engine may be hot which
YN20T01012P1
could cause burns.
When servicing or repairing
Do not touch engine until
machine, keep surfaces free
it cools down
of oil, water, grease, tools, YN20T01220P1
etc. to avoid possible slipping
and/or falling from machine,
which can cause personal injury.
2432T6111
9. FUEL TANK LIFTING – WARNING 13. DO NOT USE COUNTERWEIGHT LIFTING – DANGER
Located on fuel tank. Located on counterweight.
Part Number - YN20T01028P1 Part Number - YN20T01221P1 (2-REQ'D)
Lift eyes or tank can fail when Do not use counterweight lifting eyes
lifting tank containing fluids to lift whole machine.
and cause possible personal Lifting eyes can fall under this load
injury. resulting in personal injury.
Drain all fluids from tank before
lifting. Refer to operators manual for proper
YN20T01028P1
way of lifting machine.
YN20T01221P1
1 — 21
14. HANDLING PILOT HOSES – CAUTION 17. HYDRAULIC OIL CHECK POSITION – NOTICE
Located on cab rear side cover. Located on back side of pump comparnent door.
Part Number - YN20T01290P2 Part Number - 2432P3379
SK210~SK480 SK160 LEVEL GAUGE

TO PILOT TO CONTROL 1. BUCKET (H)
VALVE VALVE SIDE 2. BUCKET (R) THE LEVEL OF THE
3. BOOM (H) HYDRAULIC OIL
(HALF OF THE
4. BOOM (R) LEVEL GAUGE)
5. SWING (LH)
6. SWING (RH) Lack of hydraulic oil will cause
7. ARM (H) damage to main hydraulic pump.
8. ARM (R) Before starting operation:
• Place machine on level ground.
· HYDRAULIC OIL CAN BE HOT AFTER MACHINE OPERATION. • Fully retract arm and bucket
ALLOW OIL TO COOL BEFORE STATING MACHINE WORK. cylinders and lower boom to
· BEFORE DISCONNECTING THE HYDRAULIC HOSES. LOOSEN THE ground.
AIR BREATHER ON THE HYDRAULIC OIL TANK AND BLEED OFF • Check hydraulic oil level gauge
THE REMEINING PRESSURE LEFT IN THE HYDRAULIC SYSTEM. for proper level. 2432P3379
· CONTROL PATTERN FUNCTIONS MUST CORRESPOND TO BLACK
AND WHITE DECAL LOCATED ON THE CONTROL CONSOLE.
YN20T01290P2
18. BUCKET TO CAB CONTACT – CAUTION
Part Number - 2432P3380
15. BATTERY CABLE – WARNING

Located on battery box access cover. Bucket can contact and
Part Number - YN20T01338P1 damage cab when
CAUTION machine equipped with
FOR
INTERFERE some attachments.
Electric hazard may cause injury Check clearance

when mishandling the cable. between bucket and
Read operator manual for safe cab before operation.
and proper handling. Exercise care when
YN20T01338P1 operating a bucket near
cab. 2432P3380
19. ADJUSTING TRACK TENSION – WARNING

16. SWING BRAKE RELEASE – CAUTION Part Number - 2432T6110
Located on rear cover.
The swing parking brake release switch

are installed on the rear side this cover.
Swing parking brake release switch

• While operating swing aciton,
when the parking brake can not
be released, set the toggle
switch to "RELEASE" position, Extreme high pressure in track adjustment cylin-
and the parking brake is
released. Usually, this toggle der can cause personal injury when adjusting
switch should be set to crawler tension.
"NORMAL" position and contact Loosen grease nipple with care to relieve pressure
our service shop immediately.
gradually.
YN20T01639P1 2432T6110
1 — 22
20. OPERATION BY FOOT PEDAL – CAUTION 23. SAFETY LOCK LEVER – WARNING
Part Number - PY20T01062P1 (OPT.) Part Number - PY20T01073P1
Attachment operation by foot pedal. Machine may move suddenly and cause serious
Always check the foot pedal control pattern be- personal injury if a control lever is accidentally
fore operation. touched be sure the safety lever is disengaged
Always read operators manual before operating and in the locked position before exiting the cab.
machine. PY20T01073P1
PY20T01062P1
24. DO NOT PINCH YOUR HAND(S) – CAUTION

21. GENERAL PRECAUTIONS – WARNING Located on operator seat support and inside cab R.H.
Located inside cab R.H. Part Number - YN20T01339P1 (2-REQ'D)
Be careful not to pinch

Read and understand the operators manual
your hand(s) when
before operating or performing maintenance on
operating the lever.
this machine.
Failure to follow or pay attention to instructions YN20T01339P1
in operators manual can result in injury or death.
It is your responsibility to be aware of and follow
all local laws and regulations. 25. KEEP CLEAR WORKING AREA – DANGER
Before starting machine, make sure hydraulic Located on arm.
control lever is in lockout position and all control Part Number - YN20T01337P1 (2-REQ'D)
levers are in neutral.
Sound horn to alert people.
Ensure bystanders and obstacles are clear of
machine before moving machine or its attachments.
Do not carry riders on machine.
Before leaving operators compartment, park on
level ground, lower attachments to ground, make
sure hydraulic control lever is in lockout position
and stop engine. YN20T01337P1
YN20T01016P1
26. SELECTOR VALVE – CAUTION

22. ELECTRICAL POWER LINES – WARNING
Located inside cab R.H. Part Number - YY20T01039P1 (OPT.)
Procedure to change MAINTENANCE
Contact with electrical power lines will result selector valve (When using nibbler, breaker or extra)
Mark SELECTION • Contamination and deterioration
in severe injury or death. of hydraulic oil may develop
N Nibbler
Keep machine and attachment a safe distance B Breaker malfunctioning of control valves,
from electrical power lines as per following E EXTRA early wear and seizure of
hydraulic pumps, and consequential
instruction. Please adjust suitable damage of entire hydraulic
VOLTAGE (Volts) SAFETY DISTANCE notch to capscrew. circuit.
(some mark may not be Replace filters and hydraulic oil,
50K OR LESS 3.0M (10FT) refering to the following table.
indicated)
50K TO 200K 4.5M (15FT) CAPSCREW
200K TO 350K 6.0M (20FT) Notch (1) Hydraulic oil change
350K TO 500K 7.5M (25FT) : Every 600 HRS.
(2) Hydraulic return filter change
500K TO 750K 10.5M (35FT) First : 50 HRS
750K OR OVER 13.5M (45FT) Regular : Every 250 HRS
Marks
YN20T01006P1 YY20T01039P1
1 — 23
27. ENGINE STOPPING – NOTICE 31. LIFTING FRONT WINDOW – CAUTION
Located inside cab R.H. Located inside cab front window.
Part Number - YN20T01007P1 Part Number - YN20T01416P1
Stopping engine without allowing it to cool Falling front window can cause injury.
can result in overheating and shortened Always lock securely in place with lock lever on
engine life. both sides. YN20T01416P1
Before stopping engine, run at low idle for

32. NIBBLER & BREAKER OPERATION POSITION
at least 5 minutes to allow engine and
– CAUTION
turbo charger to gradually cool down.
Located on right hand operator console.
YN20T01007P1
Part Number - YT20T01054P1 (OPT.)
28. ROTARY MULTI – WARNING
Part Number - YN20T01039P1 (OPT.)
Do not set this switch to nibbler combined flow
operation position when using breaker.
YT20T01054P1
This machine equipped with a rotary multi-control
valve which allows changing of operating lever 33. NIBBLER & HYDRAULIC BREAKER – CAUTION
control patterns. Located inside cab R.H.
Operating this machine before checking function of Part Number - YN20T01414P1 (OPT.)
each control lever can cause unexpected machine
movement, which can result in serious personal injury.
Make sure you check and know function of each
control lever before operating. MAINTENANCE
YN20T01039P1
(When using nibbler or breaker)
29. AUTOMATIC TWO SPEED TRAVEL – WARNING Contamination and deterioration of hydraulic oil
Located inside cab R.H. may develop malfunctioning of control valves,
Part Number - YN20T01048P1 early wear and seizure of hydraulic pumps, and
consequential damage of entire hydraulic circuit.
Replace filters and hydraulic oil, refering to the
following table.
Automatic two speed travel
system changes travel speed (1) Hydraulic oil change
automatically and can adversly : Every 600 hrs.
affect machine control when (2) Hydraulic return filter change
descending a slope and loading First : 50 hrs
or unloading on a trailer. Regular : Every 250 hrs
YN20T01414P1
Personal injury can occur from
sudden change in machine control.
Put travel speed select switch 34. ACCUMULATOR CONTAINS PRESSURIZED GAS
in LOW speed position when – WARNING
descending a slope and loading or Located on side of nitrogen accumulator.
unloading on a trailer. YN20T01048P1 Part Number - YN20T01216P1
30. POWER BOOST SWITCH – WARNING

ACCUMULATOR CONTAINS PRESSURIZED GAS.
Pressurized gas can cause severe injury as a result
of explosion.
• Do not disassemble.
• Do not remove plug in service.
Releasing power boost switch while • Do not dispose without relieving gas by loosening
lifting a load can cause unexpected plug
YN20T01216P1
lowering of load, resulting in severe
POWER BOOST SWITCH injury or death.
Never use power boost switch for
lifting a load.
YN20T01004P1
1 — 24
35. ROTARY MULTI CONTROL VALVE – DANGER 38. ENGINE OIL PAN DRAIN PLUG-CAUTION
Located on cab rear side cover. Located on frame.
Part Number - YN20T01642P1 (OPT.) Part Number - LC20T01016P1 (ME158710)
ROTARY MULTI CONTROL.

CHANGEOVER PROCEDURE
SCREW
K : KOBELCO
• STOP THE ENGINE
KNOB ISO: KAWASAKI
KATO • LOOSE SCREW AND SET
DO NOT OVER TIGHTEN AT INSTALL PLUG
IHI LEVER POSITION STANDARD TIGHTENING TORQUE = 5~8 kgf·m
M : MITSUBISHI
H : KOMATSU • TIGHTEN SCREW (AFTER TIGHTENING BY HAND, TIGHTEN WITH
HITACHI
SUMITOMO
RATCHET WRENCH AT ANGLE OF 15~30°)
STANDARD TOOL : L = 250 mm MIDDLE TYPE
STOP THE ENGINE RATCHET WRENCH ME158710
WITHOUT FAIL AT
TURN LEVER WITH
TIME OF CHANGEOVER
PULLING THE KNOB
YN20T01642P1
36. SPECIAL ATTACHMENT OPERATION – NOTICE 39. ENGINE AUTO IDLING STOP-WARNING
Part Number - YN20T01640P1 (OPT.) Part Number - YN20T01695P1 (OPT.)
This machine is equipped

special attachment. Always
operate the machine with
working mode “A” position. When you do the work which has
Unsuitable control of fear, such as fall of a load,
when engine stops, please be sure
machine may occurred to turn OFF an auto idling stop
if operating with other switch.
working mode except “A”
mode. YN20T01640P1
The auto idling stop function for

cutting down generating of the useless
fuel consumption and an exhaust gas at
the time of a stop in this machine is
37. ENGINE AUTO IDLING STOP-NOTICE carried. When you use it, be careful of
Located inside cab R.H. the following things.
Part Number - YN20T01694P1 (OPT.) · When you start the engine again after an
auto idling stop, please be sure to start
after once returning a key switch at
ACC or OFF and also returning a throttle
potentiometer to Lo. But the engine cannot
When an auto idling stop be again started until a buzzer stops,
switch is ON, after raising after engine stops.
a safety lock lever, engine
stops after fixed time · When you leave from a cab for a long
progress. time, please be sure to turn OFF
a starter switch.
· When the engine coolant temperature error
YC09-03088~ are displayed with the LCD or lamp, it
does not operate, even if the auto idling
stop switch is turned on ON.
YC09-03088~
1 — 25
1.9 PROHIBITED MACHINE OPERATION
The following examples of machine abuse and mis-
use should never be attempted by even the most
experienced operator. Such abuse and misuse of this
machine and its attachments can result in serious
bodily injury, death, severe equipment damage and
shortened service life of the machine. Under no cir-
cumstance should any of these operations be at-
tempted. Use common sense and follow proper op-
eration procedures found in this operator’s manual
while operating this equipment.
A. DO NOT USE TRACTIVE FORCE OF THE MA- DO NOT USE TRACTIVE FORCE
CHINE FOR LOADING THE BUCKET ATTACH-
MENT
Doing so will exert excessive force on the machine
structure, front end attachments and could cause
severe equipment damage. Use tracks for normal
travel operations only.
B. DO NOT USE SLEWING FORCE OF THE MA-

CHINE FOR OPERATIONS
Doing so will exert excessive force to the machine
structure, front end attachments and shorten life of
the swinging system of the machine. Also, serious
injury or death could result from such operations.
DO NOT USE SLEWING FORCE
C. DO NOT PERFORM “HAMMERING” OPERA-

TIONS WITH THE BUCKET.
Performing operations such as hammering and pil-
ing will cause extensive damage to the machine
and its components. These types of operations can
also result in serious injury or death.
DO NOT HAMMER WITH ATTACHMENT
D. DO NOT USE THIS MACHINE FOR ANYTHING

OTHER THAN ITS INTENDED PURPOSE.
This machine is designed and manufactured for
digging and loading operations only. Any other use
can exert excessive force to the machine, its com-
ponents, its systems and result in serious bodily
injury or death to the operators and other person-
nel working in the vicinity of or with the machine.
USE ONLY FOR INTENDED PURPOSE
1 — 26
E. DO NOT OPERATE BUCKET AND ARM CYLIN-
ALLOWANCES
DERS TO STROKE END REPEATEDLY
Extending the bucket and arm cylinders to stroke
end to clean debris from the bucket, will cause im-
pact to the bucket cylinder causing cylinder dam-
age. Use high pressure water or manually remove
stubborn material from the bucket.
F. DO NOT OVER EXERT THE MACHINE’S CA-

PACITIES.
Know the limitations of the machine and its attach-
ments and operate the machine within those speci-
fications. Do not exceed lift charts. Never tip or raise DO NOT OPERATE CYLINDER TO STROKE END
the machine to obtain power to move material. This
could cause extensive damage to the machine and
its components as well as result in serious bodily
injury or death.
1.10 END OF WORK SHIFT SAFETY

Perform all of the following procedures after each
shift is complete to insure the machine it in optimal
operating condition for the next shift or job site.
A. Move the machine to a firm, level surface.
B. Lower attachment to the ground. DO NOT OVER EXERT THE MACHINE
C. Refill fuel tank to full mark to reduce air volume

and condensation (moisture). This will decrease
the possibility of freezing in the fuel tank, rusting
due to moisture and other problems associated
with start up and operation.
D. Close and secure all windows in place to prevent

water or moisture reaching the electrical compo-
nents of the machine.
E. Thoroughly clean and inspect the machine. Per-

form lubrication maintenance and repair or replace
any problem areas found before restarting the
machine. END OF WORK SHIFT SAFETY
F. If operating the machine in cold climates, it may

be necessary to remove the batteries from the
machine and store in a warm well ventilated area.
Install the batteries in the machine before next
start up. This will help prevent premature battery
deterioration.
G. Remove key from key switch and lock all doors

and access panels.
1 — 27
1.11 USE FOPS AND FRONT GUARD (EU SPEC.)
For some jobs (e.g. demolition), a safety structure FOPS
(e.g. FOPS, Front guard) is needed. When your ma-
chine does not have this safety structure, you are
not allowed to use your machine for this kind of ap-
FRONT
plication. GUARD
Please check your local dealer in case of doubt.
FOPS : Falling Object Protective Structure
USE FOPS AND FRONT GUARD
1.12 USE SAFETY VALVE AND OVERLOAD

ALARM (EU SPEC.)
If your machine is used for lifting application and has
a maximum rated lifting capacity bigger than 1 ton or
an overturning moment bigger than 40,000 Nm your
machine needs safety valves and an overload alarm
according to the EN 474 standard.
Please check your local dealer in case of doubt.
1 — 28
Section II – MACHINE FAMILIARIZATION
Table of Contents
FAMILIARIZATION ....................................................................................................................................... 2-1
GENERAL MACHINE NOMENCLATURE ................................................................................................... 2-1
OPERATOR CAB NOMENCLATURE .......................................................................................................... 2-2
COMPONENT & CONTROLS NOMENCLATURE ....................................................................................... 2-3 ~ 2-22
Right Hand Operator Console .............................................................................................................. 2-3 ~ 2-14
Tuner (FM & AM) ..................................................................................................................................... 2-7 ~ 2-13
Left Hand Operator Console ................................................................................................................. 2-14 ~ 2-22
Air Conditioner ....................................................................................................................................... 2-14 ~ 2-18
Rear Panel And Others .......................................................................................................................... 2-23 ~ 2-24
Operating Levers And Controls ............................................................................................................ 2-25 ~ 2-27
Gauge Cluster ........................................................................................................................................ 2-28 ~ 2-38
Operator Cab And Operator Seat ......................................................................................................... 2-39 ~ 2-43
Seat Belt .................................................................................................................................................. 2-44
Machine Access Panels And Doors ..................................................................................................... 2-44

PRECAUTIONS AND PROCEDURES FOUND IN
THIS MANUAL BEFORE ATTEMPTING ANY OPERA-
TION, INSPECTION OR MAINTENANCE OF THIS
MACHINE, ATTACHMENT OR SYSTEMS.
2—0
2.1 FAMILIARIZATION 2.2 GENERAL MACHINE NOMENCLATURE
All operators, service mechanics and personnel re- The nomenclature drawing below (Figure 2.1), points
sponsible for operation, inspection and maintenance out locations of major components of the KOBELCO
of the machine should become thoroughly familiar SK330(LC)-6E and SK330NLC-6E hydraulic excavator.
with the controls and components and their functions Study these areas and locate these components on
before working with or on this equipment. the machine. Specific information regarding these
Study the information in this section to become fa- components are explained on the following pages of
miliar with the controls and components of this ma- this section.
chine.
ARM CYLINDER
ARM
BOOM
SWIVEL JOINT
BUCKET
CYLINDER
SWING MOTOR
BATTERIES
HANDRAIL
IDLER
LINK FUEL TANK
MAIN CONTROL VALVE
BUCKET BOOM CYLINDER
HYDRAULIC OIL TANK
LINK
MITSUBISHI
OPERATOR CAB 6D16-TLU2D
ENGINE
PUMP ACCESS
BUCKET
DOOR
TRACK SHOE ASSEMBLY HYDRAULIC

(600 mm STANDARD) PUMP
TRACK IDLER (1 EACH SIDE)
TRACK SPRING (1 EACH SIDE) COUNTER

WEIGHT
LOWER ROLLER (7 EACH SIDE)
(9 EACH SIDE)-LC·NLC
UPPER ROLLER (2 EACH SIDE) ENGINE RADIATOR
TRACK GUIDE OIL COOLER
ENGINE AIR CLEANER
ENGINE COOLANT RESERVOIR
TRAVEL MOTOR
RADIATOR ACCESS DOOR
FIGURE 2.1
2—1
2.3 OPERATOR CAB NOMENCLATURE
The operator cab nomenclature (Figure 2.2), points Study these areas and locate these components on
out locations of operator controls of the KOBELCO the machine. Specific information regarding these
SK330(LC)-6E and SK330NLC-6E hydraulic excavator components are explained on the following pages of
operator cab. section VI.
LEFT TRAVEL LEVER RIGHT TRAVEL LEVER

LEFT TRAVEL PEDAL RIGHT TRAVEL PEDAL
LEFT FOOT REST RIGHT FOOT REST GAUGE CLUSTER
RIGHT HAND
LEFT HAND OPERATOR OPERATOR CONTROL
CONTROL LEVER LEVER (POWER
(HORN SWITCH) BOOST SWITCH)
24V CIGARETTE
SAFETY LOCK LEVER LIGHTER
(FOR HYDRAULICS)
ASH-TRAY
ENGINE EMERGENCY
STOP CONTROL
LEFT SIDE SWITCH THROTTLE

PANEL POTENTIOMETER
SWING FLASHER
SWITCH
AIR-CONDITIONER 12V POWER SUPPLY
PANEL
KEY SWITCH
ARM REST TUNER (FM & AM)

Locally-procured
parts in EU area
OPERATORS SEAT
(3 WAY ADJUSTABLE)
SWING PARKING BRAKE HEAD REST

RELEASE SWITCH (ADJUSTABLE)
FIGURE 2.2
2—2
2.4 COMPONENT & CONTROLS NOMENCLA-
TURE KEY SWITCH POSITIONS
The following information provides a brief descrip-
tion and function of the components and controls of
the KOBELCO SK330(LC)-6E and SK330NLC-6E hy-
draulic excavator.
All personnel associated with this machine should
read and understand this information BEFORE be-
ginning any work with or on this equipment.
A. RIGHT HAND OPERATOR CONSOLE

1. Key Switch – FIGURE 2.3
The key switch is located on the right hand opera-
tor console and has 5 operating functions.
“HEAT” .... This position is used for starting the
engine in cold climates. See section III.
“OFF” ...... When key is turned to this position, the
engine stops and electrical power to the
machine’s electrical systems is stopped FIGURE 2.3
after approximately 4 seconds.
“ACC” ...... With key in the “ACC” position only the
cigarette lighter, tuner and horn will have
power. (1)
“ON” ........ When key is in the ON position, electri-
cal power is supplied to all the machine’s
electrical systems.
“START” .. When key is turned to this position elec-
trical power is supplied to the starter so-
lenoid causing the starter to start the en-
gine. After engine starts key should be
released to go back to the “ON” position.
2. KPSS Mode Switch (1) – FIGURE 2.4
The KPSS mode switch is located on the gauge
cluster switch panel and has 3 operating functions.
After starting the engine, the mode
switch is turned to mode default.
Select an effective work mode comply-
ing with the working condition and work-
ing target from 3 modes.
Each time the work mode switch is FIGURE 2.4
pressed, the work mode indicator lamp is
switched to , and in order.
a. A (assist) mode
The mode is set meeting to the operator’s
work condition.
The controller makes a distinction between Digging mode Leveling mode
works, digging, leveling, spreading, slope fin-
ishing, tamping etc. automatically, and dis-
plays the distinction results on the multi dis-
play per second. And the power correspond- Spreading mode Tamping mode Standby mode
ing to the load is output, the engine speed is
controlled to a constant speed, and conse-
quently the noise is lowered.
2—3
b. M (manual) mode
This mode catches the movement of FLOW L Displayed
RATE min flow rate
control lever sensitively and is suitable
(b)
for the heavy load digging work giving
priority to the work load at high speed.
c. B (breaker) mode
When the attachments in option like
breaker, etc. are used, the operator can
(2) (3) (1)
adjust the max. flow rate.
a. Flow rate display

• After turning the key switch “ON” (the engine
does not start) set it to B (Breaker) mode (a) by
pressing mode select switch (1).
• Keep pressed the screen change switch (2) on
the gauge cluster, after 3 to 10 seconds the mode
is switched to the adjust mode. FIGURE 2.5
The flow rate stored last time is displayed, but in

case of the initial display, Maximum flow rate is
displayed as standard value.
• Press the mode switch (1), and the displayed
flow rate (b) is increased, and press the buzzer
stop switch (3), and the displayed flow rate (b)
is reduced.
• In operating switches (1), (3) the addition or re-
duction starts 2 seconds later and displays in
graduation of 10 L/min, release the switches
when the required flow rate is obtained.
The flow rate can be adjusted in the maximum
up to minimum range.
(a)
• Pressing the screen change switch (2) again,
the adjusted flow rate value is stored, and the
adjust mode is dismissed.
3. Buzzer Stop Switch (3) – FIGURE 2.6

When the engine coolant temperature is
too high, or various sensors of mechatro DISPLAYED
controller (self-diagnosis) fail, the alarm FLOW RATE
sounds intermittently. To stop sounding, (b)
press the buzzer stop button. FLOW L
RATE min
NOTE
The buzzer sounding because of the preheat complete
operation and because of engine oil low pressure warn-
(2)
ing, can be stopped only by turning the key switch OFF.
(3) (1)
FIGURE 2.6
2—4
4. Screen Change Switch (4) – FIGURE 2.7
Each time the screen change switch on
the gauge cluster is pressed, the engine
rpm and the accumulated time since last
replacement of engine oil, fuel filter, hy-
draulic oil filter, hydraulic oil are dis-
played in order.
After the engine starts, is dis-
played.
(4)
Press the gauge cluster screen change
switch once (Engine rpm)
1515 RPM
256Hr AFT 256Hr AFT 256Hr AFT

E/G OIL CH FUEL FIL CH HYD FIL CH
256Hr AFT
HYD OIL CH in order.
5. Wiper & Washer Switch (5), (6) – FIGURE 2.8 FIGURE 2.7
Press this switch, and the front window
wiper starts moving.
a. Press it once ............ Wiper moves intermittently

b. Press it again ........... Wiper moves continuously
c. Press it once more ... Wiper stops moving
Press this switch, and washer fluid is

sprayed on the front window while it is (5)
pushed. Wiper acts in the same time (7) (6)
automatically.
The washer fluid reservoir is located
behind the cab, in the air cleaner com-
partment.
Make certain the washer reservoir has washer fluid

before operating washer.
FIGURE 2.8
6. Working Lights Select Switch (7) – FIGURE 2-8

Press switch, and frame, boom and rear
working lights light up, and when the
switch is ON the back-up lamp also lights
up.
a. Press switch once, and the frame and boom work-
ing lights light up.
b. Press it one more time, and rear working light also
light up.
c. Press it again, the frame, boom and rear working
lights go out.
2—5
7. Auto Accel Switch (8) – FIGURE 2.9
When this switch is activated (ON) the
auto-accel system activates.
The auto-accel reduces the engine
speed to the idle level reducing fuel con-
sumption and noise under the following
conditions:
1. The accel dial position is set over the
idle level. (8)
2. The control lever and/or pedal are not
operated for 4 seconds or more.
When the control lever and/or pedal are
operated, the engine speed rises back
to the accel dial set level gradually, ac-
cording to the respective operating pilot
valve stroke.
Anytime this switch is deactivated (OFF)
the engine speed rises to the accel dial FIGURE 2.9
set level, independently by other opera-
tions.
WHEN LOADING OR UNLOADING MACHINE ON

TRAILER, TURN THE AUTO ACCEL SWITCH OFF.
IF IT IS OPERATED KEEPING THE ACCEL SWITCH
ON, THE ENGINE SPEED CHANGES SUDDENLY.
8. Travel speed select switch (9) – FIGURE 2.10

The travel speed select switch is located on the gauge
cluster switch panel. Each time engine is started,
travel speed is automatically set to LOW 1st ( )
speed. Press the travel speed ( ) switch on the
gauge cluster, and the speed is changed to the HIGH
2nd and the ( ) is indicated on the multidisplay.
............... Set to LOW when moving the ma-

(9)
LOW chine on a rough or soft road, slope,
(1st) speed or in a narrow place, or when pow-
erful tractive force is required.
................ Set to HIGH when moving the ma-

HIGH chine on flat, hard ground.
(2nd) speed
DO NOT USE SPEED WHEN PERFORMING DELI- FIGURE 2.10

CATE OPERATIONS SUCH AS PIPE LAYING, FINE
GRADING OR LOADING MACHINE ONTO A TRAILER.
DO NOT CHANGE TRAVEL SPEED WHILE LOADING
MACHINE COULD BECOME UNSTABLE AND CAUSE
SERIOUS INJURY, EQUIPMENT DAMAGE AND/OR
DEATH.
2—6
9. Throttle Potentiometer – FIGURE 2.11
The throttle potentiometer is located on the right
hand operator console and controls engine RPM.
When the throttle potentiometer is rotated to any
position it increases or decreases engine rpm and
maintains engine at the programed RPM for that
particular position on the dial. THROTTLE
POTENTIOMETER
(CONTROL)
NOTE
Auto accel operation and control.
In operation, if the remote control pressure for the control
lever and control pedal does not act for 4 seconds, the
auto accel function is automatically activated when the
accel dial position is at idle lever or over, and the engine
speed drops to idle level.
Auto accel release condition

When the attachment, swing, travel control lever or
FIGURE 2.11
control pedal are operated, the engine speed re-
turns to the accel dial set position gradually accord-
ing to the respective operating pilot valve stroke.
10. Tuner (FM & AM) (for OCEANIA) – FIGURE 2.11A

(Applicable No.LC08-06201~06294, YC08-03001~03070 (6) (3) (4) (1)
LC09-06295~06587, YC09-03071~03277)
1. Designation and usage
a. Power switch, volume control and speaker bal-
ance (1).
b. Tone control (2).
c. FM & AM switch button (3).
FM and AM are turned on alternately every
(7) (5) (8) (2)
pressing.
d. Display select button (4). FIGURE 2.11A
The frequency band is displayed on the display
screen (7) preferentially.
When the frequency is displayed, press the dis-
play select button (4) and the present time is
displayed on the screen for 5 seconds. After 5
seconds, the display returns to the frequency
band. And press the time set button (8) other
than buttons , and within 5 seconds
after pressing the time set button, the display
returns to the frequency band.
e. Tuning button (5).
f . Select button (6).
g. Display screen (7).
h. Time set buttons (8).
2—7
2. How to select station – FIGURE 2.11B
a. How to select station by hand
Press tuning button (5) and select the desired
frequency band.
The frequency band runs at a time every press-
ing.
AM : 9 kHz FM : 0.1 MHz
Up button : The frequency band goes (5)

up.
Down button : The frequency band goes FIGURE 2.11B

down.
When the frequency band reaches to the upper
or lower limit, it is automatically switched from /
to the upper limit to / from the lower limit.
3. Presetting method for selection of station – FIG-

URE 2.11C (6) (1)
a. Press the power switch (1), and the frequency

is displayed on the display screen (7).
b. Select the frequency band of the desired station
with tuning button (5).
c. Press the select button (6) corresponding to the
number to be memorized for 1.5 seconds or
more. (7) (5)
Then, the sound “In reception” is not heard, and
after the memorizing is finished, the sound is FIGURE 2.11C
emitted again, and the selected number is dis-
played on the screen (7) to notify the comple-
tion of the memorizing.
After completion of memorizing, press select
button (6) and release the hand within 1.5 sec-
onds, and the broadcast from the selected sta-
tion can be received.
4. For cancellation of the memory of preset sta-

tion
When the memory of preset station is canceled due
to the removal of radio during maintenance, the
memory of the preset select button is canceled in
this case, preset the desired station again.
2—8
5. Speaker balance adjustment – FIGURE 2.11D
a. Pull the power switch (1) toward you. (1)
b. Turn balance switch to the right, the right vol-

ume is raised, and if you turn to the left, the left
volume is raised.
And this switch equips a center click-stop.
c. Push the power switch (1), and return it to its

original position.
FIGURE 2.11D
6. Time set button – FIGURE 2.11E

(4)
a. Press the display select button (4), and press
the time set buttons (8) ( , , ) to display
the time.
After 5 seconds have elapsed, the display re-
turns to the frequency band, and consequently
no time adjustment is feasible.
Press the display select button (4) again, and to
repeat the procedure. (8)
b. Set the desired time, “Hour” and “Minute” by FIGURE 2.11E
pressing the time set buttons (8) ( , , ).
1. button : To set the “Hour”.
(Gains 1 hour at a time every pressing.)
2. button : To set the “Minute”.
(Gains 1 minute at a time every pressing.)
If the or button is kept pressing, it runs
continuously until the button is released.
3. button : To return to the initial set time.
• If minuts are within 0 and 5 : when pressing
button, minuts will be taken to 00. (In this
time, hour does not change.)
(10 : 05 10 : 00)
button, hours will advance by 1 hour.
(10 : 55 11 : 00)
button, time is not reset.
(10 : 54 10 : 54)
In addition, this function of reset is able to ad-
just evern if the indication is in frequency.
SUPPLEMENTARY EXPLANATION
This operator’s manual doesn’t describe the operating
method of tuner, because the tuner procured in EU area
is applied on this machine.
2—9
11.Tuner (AM/FM 2 BANDS) (Applicable No. LC09-06588~, YC09-03278~)
3 4 5 1
7 6 2 8
1. Control Switches
1. Power switch
2. Tone control
3. AM & FM selector
4. Display selector
5. Preset selector buttons
6. Time adjusting buttons
7. LCD display
8. Volume control
2. How to select stations

This radio has three ways to select the radio sta- 1
tion.
• Manual tuning
• Seek tuning
• Preset memory tuning
2.1 How to select the radio station manually

1. Press the power switch (1) to turn on the radio.
2. Press the station selector button "UP" or "DOWN"
for less than 0.5 second to select the desired sta-
tion.
3. When you press the "UP" button or "DOWN"
button every time, the frequency varies one step.
AM 1 step:9kHz
FM 1 step:100kHz
4. When you start the tuning from any frequency,
the frequency varies up or down from this fre-
quency.
5. When the frequency reaches the upper or lower
limit, the radio automatically switches to the op-
posite limit, that is: from the upper to the lower or
vice versa.
2 — 10
2.2 How to select the radio station automatically
1. Press the power switch (1) to turn on the radio. 1
2. Press the station selector button "UP" or "DOWN"
for more than 0.5 second to select the desired
station.
3. When you press the "UP" button or "DOWN"
button, the frequency varies continuously until
the desired frequency is caught.
4. When you press either "UP/DOWN" button dur-
ing automatic seeking, if you press the button for
less than 0.5 second, the radio returns to manual
selection.
5. In this automatic selection, above-mentioned
manual selection's par. 4 and 5 are available in
the same way.
6. When you switch the band during automatic tun-
ing, the frequency returns to the previous receipt
frequency. The same condition is achieved too,
if "ON/OFF" switching operation is done.
2.3 How to preset the radio station

1. Press the power switch (1) to turn on the radio. 5 1
2. This radio is able to preset 6 stations of AM and
FM stations respectively.
3. Once the desired radio station is selected manu-
ally, press any of the preset buttons (1 to 6) for
more than one second to record it in its respec-
tive memory.
4. Once the reception is memorized, the station is
preset on the desired preset station button.
5. The preset is given priority over the automatic
seeking.
KEY AM (kHz) FM1 (MHz) FM2 (MHz)
6. The initial values of preset are indicated in a table. 1 522 76.0 76.0
2 603 76.4 76.0
3 954 85.6 76.0
4 1386 76.0 76.0
5 522 76.0 76.0
6 522 76.0 76.0
2 — 11
3. How to adjust the clock
1. After the radio is turned on, use the time set but- 1
tons (6) "H, M and RST" to adjust the time.
2. Press "RST" button for more than one second to
select the time set mode. The display for time
starts flickering.
3. Use "H" button to set the hour and "M" button to
set the minutes.
6
4. "H" button gains 1 hour at a time every pressing.
"M" button gains 1 minute at a time every press-
ing. If the "H" or "M" button is kept pressing, it
gains continuously until the button is released.
5. For example, when the hour display indicated 12,
if you press "H" once, the display will change to
1. When the minute display indicated 59, if you
press "M" once, the display will change to 0. But
in this case, the digit of hour doesnAft change.
6. When the time is set, press "RST" for more than
one second or when the power switch is turned
"Off", the time set is completed and the flickering
changes to lighting.
4. How to change the display

1. After the radio is turned on, use the "DISP" but- 4 1
tons (4) to change alternately the display between
the frequency and the time.
2. Even if the auto-tuning have been performed, you
can change the display to the time.
3. If the display is the time and auto-tuning had been
selected, this auto-tuning doesnAft stop till the
stop signal is input. 2
5. How to change the band

1. Press the power switch (1) to turn on the radio. 3 1
2. Every time you press the "AM/FM" button, the
band and display are changed from FM1 to FM2
and from FM2 to AM in order.
3. If you press the "AM/FM" button during the "AM"
display, the band and display change to the FM1.
4. If you switch the current band, the station returns
to previous receipt station.
2 — 12
6. How to adjust the volume
1. Use the volume control (8) to adjust the volume. 1
2. The volume control is rotary type, and the rotat-
ing angle is 290˚ to 310˚.
3. Turn this control clockwise to turn up the volume,
and turn it counterclockwise to lower the volume.
7. How to adjust the tone

1. Use the tone control (2) to adjust the tone. 1
2. The tone control is rotary type, and the rotating
angle is 290? to 310? degree.
3. Turn this control clockwise to emphasize the
treble, and turn it counterclockwise to empha-
size the bass.
8. Power switch
1. Press the power switch (1) to turn on the radio. 1
2. Every time you press the power switch, the power
is switched alternately from/to ON and OFF.
2 — 13
12. 24 Volt Cigarette Lighter – FIGURE 2.12
The cigarette lighter is located on the right wall of
cab. To use the cigarette lighter the key switch must
be in the ON position. Push the lighter in and wait
approximately 30 seconds for it to “POP” out. Pull
lighter from the socket to use. Replace lighter back
into its socket after use.
Do not use the cigarette lighter as a power source for

12 Volt accessories. It is 24 Volt outlet.
FIGURE 2.12
13. Swing Flasher Switch – FIGURE 2.13

The swing flasher switch is located on the right hand
PRESS HERE
operator console. The swing flasher is a 2 position FOR "ON"
rocker switch which is used to turn on the swing
PRESS HERE
flashers. FOR "OFF"
“ON” ...... Push the symbol side of switch down to
turn swing flashers ON.
“OFF” .... Push the empty side of switch down to
turn swing flashers OFF.
FIGURE 2.13
B. LEFT HAND OPERATOR CONSOLE
1. Air Conditioner – FIGURE 2.14 and 2.15

The climate control-AC provides a comfortable in-
door environment and adjustable control of cab tem-
perature. It removes moisture from humid air and
reducing window glass frosting.
The climate control-AC is installed behind operator’s (C) (A)

seat and sends cold air or hot air into cab.
(A)
Air outlet selector
Select a preferable blowout direction moving grille
by hand. (B)
(A), (B), (C), (D) ........ Air outlet (D)
FIGURE 2.14
2 — 14
I . Control Panel Description
AIR OUTLET MODE FRESH AND RECIRCULATE LCD COMPRESSOR AUTO CONTROL
SELECTOR SWITCH AIR SELECTOR SWITCH DISPLAY SWITCH SWITCH
DEFROSTER TEMPERATURE FAN SPEED MAIN POWER

SWITCH SETTING SWITCH SELECTOR SWITCH SWITCH
(°C °F SELECTOR SWITCH)
FIGURE 2.15
The LCD display indicates temperature, air outlet mode,
compressor ON - OFF, AUTO, recirculate and fresh air
and fan speed.
Each switch, FAN mark of blower, and TEMP mark are
illuminated green at night.
II. Fundamental use – FIGURE 2.16 FRESH AND RECIRCULATE COMPRESSOR AUTO
Before turning air-conditioner on, close doors of cab AIR SELECTOR SWITCH SWITCH CONTROL
and windows to achieve the best performance. SWITCH
1. Press control switch “AUTO” to control air capacity

and blower outlet automatically, and set the tem-
perature in the range from 18.5°C (65.3°F) to 31.5°C
(88.7°F).
The outlet temperature, outlet opening and fan FAN SPEED
speed are adjusted automatically so that indoor tem- SELECTOR SWITCH
perature of cab comes closer to the set tempera-
ture. FIGURE 2.16
2. Select proper mode manually through recirculate

and fresh air capacity selector switch and compres-
sor switch ON - OFF.
3. Select preferable fan speed manually through fan

speed selector switch when fan speed, selected
through auto control, is not preferable.
The indicator lamp of “AUTO” in LCD display goes
out. Press “AUTO” switch to return to automatic cli-
mate control.
2 — 15
III. Control Panel Functions
1. Main power switch and display – FIGURE 2.17 LCD

DISPLAY
a. LCD display is illuminated when the climate con-
trol-AC is operating.
When the climate control-AC is stopped, LCD
will be turned off.
b. Press main power switch, and all functions for
the climate control-AC switch ON or OFF.
Each time when this switch is pressed, the func- MAIN POWER
SWITCH
tion switches ON and OFF. When switched ON,
the climate control-AC starts operating at the
point set before switching OFF (when it is set to FIGURE 2.17
AUTO, in auto mode; if NORMAL is selected,
then in normal mode).
NOTE
The key switch will switch air-conditioner OFF, but the
operating condition just before switching off may not be
restored when the key switch is turned ON again.
2. Auto Control Switch and Display - FIGURE 2.18

a. Press the main power switch to activate the cli- LCD AUTO
mate control-AC and the LCD display will illumi- DISPLAY CONTROL
SWITCH
nate.
b. Press control switch AUTO, and fan speed and
air outlet are automatically controlled, and
“AUTO” indicator lamp on LCD display is illumi-
nated.
c. When the main power switch is OFF, the sys-
MAIN POWER
tem will retain the previous setting in memory. SWITCH
Therefore, when the main power switch is
pressed again, the climate control AC will come
on in the auto control mode. In the auto mode, FIGURE 2.18
the fan speed and air outlet openings are oper-
ated automatically.
3. Temperature Setting Switch and Display - FIG-

URE 2.19 LCD
DISPLAY
a. The set temperature is indicated in digits on LCD
display. Temperature set range is 18.5°C (65.3°F)
to 31.5°C (88.7°F).
b. Press the two temperature set switches simul-
taneously for 5 seconds to change the display
from Centigrade ( ° C) to Fahrenheit ( ° F) or
viceversa in the LCD display
TEMPERATURE
(Eg.) 25°C 77°F or 77°F 25°C SETTING SWITCH
(°C °F SELECTOR SWITCH)
c. Press temperature set switch DOWN or UP to
change the set temperature. FIGURE 2.19
The temperature goes up or down by 0.5°C (0.9°F)
in graduation.
The set temperature may be raised or lowered
by continued pressing of the switch.
2 — 16
d. The set temperature 18.5°C (65.3°F) is the low-
est cooling temperature, and 31.5°C (88.7°F) is
the highest heating temperature.
Control beyond either of these limits is not pos-
sible.
4. Air outlet mode selector switch and display –

FIGURE 2.20
a. Air outlet position is indicated by the arrow on AIR OUTLET MODE LCD DISPLAY
LCD display. SELECTOR SWITCH
b. Press air outlet mode switch in the condition

where auto display light is on, and the display
mode is fixed., “AUTO” indicator lamp on LCD
display goes out, and “AUTO” control of air out-
let opening is released.
Press it again, and the level is changed to
VENT BI-LEVEL FOOT FACE.
FIGURE 2.20
LCD DISPLAY
Air outlet opening Vent Bi-level Foot Face

Air outlet direction Upper half of body Upper half of body, foot Foot, front glass Upper half of body (Front)
5. Defroster switch and display – FIGURE 2.21

FRESH AND LCD
a. Press defroster switch, defroster indicator lamp RECIRCULATE AIR DISPLAY
will be displayed. SELECTOR SWITCH
b. Press air outlet mode selector switch, and it re-

turns to air outlet mode just before pressing de-
froster switch.
c. Press defroster switch in the condition where
AUTO display is lighting up, “AUTO” indicator
lamp on LCD display goes out and the auto con- DEFROSTER AIR OUTLET MODE
trol of air outlet opening is released. SWITCH SELECTOR SWITCH
FIGURE 2.21
6. Recirculate and fresh air selector switch and
display – FIGURE 2.21
a. Suction (fresh air intake) mode is indicated on
LCD display
b. Each time recirculate and fresh air capacity se-
lector switch is pressed, the mode is switched
to air recirculate or fresh air intake.
2 — 17
7. Compressor switch and display – FIGURE 2.22
Press compressor switch in the condition where LCD FAN COMPRESSOR
DISPLAY SPEED SWITCH
mark on LCD display is unlit, compressor starts DISPLAY
operating and indicator lamp of mark on LCD dis-
play goes on.
Press it again, and compressor turns off, and indi-
cator lamp of mark on LCD display goes out.
FAN SPEED
SELECTOR SWITCH
FIGURE 2.22
8. Fan speed selector switch and display – FIG-

URE 2.23 LCD
When it is set to MANUAL mode, fan speed on LCD DISPLAY
display is as follows.
FAN SPEED LOW MEDIUM HIGH MAX.
DISPLAY FAN SPEED FIGURE 2.23
LCD 1 LAMP IS LIT UP. LOW
LCD 2 LAMPS ARE LIT UP. MEDIUM
LCD 3 LAMPS ARE LIT UP. HIGH
LCD 4 LAMPS ARE LIT UP. MAX
Press UP or DOWN of fan speed selector switch,

and auto control of fan speed is released, and
“AUTO” indicator lamp on LCD display goes out.
EU spec.
2. Horn switch – FIGURE 2.23A

The horn switch is a momentary push grey button
located on the operator’s left control lever, see Fig-
ure 2.23A for better reference. HORN SWITCH
(GREY)
NOTE
Always sound horn before starting engine to alert person-
nel that the machine is going to be operated. FIGURE 2.23A
OCEANIA spec.
HORN SWITCH
FIGURE 2.23B
2 — 18
3. Auto warm up selector switch – FIGURE 2.24
Place the ignition switch to the “on position” (Do not
start the engine yet). Turn on the warm up switch lo-
cated on the left panel and then start the engine.
PRESS HERE
a. Warming up of engine FOR "OFF"
The “WARMING UP” is displayed on the multi dis-
play after operating the engine for 3 minutes at auto
accel speed (1050 rpm.) when the accel dial set
value is the value for deceleration or lower, the en-
gine speed returns to the speed set by the accel
dial.)
b. Warming of hydraulic oil

After performing the operation of pump max. flow
rate at the engine speed (1,050 rpm) for 3 minutes
pump max. flow rate at the engine speed (1,600
rpm) for 5 minutes pump max. flow rate and
control valve full open at the engine speed (1,600
rpm) for 5 minutes max. flow rate at the engine FIGURE 2.24
auto accel speed (1,050 rpm) for 10 minutes,
“WARMING UP” is displayed on the multidisplay.
c. Warming up complete
After an elapse of about 26 minutes of warming of hy-
draulic oil, or when the hydraulic oil temperature switch
turns OFF, the WARMING UP indication(“WARMING
UP”) on the multidisplay disappears, and concurrently
buzzer sounds for 5 seconds. Turn the auto warm up
switch OFF.
NOTE
While warming up the engine, operate the pilot lever and
the warming up is forcibly disconnected.
Turn the auto warm up switch OFF, and the warming up is
forcibly stopped. While warming the hydraulic oil, operate
the lever and the warming is stopped temporarily, and af-
ter an elapse of 10 seconds of the neutral condition the
warming operation restarts.
2 — 19
4. Auto idling stop select switch – FIGURE 2.24A
(Applicable No. LC09-06323~, YC09-03088~)
PRESS HERE
Please symbol mark corresponding to this switch to FOR "ON"
turn “ON”, and the engine in operation stops automati-
cally after a constant elapse of time with safety lock PRESS HERE
FOR "OFF"
lever (1) remaining locked. Consequently the fuel con-
sumption is reduced.
And, press the switch no symbol mark is given, and the
auto idling stop function canceled.
NOTE
1. Put safety lock lever to “Locked Position”, and the rota-
tion changes to the decel rotation about 4 seconds later.
2. Buzzer sounds before 5 seconds from engine stop and
for 10 seconds after engine stop.
EU··············· STD.
OCEANIA··· OPT.
After auto idling stop, to restart engine;
a. Make sure that the buzzer stops sounding. FIGURE 2.24A
b. Set throttle potentiometer to low idling position.

c. Return starter switch to “ACC” or “OFF” once and
restart the engine.
(1)
WHEN YOU DO THE WORK WHICH HAS FEAR,

SUCH AS FALL OF A LOAD, WHEN ENGINE STOPS,
PLEASE BE SURE TO TURN OFF AN AUTO IDLING
STOP SWITCH.
Don’t restart the engine while the buzzer is sounding FIGURE 2.24B
after the engine stops through auto idling stop switch.
The engine starter motor may be damaged.
Where being apart from the machine, be sure to switch In the following cases, the auto idling stop switch can’t
the key “OFF”. The discharge of battery may occur. be functioned regardless of the idling stop select switch
position.
• When the warning of “HIGH E/G COOL TEMP” is given
on LCD or by means of lamp,
When the following functions are applied to it, turn the • When auto warm-up is being operated.
auto idling stop select switch “OFF”.
While keeping the safety lock lever on “LOCKED PO-
SITION”.
• When required warm up the engine;
• When required to operate the air-con continuously;
• When keeping the working light on;
2 — 20
5. Over load alarm select switch – FIGURE 2.25
The over load alarm select switch is located on the
PRESS HERE
right hand control console. The over load alarm switch FOR "ON"
is a 2 position rocker switch and used for lifting opera-
tions. PRESS HERE
FOR "OFF"
“ON” ...... Push the symbol side of switch down to turn
over load alarm ON when performing lifting
operations.
“OFF” .... Push the empty side of switch down to turn
over load alarm OFF when performing other
operations.
EU SPEC.
FIGURE 2.25
6. Cab working lights select switch – FIGURE 2.26

The cab working lights select switch is located on the
PRESS HERE PRESS HERE
left hand control console. The cab working light switch FOR "ON" FOR "ON"
is a 2 position rocker switch and is used to turn work-
ing light “ON” and “OFF”. PRESS HERE PRESS HERE
FOR "OFF" FOR "OFF"
Applicable No. Applicable No.
working light ON. LC08-06201~06322 LC09-06323~
YC08-03001~03087 YC09-03088~
“OFF” .... Push the empty side of switch down to turn
working light OFF.
EU SPEC.
FIGURE 2.26
7. Rotary light switch – FIGURE 2.27

This switch is located to the rear on the left hand con-
trol console. Its basic function is to turn the rotary light PRESS HERE
FOR "ON"
“ON” and “OFF”.
PRESS HERE
Depress this side to turn rotary light “ON”. FOR "OFF"
Depress empty side of switch to turn rotary
light “OFF”.
EU SPEC.
FIGURE 2.27
2 — 21
8. Heavy lift switch – FIGURE 2.28
The heavy lift switch is located on the left hand control
DEPRESS THIS SIDE
console. The heavy lift switch is a 2 operating func- TO TURN "ON"
tions. The heavy lift function is used when precision
control of heavy lifting operations is required. DEPRESS THIS SIDE
TO TURN "OFF"
heavy lift function on.
“OFF” .... Push back of switch down to turn heavy lift
function off.
NEVER TURN OFF HEAVY LIFT SWITCH DURING

ANY OPERATION.
SUDDEN OR UNEXPECTED MOVEMENT COULD
RESULT IN SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH.
FIGURE 2.28
9. Diagnosis lamp (electronic governor controller

judgement) red and orange – FIGURE 2.29 RED
Red and orange lamps are installed on the switch panel
of the left control stand to make possible to check that
the electronic governor controller is normally operated.
The normal / abnormal condition can be knowledged
by checking the lamp lighting condition. Therefore
check that the controller is normal before stating the
engine.
Normal condition
ORANGE
Starter switch Starter switch
"ON" "START"
Lamp (Red) ON OFF
Lamp (Orange) ON OFF
Condition Normal Normal
FIGURE 2..29
Abnormal condition
For abnormal condition, there are two cases, first the
engine does not start, and second, the engine starts
but the controller does not operate normally. Then,
contact our service shop for inspection immediately.
Starter switch Starter switch Starter switch
"ON" "ON" "START"
Lamp
ON OFF OFF
(Red)
Lamp
OFF ON ON
(Orange)
Don't
Condition Start E/G Start E/G
start E/G
2 — 22
C. REAR PANEL AND OTHERS
1. Swing Parking Brake Release Switch – FIGURE

2.30
After removing 4 cover set screws on the rear side
of operator seat, release the locks (5 places) of cover
section, and remove the upper and lower covers.
Swing parking brake is usually locked. The swing
parking brake is released in swing and arm-in op-
eration. When it cannot be unlocked due to trouble,
turn toggle switch to “Release lock” (unlock), and the
parking brake is released. Then, move machine to
safe area immediately and contact our representa-
tive or service shop.
And return to toggle switch to “NORMAL” position in
REAR PANEL
normal condition.
SET SCREW
FIGURE 2.30
2. Power Boost Switch – FIGURE 2.31

EU
Located on the right hand control lever, this switch SPEC.
should only be used for increased break out force
during digging.
POWER BOOST
SWITCH (GREY)
NOTE
Use of it is prohibited where an arm longer than the stan- OCEANIA
dard is installed. SPEC.
POWER BOOST SWITCH
FIGURE 2.31
3. Holder – FIGURE 2.32

LOCK BUTTON
This cup holder is located the right front of operator.
Place a canned or a bottled drink.
Press lock button ...... cover open
COVER
FIGURE 2.32
2 — 23
4. Fuse Box – FIGURE 2.33
The fuse box is located behind the operator’s seat.
It contains all necessary fuses for the electrical cir-
cuits of the machine. Should it become necessary to
inspect or change a fuse, remove the fuse box cover
by gently pulling each end away from the box. Should
a fuse require replacement, use a replacement fuse
of the same type and amperage.
Turn key switch to “OFF” and wait approximately 4
seconds for all electrical power to stop before re-
moving or replacing a bad or blown fuse. The fuse
cover incorporates a fuse puller to remove fuses.
Refer to the maintenance section of this manual for COVER FUSE BOX
a detailed diagram and description of fuse box.
FIGURE 2.33
5. Hour Meter – FIGURE 2.34

This indicates the total time the engine
has run. Even if the excavator is not mov-
ing, the meter continues to count as long
as the engine is running.
HOUR METER
FIGURE 2.34
6. 12 Volt Power Supply – FIGURE 2.35

The 12 Volt power supply is located beside the right
side switch panel.
For use of common auto accessories such as a fan
or other accessories requiring 12 Volt (DC) power,
pull cover away from 12 Volt power supply and in-
sert 12 Volt male socket into power supply. Replace
cover after use.
Do not use 12 Volt power supply as a cigarette lighter.

MAXIMUM CONTINUOUS OUTPUT – 2.5 Amps
FIGURE 2.35
2 — 24
D. OPERATING LEVERS AND CONTROLS
ENGINE EMERGENCY
1. Engine Emergency Stop Control – FIGURE 2.36 STOP CONTROL
The engine emergency stop control located at the
lower right hand side of operator seat. It is used only
in an emergency situation to stop the engine quickly.
It has 2 operating positions.
“IN” ........ Releases the fuel stop lever on the gover-
nor to allow normal starting of the engine.
“OUT” .... Activates the fuel stop lever on the engine
governor to immediately stop the engine.
FIGURE 2.36
Do not suddenly stop the engine when operating at

high RPM. Doing so may damage turbo or engine.
3. Safety Lock Lever – FIGURE 2.37

SAFETY LOCK
The safety lock lever is located on the front outside LEVER IN
of the left hand operator console and is red in color. LOCKED
(UP) POSITION
The safety lock lever is used to lock out the hydrau-
lic controls disallowing the use of any hydraulic func-
tion. The safety lock lever has 2 operating positions.
“UP” .......... When placed in the up position the safety
lock lever stops all hydraulic controls from
functioning and allows the operator to
enter and exit the operator seat.
“DOWN” .... When placed in the down position, the
safety lock lever allows all operating func-
tions of the hydraulic controls to resume
and also locks the left hand operating
console in operating position.
ALWAYS PLACE THE SAFETY LOCK LEVER IN THE

LOCKED (UP) POSITION BEFORE LEAVING THE
SAFETY LOCK LEVER
OPERATOR CAB.
IN UNLOCKED
NEVER LEAVE THE MACHINE UNATTENDED WITH (DOWN) POSITION
ENGINE RUNNING OR LEVER IN THE DOWN PO-
SITION. FIGURE 2.37
2 — 25
4. Left Hand Operator Control Lever – FIGURE 2.38 L.H. CONTROL LEVER ARM OUT
(ISO PATTERN)
Hydraulic controls are designed for and set to ISO op-

erating pattern for optimum machine performance and SWING LEFT
safety. Changing the control pattern will effect the per-

formance of the machine. SWING RIGHT
The left hand operator control lever is located at the

top front of the L.H. operator console. Its purpose is
to allow the operator to control operations of the swing ARM IN
and arm. Operating speed of function is variable from
stop to full stroke depending on how far lever is op-
erated. The left hand operator control lever has 4
basic operational functions.
“FORWARD” ....... Variable speed arm out. FIGURE 2.38

“BACKWARD” .... Variable speed arm in.
“LEFT” ................. Variable speed left swing.
“RIGHT” ............... Variable speed right swing.
“CENTER” ........... Neutral position.
2 — 26
5. Right Hand Operator Control Lever – FIGURE 2.39
BOOM DOWN R.H. CONTROL LEVER
The right hand operator control lever is located at (ISO PATTERN)
the top front of the R.H. operator console. Its pur-
pose is to allow the operator to control operations of
the boom and bucket. Operating speed of function is
variable from stop to full stroke depending on how
BUCKET OUT
far lever is operated. The right hand operator control
has 4 basic operational functions. BUCKET IN
“FORWARD” ....... Variable speed boom down.

“BACKWARD” .... Variable speed boom up.
“LEFT” ................. Variable speed bucket in (digging). BOOM UP
“RIGHT”............... Variable speed bucket out (dump).

FIGURE 2.39
6. Left and Right Travel Lever & Pedal – FIGURE 2.40

The travel lever & pedal are located in front of op- LEFT HAND RIGHT HAND
TRAVEL LEVER TRAVEL LEVER
erator seat. They are used to move the left or right
track of the machine either forward or backward. LEFT HAND RIGHT HAND
TRAVEL PEDAL TRAVEL PEDAL
These controls have 2 basic operational functions.
“FORWARD” ....... Variable speed forward track

movement.
FOOT FOOT
“BACKWARD” .... Variable speed reverse track
REST REST
movement.
These operations are with travel motors at the rear

of the machine. If travel motors are positioned in front
of the machine the functions of the travel levers will
be opposite.
FIGURE 2.40
7. Adjustment of Pilot Valve (Control Lever) Height

NORMAL POSITION
– FIGURE 2.41 CAPSCREW M10
To adjust the height of the pilot control levers, use a
17 mm wrench and remove capscrew (M10) under
the operator console. The 3-stage setting hole posi-
tion is as follows:
a. From factory, the hole is set to the highest position H1
(H1).
H2
b. If it set to the medium position (H2), the valve (con-
trol lever) height is raised 15 mm (0.6˝). H3
c. When it is set to the lowest position (H3), the valve
(control lever) height is raised max. 29 mm (1.1˝). FIGURE 2.41
2 — 27
E. GAUGE CLUSTER
The monitor displays information sent from sensors positioned at various places on the excavator, making it possible
to monitor the excavator’s operating working conditions.
KPSS WORK MODE LAMP
WATER TEMPERATURE FUEL LEVEL GAUGE

GAUGE
LCD DISPLAY
LCD DISPLAY
6 LOW E/G
OIL PRESS
KPSS WORK MODE SWITCH

SCREEN CHANGE SWITCH
WASHER SWITCH
BUZZER STOP SWITCH WIPER SWITCH
AUTO ACCEL WORKING LIGHTS LED LAMP

TRAVEL SPEED SELECT SWITCH
SWITCH SELECT SWITCH
FIGURE 2.42
1. Fuel Level Gauge 3. KPSS Work Mode Lamp

This indicates the amount of re- Press the work mode selector
maining fuel. switch in order, and , or
F : Full tank is about 560 Liter (148 mode is selected and the se-
gal). lected work mode display green
lamp goes on.
E : The remaining fuel oil is about
After the engine starts, the mode
60 Liter (16 gal).
is always set to the A mode. (M
mode start in Oceania.)
2. Water Temperature Gauge
This indicates the temperature of
the engine coolant water, and op-
For guideline of work mode selector switch, see pages 2-
erates when the starter switch is
3 ~ 2-4.
turned to the “ON” position.
The temperature is normal in the
white range. If the needle enters
the red range, let the engine idle
until the water cools down and the
needle moves back into the white
range.
2 — 28
4. L.C.D. Display – FIGURE 2.43 (EU Only) a . Normal Displays
The L.C.D. display is illustrated below and will display The seven status are appear on the display by press-
the icons listed on this page. Study these icons and ing the screen change switch ( ).
their definitions so that possible problems will be quickly Utilize this function checking total cumulative time of
recognized and repairs made in a timely fashion. inspection and maintenance.
1. System status icon

LCD
(2) DISPLAY
This icon is display after key switch is
6
turned “ON” and all machine systems
and components are checked by CPU
and found to be in good working or-
(3) der.
(1)
2. Engine R.P.M icon
The engine speed (output) corre-
2250RPM
sponding to the throttle potentio
FIGURE 2.43 meter position is displayed.
3. Engine lubrication cumulative time

NOTE
For instance, 256 hours has elapsed
The languages on gauge cluster can be switched by the
since the change of engine oil.
following procedure. And languages displayed on the
This indication shows the total cumu-
gauge cluster are as follows.
lative time since the engine oil has
“J” ................. Japanese been changed.
“E” ................ English
“EA” .............. English (For North America) 4. Fuel filter cumulative time
“T” ................ Thai This indication shows the total cumu-
“I” .................. Indonesian lative time on since the engine fuel
“F” ................ French filter has been changed.
“S” ................ Spanish
5. Hydraulic oil filter cumulative time
“EU” .............. Pictorial symbol (For EU)
This indications shows the total cu-
“G” ................ German
mulative time since the hydraulic fil-
“C” ................ Chinese
ter has been changed.
6. Hydraulic oil cumulative time

• Switching procedure – FIGURE 2.43 This indication shows the total cumu-
1. While keeping screen change switch (1) pressed, lative time since the hydraulic oil has
turn the key switch “ON”. been changed.
2. The gauge cluster displays the initially set language.

“J” ... Japanese (This is displayed without fail). SUPPLEMENTARY EXPLANATION
3. Press buzzer stop switch (2) or mode change switch For the correcting method of accumulated time for engine
(3) and select and display the desired language. oil, fuel filter, hydraulic oil filter, hydraulic oil, etc., see page
2-31. And while correcting the time, press the mode switch
4. Press screen change switch (1), and the setting is and buzzer stop switch for 5 seconds simultaneously, and
completed. all items are cleared.
5. Turning the starter switch to “HEAT” position can
identify the set language.
2 — 29
b . Warning Displays 5. Engine oil pressure icon
6
This icon will display and the buzzer
WARNING DISPLAYS will sound should the engine oil pres-
The buzzer will sound the instant #2, #4, #5, #6, #9 and sure drop below safe operating pres-
#18 warning icons are displayed. sure. If this icon is on display and
buzzer is sounding, stop the engine
1. I.T.C.S controller-CPU icon immediately and check engine oil
1 This icon will display when a prob- level. Fill engine to proper level with
CPU
lem exists in the I.T.C.S. (Intelligent approved engine oil. In case of en-
Total Control System). Turn key gine LOW OIL PRESSURE, the en-
switch “OFF” and back to “ON” to try gine will automatically go to “LO”
and reset CPU programming. Should Idle RPM.
this icon remain on display, stop op- This icon will display only if alterna-
eration, stop engine call KOBELCO tor is charging.
distributor.
6. Engine coolant temperature icon
2. Swing parking brake release icon 7 This icon will display and the buzzer
2 Turn the “Swing parking brake re- will sound should the engine coolant
lease switch” on the rear side of temperature rise above safe operat-
operator’s seat to the “RELEASE” ing temperature. Should this icon dis-
position, and this warning is display and buzzer sound, reduce engine
played. While this warning is dis- RPM to idle and stop operation until
played, the swing parking brake does engine coolant temperature reaches
not actuates. So this switch should safe operating temperature range.
be used only in the event of emer-
7. Engine oil filter restriction icon
gency. Call KOBELCO distributor for
8 This icon will display, if the engine oil
assistance.
filter becomes too clogged due to con-
3. Engine pre-heating icon tamination. This symbol is only dis-
4 This symbol is displayed when key played when the alternator is charg-
switch is turned to heat position and ing. If this symbol is displayed, replace
the engine preheat circuit is acti- the engine oil filters immediately.
vated.
8. Engine air cleaner icon
This display goes out at completion
9
This icon will display the engine air
of pre-heating, at which time 5
cleaner element(s) (FILTERS) be-

is displayed.
come too dirty to allow proper air flow
4. Engine pre-heat complete icon to the engine. Should this icon dis-
This icon is displayed when the PRE- play stop engine immediately and
5
HEAT is completed. clean or replace engine air cleaner
If the buzzer sounds and can’t be element(s) as required.
stopped, turn key switch to the OFF This icon will display only if alterna-
position and wait for 4 sec’s until the tor is charging.
electrical system is turned off. Then 9. Over load alarm icon
start engine. Continuous preheat af- The icon will display and the buzzer
10
ter this icon is displayed could cause will sound if the boom cylinder circuit
damage to the engine. pressure exceeds the set, specified
pressure. If this happens, the opera-
NOTE tor should be aware that he is oper-
Do not operate the preheat position of the key switch for ating the machine in a range of low
more than 20 seconds at one time. machine stability. The operator
should reduce the attachment reach
in order to increase machine stabil-
ity for safer operation.
2 — 30
10. Battery charging system icon 16. Heavy lift pressure icon
11
This icon will display the electrical 20 This icon will display when the heavy
charging system not function prop- lift switch is in the “ON” position. This
erly. Should this icon display has icon is displayed only when this sys-
electrical charging system repaired tem is activated during operation.
immediately. Icon displays only when
17. Auto warning up icon
engine is running with normal oil
This icon is displayed to indicate the
pressure and a problem occurs in the 21 WARMING UP
warming up operation of the engine
charging system.
and hydraulic oil when the engine
11. Fuel level icon rotates in decel condition after the key
12
This icon will display should the fuel switch is turned on and the auto
level in fuel tank reaches 54 liters warming up selector switch on the left
(14 Gal.) or less. Should this icon dis- console is set to “ON” position.
play refill fuel tank immediately us- Turn the auto warming up select
ing approved fuel oil. switch, hydraulic oil temperature
switch and the key switch OFF, and
12. Hydraulic oil level icon the warming up operation stops forc-
13 This icon will display should the hy-
ibly and the display disappears.
draulic oil level in hydraulic oil reser-
voir fall below safe operating level. 18. Auto warming up finish icon
Should this icon display before start- 28
This icon is displayed when the
FINISH
ing engine, position the machine in warming up of the engine or hydrau-
hydraulic oil check position and check lic oil is finished or the warming up is
sight gauge for oil level. Full hydrau- stopped forcibly by operating the le-
lic reservoir to proper level using ap- ver or turning the auto warm-up
proved hydraulic oil. This icon will not switch OFF forcibly, and concurrently
display with engine running and a the buzzer sounds continuously for
loss of hydraulic oil is experienced. about 5 seconds.
13. Engine coolant level icon 19. Replace engine oil icon
14 This icon will display should the en- 29
This icon will display at every 500
gine coolant level fall below safe op- hours of machine operation to remind
erating level. Should this icon display operator of scheduled engine oil
before starting the engine, check and change. The recommended oil change
fill coolant level in the radiator and interval for MITSUBISHI engines is
coolant reservoir. Icon will not display every 500 hours of operation.
if alternator is charging and a sud- When this icon is displayed, and a
den loss of coolant is experienced. second time to reset the oil change
interval to zero. Make sure to
14. Engine oil level icon recalibrate the engine oil change in-
This icon is displayed when the en-
15 terval as indicated in page 2-37.
gine oil level of the engine oil pan is
low. Check the engine oil level im-
mediately and make up the shortage SUPPLEMENTARY EXPLANATION
of the engine oil.
For the correcting procedure of the accumulated time of
15. Attachment boost pressure icon engine fueling, see page 2-37.
19 This icon will display when the power
boost switch is depressed. This icon
is displayed only when this system is
activated during operation.
2 — 31
20. Display of starting number of engine auto idling stop
NO.1
MAIN CONT P/N
STARTER CHG
PROGRAM VER
Indicates the appeal of starter change
VER 4.00
Recommended This indication flickers for 10 seconds

number of on the multi-display each time the
engine starting
starter key is switched ON after the
starting number of starter motor for
auto idling stop function is raised to
the set value.
Replace the starter motor.
The limit number of durable starting times of starter motor
varies according to the model of machine.
2 — 32
5. L.C.D. Display – FIGURE 2.44 (Oceania Only) a . Normal Displays
The L.C.D. display is illustrated below and will display The seven status are appear on the display by press-
the icons listed on this page. Study these icons and ing the screen change switch ( ).
their definitions so that possible problems will be quickly Utilize this function checking total cumulative time of
recognized and repairs made in a timely fashion. inspection and maintenance.
1. System status icon

LCD
(2) DISPLAY
This icon is display after key switch is
6 LOW E/G
OIL PRESS turned “ON” and all machine systems
and components are checked by CPU
and found to be in good working or-
(3) der.
(1)
2. Engine R.P.M icon
The engine speed (output) corre-
2250RPM sponding to the throttle potentio
FIGURE 2.44 meter position is displayed.
3. Engine lubrication cumulative time

NOTE
For instance, 256 hours has elapsed
The languages on gauge cluster can be switched by the
since the change of engine oil.
following procedure. And languages displayed on the
This indication shows the total cumu-
gauge cluster are as follows.
lative time since the engine oil has
“J” ................. Japanese been changed.
“E” ................ English
“EA” .............. English (For North America) 4. Fuel filter cumulative time
“T” ................ Thai This indication shows the total cumu-
“I” .................. Indonesian lative time on since the engine fuel
“F” ................ French filter has been changed.
“S” ................ Spanish
5. Hydraulic oil filter cumulative time
“EU” .............. Pictorial symbol (For EU)
This indications shows the total cu-
“G” ................ German
mulative time since the hydraulic fil-
“C” ................ Chinese
ter has been changed.
6. Hydraulic oil cumulative time

• Switching procedure – FIGURE 2.44 This indication shows the total cumu-
1. While keeping screen change switch (1) pressed, lative time since the hydraulic oil has
turn the key switch “ON”. been changed.
2. The gauge cluster displays the initially set language.

“J” ... Japanese (This is displayed without fail). SUPPLEMENTARY EXPLANATION
3. Press buzzer stop switch (2) or mode change switch For the correcting method of accumulated time for engine
(3) and select and display the desired language. oil, fuel filter, hydraulic oil filter, hydraulic oil, etc., see page
2-31. And while correcting the time, press the mode switch
4. Press screen change switch (1), and the setting is and buzzer stop switch for 5 seconds simultaneously, and
completed. all items are cleared.
5. Turning the starter switch to “HEAT” position can
identify the set language.
2 — 33
b . Warning Displays 5. Engine oil pressure icon
6
WARNING DISPLAYS LOW E/G
OIL PRESS will sound should the engine oil pres-
The buzzer will sound the instant #2, #4, #5, #6, #9 and sure drop below safe operating pres-
#18 warning icons are displayed. sure. If this icon is on display and
buzzer is sounding, stop the engine
1. I.T.C.S controller-CPU icon immediately and check engine oil
1 MECHATRO This icon will display when a prob- level. Fill engine to proper level with
CPU
CONT. FAIL lem exists in the I.T.C.S. (Intelligent approved engine oil. In case of en-
Total Control System). Turn key gine LOW OIL PRESSURE, the en-
switch “OFF” and back to “ON” to try gine will automatically go to “LO”
and reset CPU programming. Should Idle RPM.
this icon remain on display, stop op- This icon will display only if alterna-
eration, stop engine call KOBELCO tor is charging.
distributor.
6. Engine coolant temperature icon
2. Swing parking brake release icon 7 HIGH E/G
2 Turn the “Swing parking brake re- COOL TEMP will sound should the engine coolant
SWINGBRAKE
DISENGAGED lease switch” on the rear side of temperature rise above safe operat-
operator’s seat to the “RELEASE” ing temperature. Should this icon dis-
position, and this warning is display and buzzer sound, reduce engine
played. While this warning is dis- RPM to idle and stop operation until
played, the swing parking brake does engine coolant temperature reaches
not actuates. So this switch should safe operating temperature range.
be used only in the event of emer-
7. Engine oil filter restriction icon
gency. Call KOBELCO distributor for
8
This icon will display, if the engine oil
assistance. REST'D E/G
OIL FILTER filter becomes too clogged due to con-
3. Engine pre-heating icon tamination. This symbol is only dis-
This symbol is displayed when key played when the alternator is charg-
4 E/G
PREHEAT switch is turned to heat position and ing. If this symbol is displayed, replace
the engine preheat circuit is acti- the engine oil filters immediately.
vated.
8. Engine air cleaner icon
This display goes out at completion
9
This icon will display the engine air
of pre-heating, at which time 5
REST'D AIR
CLEANER cleaner element(s) (FILTERS) be-
is displayed.
come too dirty to allow proper air flow
4. Engine pre-heat complete icon to the engine. Should this icon dis-
This icon is displayed when the PRE- play stop engine immediately and
5 FINISH
PREHEAT HEAT is completed. clean or replace engine air cleaner
If the buzzer sounds and can’t be element(s) as required.
stopped, turn key switch to the OFF This icon will display only if alterna-
position and wait for 4 sec’s until the tor is charging.
electrical system is turned off. Then 9. Over load alarm icon (EU only)
start engine. Continuous preheat af- The icon will display and the buzzer
10 ATTACHMENT
ter this icon is displayed could cause will sound if the boom cylinder circuit
OVER LOAD
damage to the engine. pressure exceeds the set, specified
pressure. If this happens, the opera-
NOTE tor should be aware that he is oper-
Do not operate the preheat position of the key switch for ating the machine in a range of low
more than 20 seconds at one time. machine stability. The operator
should reduce the attachment reach
in order to increase machine stabil-
ity for safer operation.
2 — 34
10. Battery charging system icon 16. Heavy lift pressure icon
11 This icon will display the electrical 20 This icon will display when the heavy
CHARGING HEAVY LIFT
PROBLEM charging system not function prop- lift switch is in the “ON” position. This
erly. Should this icon display has icon is displayed only when this sys-
electrical charging system repaired tem is activated during operation.
immediately. Icon displays only when
17. Auto warning up icon
engine is running with normal oil
This icon is displayed to indicate the
pressure and a problem occurs in the 21 WARMING UP
warming up operation of the engine
charging system.
and hydraulic oil when the engine
11. Fuel level icon rotates in decel condition after the key
12
This icon will display should the fuel switch is turned on and the auto
LOW
FUEL LEVEL level in fuel tank reaches 54 liters warming up selector switch on the left
(14 Gal.) or less. Should this icon dis- console is set to “ON” position.
play refill fuel tank immediately us- Turn the auto warming up select
ing approved fuel oil. switch, hydraulic oil temperature
switch and the key switch OFF, and
12. Hydraulic oil level icon the warming up operation stops forc-
This icon will display should the hy-
13 LOW HYD ibly and the display disappears.
OIL LEVEL draulic oil level in hydraulic oil reser-
voir fall below safe operating level. 18. Auto warming up finish icon
Should this icon display before start- 28
This icon is displayed when the
FINISH
ing engine, position the machine in warming up of the engine or hydrau-
hydraulic oil check position and check lic oil is finished or the warming up is
sight gauge for oil level. Full hydrau- stopped forcibly by operating the le-
lic reservoir to proper level using ap- ver or turning the auto warm-up
proved hydraulic oil. This icon will not switch OFF forcibly, and concurrently
display with engine running and a the buzzer sounds continuously for
loss of hydraulic oil is experienced. about 5 seconds.
13. Engine coolant level icon 19. Replace engine oil icon
14
This icon will display should the en- 29
This icon will display at every 500
LOW E/G CHANGE
COOL LEVEL gine coolant level fall below safe op- E/G OIL hours of machine operation to remind
erating level. Should this icon display operator of scheduled engine oil
before starting the engine, check and change. The recommended oil change
fill coolant level in the radiator and interval for MITSUBISHI engines is
coolant reservoir. Icon will not display every 500 hours of operation.
if alternator is charging and a sud- When this icon is displayed, and a
den loss of coolant is experienced. second time to reset the oil change
interval to zero. Make sure to
14. Engine oil level icon recalibrate the engine oil change in-
This icon is displayed when the en-
15 LOW E/G terval as indicated in page 2-37.
OIL LEVEL gine oil level of the engine oil pan is
low. Check the engine oil level im-
mediately and make up the shortage SUPPLEMENTARY EXPLANATION
of the engine oil.
For the correcting procedure of the accumulated time of
15. Attachment boost pressure icon engine fueling, see page 2-37.
19 This icon will display when the power

POWER
BOOST ON boost switch is depressed. This icon
is displayed only when this system is
activated during operation.
2 — 35
20. Display of starting number of engine auto idling
stop (Opt.)
NO.1
MAIN CONT P/N
STARTER CHG
PROGRAM VER
Indicates the appeal of starter change
VER 4.00
Recommended This indication flickers for 10 seconds

number of on the multi-display each time the
engine starting
starter key is switched ON after the
starting number of starter motor for
auto idling stop function is raised to
the set value.
Replace the starter motor.
The limit number of durable starting times of starter motor
varies according to the model of machine.
2 — 36
6. How to Calibrate the Engine Oil Change Interval
The accumulated time for fuel filter, hydraulic oil filter, hy-
draulic oil, etc. can be corrected by the procedure for cor-
rection of the accumulated time for engine oil supply after
the adjusting items have been displayed.
While correcting the time, press the mode switch and
buzzer stop switch for 5 seconds simultaneously, and all
LCD items are cleared.
DISPLAY
256Hr AFT
E/G OIL CH
MODE
SWITCH
SCREEN
CHANGE
SWITCH
BUZZER STOP SWITCH
(Eg.) The procedure for correction of the accumulated time for engine oil supply.
PROCEDURE OPERATING PROCEDURE DISPLAY ON MULTIDISPLAY
(Normal)
A Turn the starter switch on.
E/G speed is displayed

Press the gauge cluster screen change switch Press once
B 2250 RPM
once, and the E/G speed (rpm) is sidplayed.
E/G speed is displayed
Press once more, and the engine oil supply Press once more 100Hr AFT
C 2250 RPM
cumulative time screen is displayed. E/G OIL CH
Press the screen change switch for 5 to 10 100Hr AFT 256Hr AFT 100Hr AFT
D seconds and release the hand, it returns to the E/G OIL CH FUEL FIL CH E/G OIL CH
correction mode.
Press the work mode selector switch and the 100Hr AFT Cumulative time 101Hr AFT
E E/G OIL CH E/G OIL CH
cumulative time increases. (once 1 Hr) increases
Press the buzzer stop switch, the cumulative time 100Hr AFT The cumulative 99Hr AFT
F E/G OIL CH E/G OIL CH
decreases. (once 1 Hr) time decreases
Press the gauge cluster screen change switch
once the correcting time is stored, and exits from 99Hr AFT Complete the 256Hr AFT
G the correction mode and is displayed and
256Hr AFT
E/G OIL CH FUEL FIL CH
FUEL FIL CH correction
the correction is completed.
NOTE : 1. Press the screen change switch once after the procedure D, and the condition is stored and the correction is
completed.
2. To correct the each accumulated time of fuel filter, hydraulic oil filter and hydraulic oil, press the screen
change switch and display the accumulated time screen for the items required to correct, then repeat the
procedure D to G.
3. The engine oil change time is warned on the multidisplay by 500 hours, but no buzzer sounds.
4. For the fuel filter, hydraulic oil filter and hydraulic oil, press the screen change switch, and the “ ” is
displayed, but no warning and no buzzer are given.
5. The time is displayed with 4 digits for hydraulic oil, and 3 digits for others.
2 — 37
The following chart is aimed at familiarizing personnel with EXAMPLE:
the priority of the gauge cluster display icons. Pay close If the engine oil pressure is abnormal and fuel level is low,
attention to these icons as they can aid in avoiding un- the engine oil pressure icon will display and buzzer will
necessary repairs and expense. sound. After the oil pressure is back to safe operating pres-
The icon in the chart below are listed in priority from the sure, the low fuel icon will display.
most serious to least serious.
LCD DISPLAY SERVICE FUNCTION ICON SEQUENCE BUZZER SOUNDING
Press it once
1515 RPM
after E/G starts
Press once Press once
1920Hr AFT 256Hr AFT
NO SOUNDING
HYD OIL CH E/G OIL CH
NORMAL
Press once Press once Use to ensure the time of the
DISPLAY
replacement for the inspection,
256Hr AFT 256Hr AFT
HYD FIL CH FUEL FIL CH service, etc.
Press once
Supplementary Explanation:
The screen can be switched into six images by pressing the
screen change switch.
NO SOUNDING
ASSIST • For the description of display

Digging mode Leveling mode
MODE of the assist mode, refer to
DISPLAY Page 3-8.
Each display flickers during
discrimination.
Spreading mode Tamping mode Standard mode
1 MECHATRO 9 REST'D AIR 19 POWER • #2, #5, #6, #7, #10, #28
CPU
CONT. FAIL CLEANER BOOST ON buzzer sounds.
2 10 20
Supplementary Explanation:
SWINGBRAKE ATTACHMENT HEAVY LIFT
Icons #5 and #6 are displayed
DISENGAGED OVER LOAD
and buzzers do not stop
sounding even if the buzzer
4 E/G 11 CHARGING 21 WARMING UP stop switch is pressed.
PREHEAT PROBLEM
Icon #7 is displayed and buzzer
stops sounding when the
5 FINISH 12 LOW 28 FINISH
WARNING buzzer stop switch is pressed.
PREHEAT FUEL LEVEL
Icons #2, #10 and #28 are
displayed and buzzers sound
6 LOW E/G 13 LOW HYD 29 CHANGE intermittently and stop sounding
OIL PRESS OIL LEVEL E/G OIL
after 5 seconds.
7 14 NO.1 No. 1 flickers on the multi-display

HIGH E/G LOW E/G MAIN CONT P/N
STARTER CHG each time the starter key is
COOL TEMP COOL LEVEL PROGRAM VER
VER 4.00 switched ON after the number
Applicable No. of starting number of starter
8 REST'D E/G 15 LOW E/G LC09-06323~ motor is raised to the set value.
OIL FILTER OIL LEVEL YC09-03088~ (EU : STD., OCEANIA : OPT.)
2 — 38
F. OPERATOR CAB AND OPERATOR SEAT
1. Locking/Unlocking Cab Door USE KEY SWITCH KEY TO

Use the key switch key to lock or unlock cab door. LOCK & UNLOCK CAB DOOR
Insert key into door lock and turn clockwise to un-
lock or turn counterclockwise to lock cab door. See
Figure 2.45.
FIGURE 2.45
2. Cab Door Latch

CAB DOOR LATCH
a . The cab door can be latched in an open position
by opening door until it is locked open by the door
latch located on the cab. See Figure 2.46.
FIGURE 2.46
b . Release door latch by pushing release lever down PUSHING LEVER

to release door from latch. See Figure 2.47. DOWN TO
RELEASE DOOR
FIGURE 2.47
c . Pull release lever near side, and door opens from

the inside of cab. See Figure 2.48.
PULL RELEASE LEVER
FIGURE 2.48
2 — 39
3. Housing of Front Window (Upper) LEVER (1 EACH SIDE)
• To open
The front window (upper) can be stored in the ceiling.
The front window (upper) must be stored securely by

setting it in the rear side of cab ceiling. And then don’t
fail to turn the levers on both sides rearward to tighten
securely. If the levers are not securely tightened, this
HANDLE
might introduce the danger of slipping down of front
window, causing accident resulting in injury or death. FRONT INSIDE OF CAB
And also, if the levers are not securely tightened, the FIGURE 2.49
wiper interlock does not work, and when the wiper motor
is turned ON, the wiper may be damaged because the
wiper bumps into the cab frame.
a . Place machine on flat ground.

b . Pull levers placed on the right and left corners on
the upper side of front window near side by hand,
and the lock is released. Figure 2.49.
c . Raise the front window (upper) with handles placed
on the center section of upper side and the lower LEVER
section of left side of the front window, move it to
the rear most of rail on the rear of ceiling, and turn REAR INSIDE OF CAB
and secure the levers rearward (upward) fully to FIGURE 2.50

tighten. Figure 2.50.
• To close
a . To close the front window (upper), pull and loosen
the levers near side (downward), grip the handles
on the center section of upper side and the lower
section of left side, and lower it slowly while lifting
the rear side a little.
b . After returning the front window (upper) to the origi-
nal position, turn levers upward to secure the front
window.
Close the front window while bringing it down slowly.

Then care should be taken not to put hand in the win-
dow.
2 — 40
4. Removing & Storing Lower Front Window
HOLDER
a . After placing upper front window in ceiling, hold
lower front window by hands and remove it from
window frame.
b . Store the removed lower front window in holder HOLDER
on the rear side of cab securely.
c . To store it, insert the right and left sides of glass in

holder, and support it with holder on the lower sec-
tion of window frame. See Figure 2.51.
HOLDER
FIGURE 2.51
5. Opening and closing door glass
a . Open cab door glass (upper) sliding it to front side LOCK

after unlocking it.
LOCK
b . Close the door glass sliding it to LOCK position,
then lock it. See Figure 2.52.
FIGURE 2.52
6. Opening and Closing Sunroof LOCK (1 EACH SIDE)

Pull locks on right and left sides inward, and sunroof
opens through the aid of gas spring.
Close sunroof pulling locks inward, and lock it.
Also the roof can be left slightly open to ventilate air
in cab by placing lock section on section. See Fig-
ure 2.53.
(B)
(A)
FIGURE 2.53
7. Cab Dome Light OFF
a . Turn cab dome Light “ON” by pushing the dome

light switch downward.
b . Turn “OFF” by pushing switch all the way up. See ON

USE THIS SWITCH
Figure 2.54. TO TURN DOME
LIGHT "ON" AND
c . Place dome light switch in the “CENTER” position "OFF"
and the light will be operated by the door switch.
When door is opened the light will come “ON” and
when the door is closed the light will turn “OFF”.
FIGURE 2.54
2 — 41
8. Storage Compartment
The operator and parts manual storage compartment
MANUAL STORAGE
is a pouch located on the back of the operator’s seat.
Keep the operator and parts manual for this machine
in this location at all times for quick, easy reference.
See Figure 2.55.
FIGURE 2.55
9. Operator Seat Adjustments

ROTATE TO SET
The operator seat incorporates several adjustment OPERATOR WEIGHT
mechanisms to insure operator comfort, ease of op-
eration and operator safety. The adjustment areas
are as follows:
a . Operator weight adjustment – FIGURE 2.56

Rotate the adjustment knob until weight close to
the operator’s weight is at the top end of the dial.
FIGURE 2.56
b . Seat height adjustment – FIGURE 2.57

1. Pull height adjustment lever up to raise or lower
rear of seat.
2. Push height adjustment lever down to raise or
lower front of seat.
PULL UP TO ADJUST REAR OF SEAT

PUSH DOWN TO ADJUST FRONT OF SEAT
FIGURE 2.57
c . Seat reclining adjustment – FIGURE 2.58

1. Pull reclining adjustment lever up to set desired
reclining angle.
2. Release reclining adjustment lever to lock seat
in position.
PULL UP TO ADJUST
SEAT RECLINING
POSITION
FIGURE 2.58
2 — 42
d . Seat front to back adjustment – FIGURE 2.59 USE BOTTOM BAIL TO USE TOP BAIL TO
Pull up on seat adjustment bail and move seat ADJUST CONTROL ADJUST OPERATOR
STAND SEAT ONLY
forward or backward to desired position.
FIGURE 2.59
e . Arm rest adjustment – FIGURE 2.60

Lower arm rest and with finger, turn adjustment TURN WHEEL TO
ADJUST ARM REST
wheel until arm rest is in desired position. (1 EACH ARM REST)
FIGURE 2.60
f . Head rest adjustment – FIGURE 2.61

MANUALLY ADJUST HEAD REST HEIGHT
1. Move head rest forward or backward to desired AND RECLINING TO DESIRED POSITION
reclining angle.
2. Raise or lower head rest to desired height.
FIGURE 2.61
2 — 43
G. SEAT BELT – FIGURE 2.62
1. Sit on the operator’s seat and adjust the seat posi-

tion so that the operator’s back closely contacts with
the seat back.
2. Sit on the seat, and draw out the belt. RED BUTTON
NOTE
If the belt is stopped drawn out halfway, the belt is locked
at the stopped position. Return it once to draw it out again. BUCKLE
3. When the seat belt is used, draw it out moderately FIGURE 2.62
long and insert it in the buckle until rattling sound is
heard.
Release hands, and the length is automatically ad-
justed and the belt is locked.
4. After locking, the belt can be extended or shortened

in about 25 mm (1 in) range so as not to fasten the
body tightly.
5. Press the red button of the buckle, and the belt is

unfastened.
ALWAYS WEAR SEAT BELT WHILE SITTING IN

OPERATOR SEAT.
ALWAYS CHECK CONDITION OF SEAT BELT AND
SEAT BELT MOUNTING HARDWARE TO MAKE
CERTAIN SEAT BELT IS IN GOOD CONDITION AND
PROPERLY SECURE.
H. MACHINE ACCESS PANELS & DOORS

ENGINE COOLANT
1. Engine Coolant Tank & Engine Air Cleaner Ac- TANK ACCESS DOOR
cess Doors – FIGURE 2.63

Located on the L.H. side of the machine the engine
coolant tank access door allows access to the en-
gine coolant tank. It also holds the engine air cleaner
access door closed.
Use the key switch key to lock and unlock the en-
gine coolant tank access door. RADIATOR SUB TANK
ENGINE AIR CLEANER ACCESS DOOR
ACCESS DOOR
FIGURE 2.63
2 — 44
2. Main Pump Access Door – FIGURE 2.64
MAIN PUMP ACCESS DOOR
Locate on the right side of the machine this door al-
lows access to the main pump.
FIGURE 2.64
3. Battery Box Access Cover – FIGURE 2.65

Located on the right front of the upper frame this cover
allows access to the batteries and battery relay. This
access cover is also locked and unlocked by key BATTERY BOX
ACCESS COVER
switch key.
Use stay to leave the cover open.
FIGURE 2.65
4. Fuel cap – FIGURE 2.66

Stop engine and remove cap on fuel tank, then make FUEL CAP
it up with fuel.
FIGURE 2.66
5. Engine Bonnet – FIGURE 2.67

ENGINE BONNET
Open engine bonnet with key switch after stopping
engine.
Use stay to support it.
FIGURE 2.67
2 — 45
Section III – BASIC MACHINE OPERATION
Table of Contents
PRE-START CHECK .................................................................................................................................... 3-1
STARTING & STOPPING MACHINE ENGINE WITH ABOVE 0°C (32°F) ................................................... 3-1
Starting Engine ...................................................................................................................................... 3-1
Stopping Engine .................................................................................................................................... 3-2
Emergency Engine Shut Down ............................................................................................................. 3-2
STARTING & STOPPING MACHINE ENGINE WITH BELOW 0°C (32°F) .................................................. 3-2
Starting Engine ...................................................................................................................................... 3-2
Stopping Engine .................................................................................................................................... 3-3
Emergency Engine Shut Down ............................................................................................................. 3-3
STARTING MACHINE ENGINE WITH BOOSTER CABLES ....................................................................... 3-4 ~ 3-5
Connecting Booster Cables .................................................................................................................. 3-4
Starting Boosting Machine Engine ...................................................................................................... 3-5
Starting Disabled Machine Engine ....................................................................................................... 3-5
Disconnecting Booster Cables ............................................................................................................. 3-5
MACHINE WARM-UP ................................................................................................................................... 3-6
Auto Warm Up ........................................................................................................................................ 3-6
Manual Warm Up .................................................................................................................................... 3-6
CONTROLS DECAL ..................................................................................................................................... 3-7
Operating Pattern ................................................................................................................................... 3-7
Operating Pattern Decal ........................................................................................................................ 3-7
BASIC OPERATION OF HYDRAULIC CONTROLS ................................................................................... 3-8 ~ 3-15
Safety Lock Lever .................................................................................................................................. 3-8
KPSS (KOBELCO Power Sensing System) Work Mode Switch ........................................................ 3-9
Machine Travel Controls ....................................................................................................................... 3-10 ~ 3-12
Machine Attachment & Swing Controls ............................................................................................... 3-13 ~ 3-14
Using Power Boost ................................................................................................................................ 3-14
Using Auto-accel .................................................................................................................................... 3-15
Towing the Machine ............................................................................................................................... 3-15
PRACTICES TO IMPROVE EFFICIENCY ................................................................................................... 3-16 ~ 3-17
MACHINE OPERATION IN ADVERSE WEATHER CONDITIONS .............................................................. 3-18
FLAGMAN HAND SIGNALS ........................................................................................................................ 3-19 ~ 3-24

3—0
3.1 PRE-START CHECK
Perform pre-start inspection and maintenance pro-
cedures before starting the machine. Refer to the
maintenance section of this manual for specific in-
structions.
3.2 STARTING & STOPPING MACHINE ENGINE

WITH TEMPERATURE ABOVE 0˚C (32˚F)
A. STARTING ENGINE
THROTTLE IN KEY SWITCH IN
1. Move throttle control to “LO” position. See Figure 3.1. "LO" POSITION "ON" POSITION
2. Insert key into key switch and turn to the “ON” posi-
FIGURE 3.1
tion. See Figure 3.1.
3. Sound horn to warn personnel that the machine is
being started. See Figure 3.2. SOUND
HORN
4. Turn key to the “START” position and release as soon
as engine starts. Key will automatically return to the
“ON” position.
Release key after 20 seconds of cranking if engine does

not start.
Wait at least 2 minutes before attempting to start en-
gine again to allow starter motor to cool.
FIGURE 3.2
NOTE
If engine fails to start after 3 attempts, inspect fuel system
and correct any problems found.
When cranking engine, the absence of “Blue” or “White”
smoke from the exhaust indicates no fuel is reaching the When you do the work which has fear, such as fall
engine cylinders. of a load, when engine stops, please be sure to turn
OFF an auto idling stop switch.
NOTE
Applicable machines : LC09-06323~, YC09-03088~ are The auto idling stop function for cutting down generat-
provided with auto idling stop function. ing of the useless fuel consumption and an exhaust
gas at the time of a stop in this machine is carried. When
EU................. STD. you use it, be careful of the following things.
OCEANIA ..... OPT.
· When you start the engine again after an auto idling
stop, please be sure to start after once returning a
key switch at ACC or OFF and also returning a throttle
potentiometer to Lo. But the engine cannot be again
started until a buzzer stops, after engine stops.
· When you leave from a cab for a long time, please be
sure to turn OFF a starter switch.
· When the engine coolant temperature error are dis-
played with the LCD or lamp, it does not operate, even
if the auto idling stop switch is turned on ON.
3—1
B. STOPPING ENGINE – NORMAL CONDITIONS
MACHINE ON FIRM, ATTACHMENT IN
1. Move machine to a firm, level area and place the LEVEL SURFACE HYDRAULIC OIL
attachment in the hydraulic oil check position. See CHECK POSITION
Figure 3.3.
2. Move throttle control to “LO” position. See Figure 3.1.
Allow engine to idle for 5 minutes.
3. Turn key switch to “OFF”.
C. EMERGENCY ENGINE SHUT DOWN FIGURE 3.3

In only cases of emergency should this method be used.
1. Turn key switch to the “OFF” position.
2. Pull out the engine emergency stop control located
on the lower right side of control stand. See Figure EMERGENCY
3.4. ENGINE STOP
CONTROL
3. Before restarting engine, push emergency engine
stop control in.
3.3 STARTING & STOPPING MACHINE ENGINE

WITH TEMPERATURE BELOW 0°C (32°F)
FIGURE 3.4
A. STARTING ENGINE
2. Turn the key switch to “HEAT” and preheat for 20
seconds to make start-up easier. See Figure 3.6.
3. Sound horn to warn personnel that the machine is
being started. See Figure 3.7.
4. Turn key to the “START” position and release as soon
as engine starts. Key will automatically return to the THROTTLE IN KEY SWITCH IN
“ON” position. "LO" POSITION "ON" POSITION
FIGURE 3.5
KEY IN "HEAT" POSITION

Release key after 20 seconds of cranking if engine does FOR 20 SECONDS
not start.
Wait at least 2 minutes before attempting to start en- 4 E/G
gine again to allow starter motor to cool. PREHEAT
NOTE
• In the cold weather, use the auto warm up switch de- FIGURE 3.6
scribed in page 3-6 of Section III, and warm the engine
and hydraulic oil. SOUND
HORN
• If engine fails to start after 3 attempts, inspect fuel sys-
tem and correct any problems found.
• When cranking engine, the absence of “Blue” or “White”
smoke from the exhaust indicates no fuel is reaching
the engine cylinders.
FIGURE 3.7
3—2
NOTE
Applicable machines : LC09-06323~, YC09-03088~ are
provided with auto idling stop function.
EU................. STD. When you do the work which has fear, such as fall
OCEANIA ..... OPT. of a load, when engine stops, please be sure to turn
OFF an auto idling stop switch.
The auto idling stop function for cutting down generat-

ing of the useless fuel consumption and an exhaust
gas at the time of a stop in this machine is carried. When
you use it, be careful of the following things.
· When you start the engine again after an auto idling
stop, please be sure to start after once returning a
key switch at ACC or OFF and also returning a throttle
potentiometer to Lo. But the engine cannot be again
started until a buzzer stops, after engine stops.
· When you leave from a cab for a long time, please be
sure to turn OFF a starter switch.
· When the engine coolant temperature error are dis-
played with the LCD or lamp, it does not operate, even
if the auto idling stop switch is turned on ON.
B. STOPPING ENGINE– NORMAL CONDITIONS

MACHINE ON FIRM, ATTACHMENT IN
1. Move machine to a firm, level area and place the LEVEL SURFACE HYDRAULIC OIL
attachment in the hydraulic oil check position. See CHECK POSITION
Figure 3.8.
Allow engine to idle for 5 minutes.
3. Turn key switch to “OFF”.
FIGURE 3.8
C. EMERGENCY ENGINE SHUT DOWN

In only cases of emergency should this method be used.
1. Turn key switch to the “OFF” position.
2. Pull out the engine emergency stop control located EMERGENCY
ENGINE STOP
on the lower right side of control stand. See Figure CONTROL
3.9.
3. Before attempting to restart the engine, push emer-
gency engine stop control in.
FIGURE 3.9
3—3
3.4 STARTING MACHINE ENGINE WITH
KEY SWITCH POSITIONS
BOOSTER CABLES
A. CONNECTING BOOSTER CABLES
1. Move vehicle or machine to be used for boosting as
close to the battery box of the disabled machine as
possible.
DO NOT ALLOW THE VEHICLE OR MACHINE USED

FOR BOOSTING TO TOUCH METAL TO METAL
WITH THE DISABLED MACHINE. THIS COULD
SHORT CIRCUIT ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND
CAUSE EXTENSIVE DAMAGE TO THE CPU AND
OTHER COMPONENTS.
FIGURE 3.10
Use only vehicles or machines with 24 V DC electrical

system for boost starting this machine.
2. Make certain key switch of disabled machine is in

NEGATIVE (-) CABLE
the “OFF” position before proceeding with booster
cable connection. See Figure 3.10.
POSITIVE (+) CABLE
WEAR HARD HAT, APPROVED SAFETY GLASSES

OR FACE SHIELD, GLOVES AND OTHER SAFETY
EQUIPMENT WHEN WORKING WITH BATTERIES.
3. Locate and connect one end of the booster cable to

the positive (+) terminal on the battery of the dis-
abled machine. See Figure 3.11. FIGURE 3.11
4. Connect other end of positive booster cable to posi-
tive (+) terminal of battery being used for boosting.
5. Locate and connect second cable to the negative (-)
terminal of the battery being used for boosting. CABLE CONNECTING ORDER
6. Connect other end of negative (-) cable to the upper

frame of disabled machine as far away from battery
as possible. See Figure 3.12.
12V 12V 12V 12V

THE NEGATIVE CABLE, WHEN CONNECTED TO
NORMAL DISCHARGED
THE UPPER FRAME OF DISABLED MACHINE, MAY BATTERIES BATTERIES
ARC CAUSING SPARKS. SPARKS COMING IN CON-
TACT WITH BATTERIES, COULD TRIGGER AN EX-
PLOSION. UPPER FRAME OF
NEVER CONNECT NEGATIVE CABLE TO NEGA- DISABLED MACHINE
TIVE (-) TERMINAL OF DISABLED BATTERY. FIGURE 3.12
3—4
B. STARTING BOOSTING MACHINE ENGINE
CABLE DISCONNECTING ORDER
1. Start engine of boosting machine in normal manner
according to climate conditions. Refer to pages 3-1
& 3-2 for specific starting instructions.
2. Allow five minutes or more to provide partial charge
to the discharged batteries.
12V 12V 12V 12V
C. STARTING DISABLED MACHINE ENGINE
NORMAL DISCHARGED
Start engine of disabled machine in normal manner BATTERIES BATTERIES
according to climate conditions. Refer to pages 3-1 &
3-2 for specific starting instructions.
UPPER FRAME OF
DISABLED MACHINE
FIGURE 3.13
D. DISCONNECTING BOOSTER CABLES

1. After disabled machine engine is running, discon-
nect the negative (-) cable from disabled machine
upper frame. See Figure 3.14.
2. Disconnect negative (-) cable from battery used for
boosting.
3. Disconnect positive (+) cable from battery used for
boosting.
4. Disconnect positive (+) cable from terminal of dis-
DISCONNECT NEGATIVE (-) CABLE
abled machine. See Figure 3.14. FROM DISABLED MACHINE
FIGURE 3.14
When using booster cables remember;

1. Connect positive (+) cable first.
2. Disconnect negative (–) cable first from frame of dis-
abled machine.
3—5
3.4 MACHINE WARM UP
A. AUTO WARM UP-FIGURE3.15
1. Warming Up of Engine
The “WARMING UP” is displayed on the multidisplay PRESS HERE
after operating the engine for 3 minutes at auto accel FOR "OFF"
speed (1,050 rpm.) when the accel dial set value is
the value for deceleration or lower, the engine speed
returns to the speed set by the accel dial.
2. Warming of Hydraulic Oil
After performing the operation of pump max, flow rate
at the engine speed (1,050 rpm) for 3 minutes
pump max. flow rate at the engine speed (1600 rpm)
for 5 minutes pump max. flow rate and control
valve full open at the engine speed (1600 rpm) for 5
minutes max. flow rate at the engine auto accel
speed (1,050 rpm) for 10 minutes, “WARMING UP”
is displayed on the multidisplay.
3. Warming Up Complete
After the auto warming up has gone by about 26 FIGURE 3.15
minutes, or when the oil temperature switch (installed
on the tank port of solenoid proportional block)
senses 10°C or higher and is turned off, the “WARM
FINISH” is displayed on the multidisplay and the NOTE
buzzer sounds intermittently. While warming up the engine, operate the lever and the
In 5 minutes, the buzzer stops sounding, and the warming up is forcibly finished.
display on the multidisplay disappears. Turn the auto warm up switch OFF, and the warming up is
Then, turn the auto warming up switch OFF. forcibly stopped. While warming the hydraulic oil, operate
the lever and the warming is stopped temporarily, and af-
B. MANUAL WARM UP
ter and elapse of 10 seconds of the neutral condition the
NOTE warming operation restarts.
In warming up the engine, turn auto idling stop select switch
OFF.
ALLOW THE ENGINE TO RUN FOR 5 MINUTES

1. Warming Up of Engine IN LOW IDLE BEFORE WARM UP
a. Allow the engine to run for 5 minutes under no load
conditions with throttle control at “LO” idle position.
See Figure 3.16.
b. During warm up, visually and audibly inspect en-
gine for abnormal conditions such as unusual ex-
haust color, excessive vibrations and excessive or
unusual noises.
c. Should problem areas be noticed, stop engine, lo-
cate and repair problem areas before restarting or
operating the machine.
2. Warming of Hydraulic Oil
a. Move throttle control to “HI” idle position.
b. Operate bucket in and hold over relief for 10 to 15
seconds, then operate bucket out and hold over
relief for 10 to 15 seconds. Repeat this operation
for 5 to 10 minutes to help oil to reach operating
temperature.
c. Move throttle control to mid position and operate
the boom, arm and swing controls for 5 to 10 min- FIGURE 3.16
utes each.
3—6
3.6 CONTROLS DECAL B. OPERATING PATTERN DECAL
Figure 3.17 is a representation of the “CONTROLS”
A. OPERATING PATTERN
decal located on the right side window inside the op-
The operating and travel controls of this machine are
erator cab. Study this decal and understand the direc-
factory set to ISO standard operating patterns for opti-
tions each control can be operated and the functions
mum performance of the machine and its systems.
associated with each movement of particular control.
Detailed instructions for each control and its functions
are explained on the following pages of this section.
CHECK AND MAKE SURE THAT OPERAION’S PAT- Should this decal become damaged or missing, install
TERN CONTROL MATCHES THE DECAL PRO- new decal KOBELCO Part Number YT20T01072P1.
VIDED INSIDE THE RIGHT SIDE WINDOW.
HYDRAULIC CONTROL LEVERS
LEFT RIGHT
LEFT CONTROL LEVER TRAVEL TRAVEL
RIGHT CONTROL LEVER
LEVER LEVER
AND AND
PEDAL PEDAL
NOTE
Travel motors are positioned
behind the operator's cab.
FIGURE 3.17
3—7
3.7 BASIC OPERATION OF HYDRAULIC CON-
TROLS
The following instructions are aimed at providing an
operator with the basic function of each hydraulic
control. Use of these instructions, and practice with
a machine, will allow a given operator to become
more efficient in the operation of this equipment.
Each operator must read, understand and follow
these basic instructions along with all safety precau-
tions found in this manual and on the machine be-
fore operating this equipment.
TRAVEL MOTORS AT REAR OF MACHINE
NORMAL POSITIONING OF THE MACHINE FOR FIGURE 3.18

THE PURPOSE OF DETERMINING FRONT, REAR,
FORWARD AND REVERSE ARE WITH THE TRAVEL
MOTORS LOCATED BEHIND THE OPERATOR’S
CAB. SEE FIGURE 3.18.
ALWAYS KNOW THE LOCATION OF TRAVEL MO-
TORS BEFORE OPERATING ANY HYDRAULIC
CONTROLS.
A. SAFETY LOCK LEVER – FIGURE 3.19

1. Unlocked Position
Before any hydraulic operation is possible the safety lock
lever must be placed in the “UNLOCKED” (DOWN) posi-
tion. Placing the safety lock lever in the UNLOCKED
(DOWN) position also positions the L.H. operators con-
sole in its operating position.
2. Locked Position
Before leaving the operator cab, place the safety lock SAFETY LOCK LEVER
IN UNLOCKED
lever in the “LOCKED” position by pulling lever up. (DOWN) POSITION
With safety lock lever in the “LOCKED” (UP) posi-
tion, no hydraulic operation is possible and allows
SAFETY LOCK
easy access in and out of the operator seat. LEVER IN
LOCKED
(UP) POSITION
ALWAYS PLACE THE SAFETY LOCK LEVER IN THE

“LOCKED” (UP) POSITION BEFORE LEAVING CAB
TO PREVENT ANY OPERATION OF HYDRAULIC
CONTROLS.
FAILURE TO PLACE SAFETY LOCK LEVER IN THE
LOCKED (UP) POSITION COULD RESULT IN SERI-
OUS INJURY OR DEATH AS WELL AS SERIOUS FIGURE 3.19
DAMAGE TO THE MACHINE AND ITS COMPO-
NENTS.
3—8
B. KPSS (KOBELCO POWER SENSING SYSTEM) MODE SWITCH – FIGURE 3.20
Press the work mode selector switch in order, and , or mode can be selected.
Select the effective work mode according to the work condition and working target from the table shown below.
For the selected work mode, refer to the table shown below.
L.C.D. DISPLAY
KPSS WORK
MODE SWITCH
FIGURE 3.20
KPSS WORK MODE SELECTION TABLE

CONTROL MODE DISTINCTION REMARKS
A (assist) mode Digging

Ditch digging • Since the mode is set appropriately according to the
Trench box operator's work, the digging, slope finishing, tamping
digging and spreading works are automatically discriminated
and set by the controller without turning the switch.
Leveling • While outputting the power equivalent to the load,

Slope finishing the engine speed is kept constant and the noise is
reduced.
• The distinction results are displayed on the

Spreading multidisplay. (Updated every 5 seconds)
• The display appears several seconds later. And the

display may not always satisfy your intention.
Tamping But it does not indicate a failure.
This mode catches the movement of control lever

Indicator
M (manual) mode sensively, and is suitable to carry out the heavy load
lamp lights on
work giving priority to the work load at high speed.
When an attachment, like breaker, etc., is required, the
Indicator lamp
B (breaker) mode max. flow rate is adjustable. All other modes get full
lights on
flow regardless of the flow setting for breaker mode.
3—9
C. MACHINE TRAVEL CONTROLS
FORWARD TRAVEL
This machine incorporates several travel controls for
the convenience of the operator. Each track can be
operated independently to turn the machine or simul-
taneously to spinturn the machine or to travel straight.
1. Operating Both Travel Levers Together

a. Push both travel levers or press the pedals toward
front of machine and machine will travel “FOR-
WARD”. See Figure 3.21.
b. Pull both travel levers or press the pedals toward
operator seat and machine will travel “REVERSE”.
See Figure 3.22.
FIGURE 3.21
c. Return both travel levers to “NEUTRAL” (center)
position and machine will stop. Parking brakes are
automatically applied when travel levers are in neu-
tral position. REVERSE TRAVEL
NOTE
The distance travel levers are pushed or pulled determines
travel speed of the machine.
EXAMPLE: Travel levers are pulled or pushed to full stroke
- machine will travel at top speed.
Travel levers are pulled or pushed to mid po-
sition - machine will travel at 1/2 speed.
2. Use of Travel Speed Select Switch – Figure 3.23

The travel speed select switch is located on the gauge FIGURE 3.22
cluster switch panel. The travel speed selector switch
is installed on the switch panel section of gauge clus-
ter. Press the travel 2-speed ( ) switch on the
gauge cluster, and the speed is changed to the 2nd 14 : 20
speed and the ( ) is indicated on the multidisplay.

Each time engine is started, travel speed is auto-
matically set to 1st ( ) speed.
............... Set to LOW when moving the ma-

LOW chine on a rough or soft road, slope,
(1st) speed or in a narrow place, or when pow-
erful tractive force is required.
TRAVEL SPEED
SELECT SWITCH
................ Set to HIGH when moving the ma-
PRESS HERE FOR
HIGH chine on flat, hard ground. "FAST" & "SLOW"
(2nd) speed
Use “FAST” ( ) travel speed on firm, level surfaces

only.
Do not travel continuously for more than two hours. FIGURE 3.23
Stop for a period of 10 min. at low idle speed before
resuming travel.
3 — 10
3. Turning Machine
LEFT FORWARD
TRAVEL
a. Push the L.H. travel lever toward front of machine
to turn machine RIGHT in forward motion. See Fig-
ure 3.24.
b. Pull the L.H. travel lever back toward operator seat

to turn machine to the LEFT in reverse motion.
c. Push the R.H. travel Lever toward front of machine

to turn machine to the LEFT in forward motion. See
Figure 3.25.
d. Pull R.H. travel lever toward operator seat to turn FIGURE 3.24
machine to the RIGHT in reverse motion.
RIGHT FORWARD
4. Counter Rotating Machines TRAVEL
a. Pull L.H. travel lever BACK and push R.H. travel

lever FORWARD to counter rotate machine to the
LEFT. See Figure 3.26.
b. Pull R.H. travel lever BACK and push L.H. travel

lever FORWARD to counter rotate machine to the
RIGHT. See Figure 3.27.
NOTE
All the functions explained with use of travel levers can FIGURE 3.25
also be performed using the travel pedals.
COUNTER ROTATING
TO THE LEFT
1. Depending on shoe type and ground conditions this

machine has a maximum climbing ability of 35° (70%)
maximum, limited by engine lubrication.
2. When approaching or descending a slope, operate
the travel slowly.
3. For braking, slowly return travel levers or pedals to
the neutral (center) position. Brakes are engaged
automatically. FIGURE 3.26
4. The travel operation for 2 hours or more may cause

COUNTER ROTATING
the failure of travel motor due to the rise of operat-
TO THE RIGHT
ing temperature. Don’t travel it for 2 hours or more.
5. In extremely cold conditions, below -20°C (-4°F), the
travel lever or pedal action may be “heavier” than
normal. This is normal due to the viscosity of the
hydraulic oil in frigid climates.
FIGURE 3.27
3 — 11
5.Travel Safety
a. Make certain travel motor location is known before
performing any travel operation.
b. Travel on firm, level surfaces as much as possible.
WATER
c. When traveling on rough terrain, travel in SLOW ( ) DEPTH
speed with engine at a low idle.
d. Travel with the travel motors in back of the machine
for long distance travel.
e. When traveling or operating machine on snow or
icy surfaces, clean track shoes frequently to pre- BED MUST BE
vent clogging. This will help keep the machine from FIRM & STABLE
sliding unexpectedly.
MODEL MAXIMUM WATER DEPTH
f . Keep a safe distance from stationary objects and SK330(LC)-6E
800 mm (2´-7˝)
electrical power lines. SK330NLC-6E
g. Be aware of load capacities of bridges and road
shoulders. Reinforce if necessary. FIGURE 3.28
h. Use decking or plating to protect road surfaces as

much as possible. Be careful when turning or spin-
ning machine on asphalt pavement.
i . Do not allow large or heavy objects to strike travel
motors.
j . Do not travel over large objects such as boulders
rocks etc.
k. If necessary to travel or operate machine in a river
or other water, the bed must be firm and water cur-
rent slow. Water must not be deeper than indicated
in the chart in Figure 3.28.
NOTE
If the machine is operated while the slewing bearing is
submerged in water, then the slewing bearing, slewing
pinion, and the swivel joint may wear out prematurely. Im-
mediate replacement of grease in grease bath and over-
haul of the slewing bearing is required. See maintenance
section.
l . On soft ground or mud the machine can sink. Stay

constantly aware of undercarriage position.
3 — 12
D. MACHINE ATTACHMENT & SWING CONTROLS
The following instructions are to be used with hoe bucket
attachment only. If other attachments are being used,
consult the operator’s manual for the particular attach-
ment.

PRECAUTIONS DURING ALL OPERATIONS OF
THIS MACHINE AND ITS ATTACHMENT(S).
1. Boom Operation – FIGURE 3.29 PULL BACK- PUSH FORWARD-

Operation of the boom is performed by pushing and BOOM UP BOOM DOWN
pulling the R.H. control lever forward and backward.
Boom speed is determined by how far the lever is
activated.
a. Pulling R.H. control lever BACK raises boom.
b. Pushing R.H. control levelr FORWARD lowers
boom.
c. Returning R.H. control lever to the neutral (center)
position stops operation of the boom. FIGURE 3.29
2. Arm Operation – FIGURE 3.30 PULL BACK- PUSH FORWARD-
Operation of the arm is performed by pushing or ARM IN ARM OUT
pulling the L.H. control lever forward and backward.
Arm speed is determined by how far the lever is ac-
tivated.
a. Pushing the L.H. control lever FORWARD moves
the arm out.
b. Pulling the L.H. control lever BACK moves the arm
in.
c. Returning the L.H. control lever to the neutral (cen-
FIGURE 3.30
ter) position, stops operation of the arm.
3. Bucket Operation – FIGURE 3.31 PULL LEFT- PUSH RIGHT-

Operation of the bucket is performed by moving the BUCKET IN (DIGGING) BUCKET OUT (DUMPING)
R.H. control lever to the right or left.
a. Moving the R.H. control lever to the LEFT operates
the bucket IN (digging).
b. Moving the R.H. control lever to the RIGHT oper-
ates the bucket OUT (dumping).
BE CAREFUL WHEN OPERATING CERTAIN AT- FIGURE 3.31

TACHMENTS CLOSE TO THE CAB.
CERTAIN ATTACHMENTS CAN HIT AND DAMAGE
CAB.
STOP ATTACHMENT A SAFE DISTANCE AWAY
FROM CAB TO AVOID DAMAGE OR INJURY.
3 — 13
4. Swing Operation - FIGURE 3.32
PUSH LEFT TO SWING LEFT
NOTE
Use swing flashers during swing operations.
Swing operation is performed by moving the L.H.

control lever to the right and left. Swing speed is
determined by the amount the lever is moved.
a. Moving the L.H. control lever to the LEFT swings
the machine to the left.
b. Moving the L.H. control lever to the RIGHT swings
the machine to the right.
c. Returning control to the neutral (center) position PULL RIGHT TO SWING RIGHT
stops swing.
MAKE CERTAIN AREA IS CLEAR OF OBSTACLES

AND PERSONS BEFORE BEGINNING SWING OP-
ERATION OF THE MACHINE. SOUND HORN BE-
FORE BEGINNING SWING OPERATIONS
FIGURE 3.32
E. USING POWER BOOST

The KOBELCO power boost switch is located on top DEPRESS WITH
THUMB TO TURN "ON"
of the R.H. operator control. It is a momentary switch
which is activated by depressing with the thumb. This
system is designed for use during bucket digging op-
erations when extra “Break-Out” power is required to
allow the bucket to break through a dig.
1. Operate the bucket in (digging) control. While bucket

is digging, depress the power boost switch with right
thumb. See Figure 3.33. This will increase bucket
digging power by approximately 15%. EU spec.
NOTE
If the power boost switch is left depressed while perform-
ing other hydraulic operations the operator will experience
slower operation of the hydraulic functions. While power
boost switch is depressed the power boost icon ( ) will DEPRESS WITH
be displayed on the gauge cluster display. THUMB TO TURN "ON"
OCEANIA spec.
FIGURE 3.33
3 — 14
F . USING AUTO ACCELERATION – FIGURE 3.34
Press the symbol mark on this switch to switch ON
(LED is illuminated). If the remote control pressure of
the operating pedal (in option) does not actuate for 4
14 : 20
seconds, when the accel dial is placed on the decel
position (1,050 rpm) or higher, the auto accel actuates
automatically resulting in the decel speed, conse-
quently the fuel consumption and noise are reduced.
By operating the control lever and the operating pedal,
the engine speed rises to the speed equivalent to the
accel dial set position gradually corresponding to the
motion of control lever or pedal.
And, when operating at decel speed, press the no sym- AUTO ACCEL SWITCH
bol side to switch OFF, the engine speed rises to the

speed equivalent to the accel dial set position.
HI
LO
THROTTLE
POTENTIOMETER
FIGURE 3.34
G. TOWING THE MACHINE – FIGURE 3.35 & 3.36

Where you can not get the machine out of soft soil,
place wire slings as shown on the right and pull it by
an other machine. Always place wire slings around the
frame section and put pads on each corner to prevent
the wire slings from being damaged.
NOTE
Do not pull the machine utilizing the holes provided for
pulling lightweight objects.
Otherwise the holes may break.
FIGURE 3.35
FIGURE 3.36
3 — 15
3.8 PRACTICES TO IMPROVE EFFICIENCY
USE ARM IN ACTION
AS MUCH AS POSSIBLE
A. USE ARM IN ACTION – FIGURE 3.37
Operate the bucket at shallow depths and use the arm
in action to fill the bucket. Setting the bucket too deep
will decrease the machine’s efficiency.
FIGURE 3.37
B. OPERATE BOOM SMOOTHLY – FIGURE 3.38

Always begin and end boom operation slowly with OPERATE BOOM SMOOTHLY
DURING ALL BOOM OPERATIONS
smooth, careful movement of the control lever. Do not
perform sudden starts and stops of the boom as this
creates unnecessary stress on the machine and its
components.
FIGURE 3.38
C. BUCKET TEETH DIRECTION – FIGURE 3.39

ALWAYS POINT BUCKET TEETH
Always point bucket teeth in the direction the machine IN DIRECTION OF DIGGING
will be digging to reduce digging resistance and the
possibility of bucket teeth damage.
FIGURE 3.39
D. MAXIMUM DIGGING FORCE POSITION – FIGURE

MAXIMUM DIGGING FORCE IS OBTAINED
3.40 WITH BOOM AND ARM AT 90°~110° EACH OTHER
The attachment will provide maximum digging force
when the arm and boom are at 90° ~ 110° of each other.
90°~110°
FIGURE 3.40
3 — 16
E . CLEANING SAND & SOIL FROM BUCKET – FIGURE
3.41
Operate arm to a near level position and bring the
bucket to a dumping position. If sand and soil do not
fall out, move the bucket lever right and left a few times.
Avoid shaking out soil using shocks at the end of the

bucket cylinder stroke.
OPERATE BUCKET IN & OUT WITH
ARM OUT TO DISLODGE MATERIAL FROM BUCKET
F . STOP SWING MOTION EARLY – FIGURE 3.42
To stop slewing action, release the swing lever before FIGURE 3.41
you get to your final point of digging or dumping.
RELEASE SWING BEFORE REACHING DESIRED

G. BACK FILLING & LEVELING – FIGURE 3.43 DIGGING POSITION
For back filling and leveling work after digging, move
the bucket back and forth horizontally.
NOTE
Do not push or pull material with the bucket like a bull-
dozer when using the machine to level material.
1. In leveling ground toward machine, pull the arm gen-

tly, lift the boom a little and when the arm has passed
the vertical point, lower the boom gently and ma- FIGURE 3.42
nipulate the machine so the bucket moves horizon-
tally.
USE ARM TO MOVE BUCKET HORIZONTALLY
2. For leveling ground away from machine, reverse op- FOR LEVELING
eration in step 1 above.
3. ln the above operation, bucket motion may be used
together with the boom. By controlling the action of
the boom work lever, you can dig a slope- like, slope
facing operation.
4. Never travel with attachment touching the ground.
Severe structural damage could occur.
H. OPERATING THE SHOVEL – FIGURE 3.44 FIGURE 3.43

Digging with the shovel differs slightly from digging with
backhoe.
GRADE AT 2°~ 3° SLOPE FOR DRAINAGE
1. Using the arm cylinder, scrape the ground.
2. Scrape the ground at 2°~ 3° to improve draining in
areas near the groundwater level.
3. Be careful not to bump the reversed bucket into the cab.
4. The excavating power during shovel operations is
2°~ 3°
less than that during backhoe operations.
5. If machine bucket is equipped with a lifting eye, check
to make sure that the eye will clear arm with bucket
cylinder in full extended (full dump) position.
FIGURE 3.44
3 — 17
I . MACHINE OPERATION IN ADVERSE WEATHER
CONDITIONS
1. Operation in Extreme Cold Do not allow dirt and debris to accumulate in the radia-
tor fins, oil cooler fins or debris screen.
a. Follow procedures on page 3-2 as starting en-
gine may be difficult due to extremely cold tem-
peratures. c. Keep all belts properly tensioned.
b. Use an engine oil, hydraulic oil and diesel fuel d. Make certain that the engine coolant mixture is
designed for use in cold climates. See mainte- sufficient to keep the machine safe.
nance section, page 4-8 for reference. Also, keep e. If the machine becomes overheated, idle the ma-
battery fully charged. chine to help cool the engine, turn engine “OFF”
c. Make certain to perform machine warm-up pro- and check coolant level. After filling to proper level
cedures as described on page 3-6 to prevent pre- the machine continues to over heat, stop engine,
mature wear or damage to pumps, motors and allow to cool, drain and flush entire cooling sys-
other components. tem and refill with the proper mixture of fresh,
clean coolant.
NOTE f . Check the battery electrolyte (acid) level fre-
In extremely frigid climates, covering the radiator is a
quently and fill as necessary with distilled water.
method to aid the machine warm-up. IF NECESSARY TO
MAINTAIN OPERATING TEMPERATURES, COVER g. Keep a close watch on the gauge cluster for warn-
THE OUTER EDGES OF THE RADIATOR, LEAVING AN ing icons during operation. Avoid unnecessary low
OPENING IN THE CENTER PART OF THE COVER - speed running of the engine during operation.
THUS AVOIDING FAN OVERLOADING. Keep a close During slow, or no work periods, place throttle
watch on the gauge cluster for warning icons during op- potentiometer in “LO” idle position.
eration. It may be necessary to use a coolant heater, fuel 3. Operation in High Altitudes
heater, engine heater jacket, and/or additional battery
power to aid engine starting. a. Due to low atmospheric pressure at high altitudes,
a decrease in engine power will be experienced.
Be aware of this fact when placing machine un-
d. Make certain that the engine coolant mixture is
der heavy load in high altitude climates.
sufficient to keep the machine safe. Take into con-
sideration wind chill factors when mixing coolant b. Keep close watch on the engine temperature
ratios. gauge to avoid overheating of the engine.
4. Operation in Sandy and Dusty Areas
NOTE
Mix coolant to a protection temperature of 5˚C (9˚F) lower a. Check the engine air cleaner elements frequently
than the machine will experience during operation, stor- in sandy or dusty conditions.
age or transport. b. When air cleaner restriction lamp is lit, change
filters immediately regardless of time intervals.
e. Keep battery terminals free of ice and snow. Ice c. Service fuel filter, water separator, and all hydrau-
and snow could cause the terminals to short cir- lic filters frequently.
cuit and cause extensive damage to the machine
systems. Check the battery electrolyte (acid) level 5. Operation at Seashore or Salty Climate
frequently and fill as necessary with distilled wa- a. Thoroughly wash machine daily to help avoid cor-
ter. If the machine will be left outside overnight, it rosion of machined areas, electrical components
is recommended to remove the batteries and store and cylinder rods.
in a warm area.
b. Frequently check all mounting hardware for proper
2. Operation in Extreme Heat tightness. Torque to proper value to aid in pre-
a. Use an engine oil, hydraulic oil and fuel oil de- venting salt from entering the machine systems.
signed for use in hot climates. Also, keep battery 6. Operation in Humid Climate
fully charged.
a. In climates with high humidity, thoroughly wash
b. Clean radiator, oil cooler and debris screen often
the machine daily and coat all bare surfaces with
to prevent damage or overheating of the machine.
an oil based lubricant to help prevent corrosion.
3 — 18
3.9 FLAGMAN HAND SIGNALS
The following is a compilation of the hand signals to
be used when a flagman is required for excavator
operation. All personnel associated with the opera-
tion of the excavator should know these signals and
their meaning before attempting to operate this ma-
chine.
A. RAISE LOAD VERTICALLY

Face machine operator, raise right forearm vertical, with
index finger pointing up and move hand in a small cir-
cular motion. See Figure 3.45.
FIGURE 3.45
B. LOWER LOAD VERTICALLY

Face machine operator, extend right arm down, point
index finger down and move hand in a small circular
motion. See Figure 3.46.
FIGURE 3.46
C. MOVE LOAD IN HORIZONTALLY

Face machine operator, extend right arm toward op-
erator with hand facing operator and move hand in di-
rection of movement required. See Figure 3.47.
FIGURE 3.47
D. MOVE LOAD OUT HORIZONTALLY

Face machine operator, extend right arm toward op-
erator with back of hand facing operator and move hand
in direction of movement required. See Figure 3.48.
FIGURE 3.48
3 — 19
E. RAISE BOOM
Face machine operator, extend right arm out horizon-
tally from shoulder, make a fist with thumb up. See
Figure 3.49.
FIGURE 3.49
F . LOWER BOOM
tally from shoulder, make a fist with thumb down. See
Figure 3.50.
FIGURE 3.50
G. SWING LEFT
tally from shoulder, make a fist with index finger point-
ing in swing direction. See Figure 3.51.
FIGURE 3.51
H. SWING RIGHT
Face machine operator, extend left arm out horizon-
tally from shoulder, make a fist with index finger point-
ing in swing direction. See Figure 3.52.
FIGURE 3.52
3 — 20
I . ARM IN
Face machine operator, bend at elbows with arms fac-
ing operator, make fists and point thumbs in toward
each other. See Figure 3.53.
FIGURE 3.53
J . ARM OUT
Face machine operator, bend at elbows with arms fac-
ing operator, make fists and point thumbs out away
from each other. See Figure 3.54.
FIGURE 3.54
K. COUNTER ROTATE LEFT
Face machine operator, place right hand on top of hard
hat, bend left arm at elbow to the right, make a fist with
left hand with index finger pointing out and rotate hand
in a reverse circular motion. See Figure 3.55.
FIGURE 3.55
L . COUNTER ROTATE RIGHT
Face machine operator, place left hand on top of hard
hat, bend right arm at elbow to the left, make a fist with
right hand with index finger pointing out and rotate hand
in a forward circular motion. See Figure 3.56.
FIGURE 3.56
3 — 21
M. TRAVEL FORWARD
Face machine operator, bend both elbows in,
make fists and rotate fists one over the other in a re-
verse circular motion. See Figure 3.57.
FIGURE 3.57
N. TRAVEL REVERSE
Face machine operator, bend both elbows in,
make fists and rotate fists one over the other in a for-
ward circular motion. See Figure 3.58.
FIGURE 3.58
O. CLOSE BUCKET (BUCKET IN OR DIG)

Face machine operator, hold left hand in,closed and
stationary, hold right hand in, make a fist with index
finger pointing toward left hand and move right hand in
a small reverse circular motion. See Figure 3.59.
FIGURE 3.59
P. OPEN BUCKET (BUCKET OUT OR DUMP)

Face machine operator, hold left hand in,open and sta-
tionary, hold right hand in, make a fist with index finger
pointing toward left hand and move right hand in a small
forward circular motion. See Figure 3.60.
FIGURE 3.60
3 — 22
Q. TURN LEFT
Face machine operator, raise right forearm up, make
fist with right hand and hold stationary, bend left arm
in, make fist with left hand and rotate left fist in a small
reverse circular motion. See Figure 3.61.
FIGURE 3.61
R. TURN RIGHT
Face machine operator, raise left forearm up, make
fist with left hand and hold stationary, bend right arm
in, make fist with right hand and rotate right fist in a
small forward circular motion. See Figure 3.62.
FIGURE 3.62
S . MOVE THIS MUCH

Face machine operator, raise both forearms up, hands
open and facing each other , move hands in laterally
indicating how far to go. See Figure 3.63.
FIGURE 3.63
T . MOVE SLOWLY
Face machine operator, raise left arm out horizontally
toward right shoulder with hand open and facing down,
point right index finger up toward open left hand and
rotate right hand in a reverse circular motion. (Raise
load slowly is illustrated.) See Figure 3.64.
FIGURE 3.64
3 — 23
U. STOP
Face machine operator, raise left arm out horizontally
from shoulder with hand open and facing down, move
arm in a horizontal motion back and forth. See Figure
3.65.
FIGURE 3.65
V. EMERGENCY STOP
Face machine operator, raise both arms out horizon-
tally from shoulders with hands open and facing down,
move arms in a horizontal motion back and forth. See
Figure 3.66.
FIGURE 3.66
W.STOP ENGINE
Face machine operator, right arm at side, draw left
thumb or index finger across throat. See Figure 3.67.
FIGURE 3.67
3 — 24
Section IV – MAINTENANCE
Table of Contents
GENERAL INFORMATION .......................................................................................................................... 4-1
GENERAL SAFETY ..................................................................................................................................... 4-1 ~ 4-4
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE CHART .............................................................................................. 4-5 ~ 4-7
FLUIDS AND FILTERS ................................................................................................................................. 4-8 ~ 4-9
Required Fluids And Quantities ........................................................................................................... 4-8
Required Filters ...................................................................................................................................... 4-8
KOBELCO Fluids And Lubricants ........................................................................................................ 4-8
Lubricant Specifications ....................................................................................................................... 4-9
PRE-START (EVERY 8 HOURS) INSPECTION & MAINTENANCE ........................................................... 4-10 ~ 4-20
Engine Oil Level ..................................................................................................................................... 4-10
Engine Coolant Level ............................................................................................................................ 4-10
Engine Fluid Leaks ................................................................................................................................ 4-11
Fan Belt Wear And Tension ................................................................................................................... 4-11
Air Cleaner .............................................................................................................................................. 4-12
Engine Electrical .................................................................................................................................... 4-13
Fuel Level ............................................................................................................................................... 4-14
Hydraulic Oil Level ................................................................................................................................. 4-15
Hydraulic Functions .............................................................................................................................. 4-16
Hydraulic Oil Leaks ................................................................................................................................ 4-16
Machine Electrical .................................................................................................................................. 4-16
Step And Handrails ................................................................................................................................ 4-17
Frame Structure ..................................................................................................................................... 4-17
Tracks And Components ....................................................................................................................... 4-17 ~ 4-18
Track Tension ......................................................................................................................................... 4-19
Boom And Arm ....................................................................................................................................... 4-20
Bucket Teeth And Side Cutters ............................................................................................................. 4-20
50 HOUR (WEEKLY) & NEW MACHINE BREAK-IN INSPECTION & MAINTENANCE ................................ 4-21 ~ 4-28
Engine Oil And Filter Element ............................................................................................................... 4-21
Engine Oil ............................................................................................................................................... 4-22
Fuel Tank Drain ...................................................................................................................................... 4-23
Water Separator ..................................................................................................................................... 4-23
Air Intake System ................................................................................................................................... 4-23
Radiator, Oil Cooler And Debris Screen .............................................................................................. 4-24
Hydraulic Return Filters (Applicable No. LC08-06201~06322, YC08-03001~03087) ........................ 4-25
Hydraulic Return Filters (Applicable No. LC09-06323~, YC09-03088~) ............................................ 4-26
Batteries .................................................................................................................................................. 4-27 ~ 4-28
Attachment Lubrication ......................................................................................................................... 4-29
120 HOUR INSPECTION & MAINTENANCE .................................................................................................. 4-30 ~ 4-31
Swing Motor Reduction Oil ................................................................................................................... 4-30
Travel Motors Reduction Oil ................................................................................................................. 4-31
4—0—1
250 HOUR (3-MONTH) INSPECTION & MAINTENANCE........................................................................... 4-32 ~ 4-33

Belt tensioner (Fan & Air Conditioner) ................................................................................................. 4-32
Air Conditioner Filters ........................................................................................................................... 4-33
Inspecting Counterweight Attaching Bolts for Loosening ................................................................ 4-33
500 HOUR INSPECTION & MAINTENANCE .............................................................................................. 4-34 ~ 4-37
Fuel Filter ................................................................................................................................................ 4-34
Water Pump Bearing Lubrication ......................................................................................................... 4-34
Bleeding Air from the Fuel System ...................................................................................................... 4-35
Greasing the Slewing Ring ................................................................................................................... 4-36
Checking Slewing Ring Fitting Bolts for Loosening .......................................................................... 4-36
Fuel System Injection Pressure And Nozzle Condition (Atomization) .............................................. 4-36
Checking the Air Conditioner Refrigerant ........................................................................................... 4-37
2000 HOUR INSPECTION & MAINTENANCE ............................................................................................ 4-38 ~ 4-49
Change Engine Coolant ........................................................................................................................ 4-38 ~ 4-39
Removal And Installation of Engine Radiator ..................................................................................... 4-40
Change Hydraulic Oil ............................................................................................................................. 4-41 ~ 4-43
Hydraulic Tank Breather ........................................................................................................................ 4-44
Change Oil in Travel Motor Reduction Units ....................................................................................... 4-45
Pilot Line Filter ....................................................................................................................................... 4-45
Change Oil in Swing Reduction Units .................................................................................................. 4-46
Attachment & Dust Seals ...................................................................................................................... 4-47 ~ 4-48
Windshields Washer .............................................................................................................................. 4-48
Change Grease in Swing Ring Grease Bath ........................................................................................ 4-49
MISCELLANEOUS ....................................................................................................................................... 4-50 ~ 4-54
Fuses ....................................................................................................................................................... 4-50
Periodical Inspection Items .................................................................................................................. 4-51 ~ 4-53
Machine Storage .................................................................................................................................... 4-54
Care During Storage .............................................................................................................................. 4-54
Removing Machine from Strage ........................................................................................................... 4-54
INSPECTION MAINTENANCE CHECKLIST ............................................................................................... 4-55
4—0—2
4.1 GENERAL INFORMATION

PRECAUTIONS CONTAINED IN THIS MANUAL BE-
FORE PERFORMING ANY INSPECTION OR MAIN-
TENANCE PROCEDURES TO THIS MACHINE, ITS
SYSTEMS OR COMPONENTS.
A. It is recommended by KOBELCO CONSTRUCTION

MACHINERY CO., LTD. that an inspection and main-
tenance schedule be developed and maintained on a FIGURE 4.1
regular basis for this machine. Developing and main-
taining such a schedule, helps to keep the machine in
optimum operating condition. See Figure 4.1.
B. The information contained in this section gives the

proper procedures for performing inspection and main-
tenance functions for this machine. Use these proce-
dures when performing inspection and maintenance
as they will guide the technician step by step for each
procedure. Also, refer to the inspection and mainte-
nance charts for general service interval recommen-
dations.
NOTE FIGURE 4.2

The inspection and maintenance charts provided give only
general time intervals. It may be necessary to develope a
custom schedule to perform machine maintenance at more
frequent intervals based on the work conditions.
C. Use only KOBELCO oils, fluids, lubricants, filters and

replacement parts to keep machine in optimum oper-
ating condition. See Figure 4.2.
4.2 GENERAL SAFETY

A. DISPOSAL OF HAZARDOUS WASTE – FIGURE 4.3
Dispose of waste oils, fluids, lubricants, filters and other FIGURE 4.3
hazardous waste properly.
Dispose of all hazardous waste in accordance with

government environmental regulations, laws and
codes.
B. KEEP MACHINE CLEAN – FIGURE 4.4

Thoroughly clean machine before performing inspec-
tion and maintenance procedures. It is easier and safer
locate problems, perform maintenance and also re-
duces the risk of hydraulic system contamination when
machine is clean. FIGURE 4.4
4—1
C. HOT SURFACES & FLUIDS – FIGURE 4.5
Use caution and wear the proper safety equipment
when working around hot areas. Never change oils,
engine coolant or filters immediately after a machine
has been stopped. Allow machine to cool before per-
forming maintenance procedures.
D. WARM ENGINE OIL

Engine oil should have a temperature of between 20°C
~ 40°C (68°F ~ 104°F) before the oil is changed. If nec-
FIGURE 4.5
essary run engine until the oil is warm within the rec-
ommended oil change temperature.
E. “TAG-OUT” MACHINE – FIGURE 4.6

Before beginning any inspection or maintenance pro-
cedures, secure a “DO NOT OPERATE” tag to the
operator’s console to inform the operator that the ma-
chine will be inoperable for inspection and mainte-
nance. This tag will help prevent accidental starting of
the machine.
F . INSPECT WASTE OILS AND FILTERS – FIGURE 4.7 FIGURE 4.6

Before disposal, inspect all waste oils, fluids and filters
for debris and foreign material.
It is recommended to cut open the oil filters to deter-
mine any abnormal wear.
CHECK FOR
G. PREVENT CONTAMINATION – FIGURE 4.8 DEBRIS
Always cap or plug lines when hydraulic components

are removed to help prevent hydraulic system contami-
nation that can be caused by dirt, dust and debris en-
tering a line or port.
FIGURE 4.7
Never allow a hydraulic line or component to become
contaminated. This could cause severe system dam-
age. Contact an authorized KOBELCO distributor to
obtain the proper caps and plugs to be used on this
machine.
H. SEALS AND “O”-RINGS

Always replace seals and “O”-rings with new parts.
Never reuse a seal or “O”-ring during reassembly of
components. Make sure to lubricate all new seals with
the appropriate oil before installation.
FIGURE 4.8
4—2
I . STOP ENGINE
Never attempt any MAINTENANCE with engine run-
ning. Always stop the engine and allow machine to cool.
J . WEAR SAFETY EQUIPMENT – FIGURE 4.9

Wear hard hat, safety goggles or face shield, work
gloves, safety shoes and well fitting work clothes when
performing inspection and maintenance procedures on
this machine.
FIGURE 4.9
K. CLEANING PARTS
Use only approved cleaning solvents and proper equip-
ment to clean parts. DEPRESS RUBBER CAP
TO RELEASE PRESSURE
NEVER USE GASOLINE, DIESEL FUEL OR OTHER

FLAMMABLE SOLVENTS TO CLEAN PARTS.
ALWAYS CLEAN PARTS IN A WELL VENTILATED
AREA.
HYDRAULIC TANK
FIGURE 4.10
L . HYDRAULIC TANK PRESSURE
Always release the internal pressure of the hydraulic
tank before performing inspection or maintenance pro-
cedures.
1. Push rubber cap “DOWN” to release air pressure in

the reservoir. See Figure 4.10.
Gasses from hydraulic tank may be hot.

Wear safety equipment.
KEY SWITCH IN
"OFF" POSITION
FIGURE 4.11
M. WELDING SAFETY
1. Turn key switch to “OFF” position. Wait 4 seconds

for electrical power to disconnect. See Figure 4.11.
2. Remove negative (-) cable from battery terminal. See

Figure 4.12.
3. Attach welder ground cable with 1 m (3´-3˝) away

from component being welded.
4. Make certain welder ground is not located at a seal

or bearing.
5. Make certain that no bearings nor seals separates

the welder ground and the weld area. FIGURE 4.12
4—3
N. RELEASING INNER PRESSURE IN HYDRAULIC
SYSTEM
NEVER CHANGE OILS OR FILTERS ON A MACHINE

THAT HAS JUST FINISHED WORKING. ALLOW
MACHINE TO COOL FIRST UNTIL OILS AND FLU-
IDS ARE WARM NOT HOT.
RELEASE HYDRAULIC TANK PRESSURE BEFORE
WORKING WITH ANY HYDRAULIC COMPONENT. FIGURE 4.13
1. Select the hard and flat area and place the machine
in the position shown in Figure 4.13.
DEPRESS RUBBER CAP
TO RELEASE PRESSURE
2. Stop the engine.
3. Immediately after the engine stops, shift the R.H. and

L.H. travel control levers shift forward and backward,
operate the R.H. and L.H. control levers in full stroke
several times, and release the internal pressure re-
maining in the hydraulic system.
HYDRAULIC TANK
4. Press valve with rubber cap on the upper surface of FIGURE 4.14
hydraulic tank several times(5 or 7 times) and re-
lease the pressure in the hydraulic tank. See Figure
4.14.
5. Make sure that the pressure in the hydraulic tank is

released completely, and after that carry out the in-
spection and maintenance of hydraulic tank.
4—4
4.3 INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE CHART
Follow the chart below for recommended intervals
of regular inspection and maintenance procedures. READ, UNDERSTAND AND FOLLOW ALL SAFETY
PRECAUTIONS FOUND IN THIS MANUAL BEFORE
PERFORMING INSPECTION & MAINTENANCE.
MAINTENANCE TO COMPONENT INTERVAL (HOURS ON HOURMETER) REF.

SYSTEM
PERFORM LOCATION 8 50 120 250 500 1,000 2,000 PAGE #
CHECK OIL LEVEL ON SIDE OF ENGINE 4-10
CHECK COOLANT LEVEL RESERVOIR 4-10
CHECK FOR FLUID LEAKS COMPLETE ENGINE 4-11
CHECK BELT TENSION FRONT OF ENGINE 4-11
FUEL TANK
CHECK FUEL LEVEL 4-14
GAUGE CLUSTER
CHECK AIR CLEANER AIR CLEANER 4-12
CHECK ENGINE ELECTRICAL COMPLETE ENGINE 4-13
DRAIN WATER FROM FUEL FUEL TANK BOTTOM 4-23
CHANGE ENGINE OIL OIL PAN 4-22
CHANGE OIL FILTER L.H. SIDE OF ENGINE 4-21
CHANGE FUEL FILTER L.H. SIDE OF ENGINE 4-34
DRAIN WATER SEPARATOR R.H. SIDE OF ENGINE 4-23
ENGINE CHECK AIR INTAKE SYSTEM HOSES & CLAMPS 4-23

CHECK FAN ASSEMBLY FRONT OF ENGINE
CHECK BELT TENSIONER FRONT OF ENGINE 4-32
CLEAN RADIATOR RADIATOR 4-24
BETWEEN RADIATOR
CLEAN DEBRIS SCREEN 4-24
AND OIL COOLER
CHANGE ENGINE COOLANT RADIATOR & ENGINE 4-38~4-40
CHANGE AIR CLEANER
AIR CLEANER 4-12~4-13
ELEMENTS
ADJUST VALVE CLEARANCE ENGINE TOP ENG. MAN
CHECK ENGINE COMPRESSION ENGINE ENG. MAN
CHECK INJECTION PRESSURE ENGINE 4-36
CHECK INJECTION TIMING ENGINE ENG. MAN
LUBRICATE WATER PUMP ENGINE 4-34
CHECK STARTER AND ALTERNATOR ENGINE ENG. MAN
PILOT LINE FILTER HYDRAULIC TANK 4-45
HYDRAULIC OIL LEVEL SIDE OF HYD TANK 4-15
CHECK HYD FUNCTIONS OPERATOR'S CONTROLS 4-16
CHECK FOR OIL LEAKS HYDRAULIC SYSTEM 4-16
CHECK HOSES/LINES HYDRAULIC SYSTEM 4-16
HYDRAULIC CLEAN SUCTION SCREEN HYDRAULIC TANK 4-41~4-43

CHANGE RETURN FILTERS
Applicable No. HYDRAULIC TANK 4-25
LC08-06201~06322
YC08-03001~03087
CHANGE RETURN FILTERS
Applicable No. HYDRAULIC TANK 4-26
LC09-06323~
YC09-03088~
••• Regular inspection & maintenance required.
••• Break-in (after first 50 hours) inspection & maintenance required.
4—5

SYSTEM
CHANGE HYDRAULIC TANK
HYDRAULIC TANK 4-44
BREATHER
HYDRAULIC CHANGE HYDRAULIC OIL HYDRAULIC TANK 4-41~4-43
CLEAN HYDRAULIC TANK HYDRAULIC TANK 4-41~4-43
INSPECT ALL WIRING COMPLETE MACHINE 4-16
ELECTRICAL BATTERY ELECTROLYTE BATTERIES 4-26
BATTERY SERVICE BATTERIES 4-27~4-28
HYD. FUNCTION OPERATION OPERATOR'S CONTROLS 4-16
CHECK SWITCHES CONTROL PANELS 4-16
CHECK SWING BRAKE OPERATOR'S CONTROLS
CHECK WARNING LIGHTS CAB/FRAME/BOOM 4-16
CHECK GAUGES GAUGE CLUSTER 4-16
CHECK HORN HORN SWITCH 4-16
CHECK GAUGE CLUSTER GAUGE CLUSTER 4-16
CHECK SWING REDUCTION
UPPER FRAME 4-30
OIL LEVEL & FILL
CHECK BOLTS/TORQUE SLEWING RING 4-36
UPPER
CHECK SLEWING RING & SIGHT WINDOW ON
FRAME
PINION GEAR CENTER SECTION
CHECK SLEWING RING SEAL SLEWING RING
CHECK SWIVEL JOINT SEALS SWIVEL JOINT
DRAIN WATER FROM LOWER FRAME
4-49
SLEWING RING GREASE BATH CAVITY DRAIN PORT
GREASE SLEWING RING SLEWING RING 4-36
CHANGE GREASE IN REMOVE UPPER
4-49
SLEWING RING GREASE BATH FRAME
CHANGE SWING REDUCTION
SWING MOTOR 4-46
UNIT OIL
CHECK BOLTS/TORQUE COUNTERWEIGHT 4-33
CHECK FOR OIL LEAKS COMPLETE SYSTEM 4-16
CHECK LINES FOR DAMAGE FRAME CAVITY 4-16
CHECK STEPS & HANDRAILS FRAME RAILS 4-17
CHECK FRAME STRUCTURE ENTIRE FRAME 4-17
CHECK TRACKS & LINKS TRACKS 4-17~4-18
CHECK SPROCKET WEAR FRONT OF TRACKS 4-18
LOWER CHECK IDLER WEAR REAR OF TRACKS 4-18
FRAME CHECK ROLLER WEAR TRACKS 4-18
CHECK TRACK TENSION RAISE TRACKS 4-19
ADJUST TRACK TENSION FRAME RAILS 4-19
CHECK TRAVEL REDUCTION
TRAVEL MOTORS 4-31
UNIT OIL LEVEL & FILL
CHANGE TRAVEL
TRAVEL MOTORS 4-45
REDUCTION UNIT OIL
CHECK BOLTS/HARDWARE ENTIRE MACHINE
4—6

SYSTEM
CHECK BOOM & ARM
BOOM & ARM 4-20
STRUCTURE
CHECK BUCKET TEETH &
BUCKET 4-20
ATTACHMENT SIDE CUTTERS
GREASE BOOM PINS BOOM 4-29
GREASE ARM PINS ARM 4-29
GREASE BUCKET PINS ARM & BUCKET LINK 4-29
CHECK A/C REFRIGERANT CLIMATE CONTROL-A/C 4-37
CHECK A/C COMPRESSOR
ENGINE 4-11, 4-31
BELT & ADJUST
CHECK A/C CONDENSER RADIATOR
4-24
AND CLEAN COMPARTMENT
ACCESSORIES CHECK A/C FRESH AIR FILTER CAB 4-33
CHECK A/C RECIRCULATE
CAB 4-33
AIR FILTER
CHECK WIPER WASHER AIR CLEANER
4-48
FLUID LEVEL COMPARTMENT
CLIMATE CONTROL-
CHECK BOLTS/TORQUE
A/C SYSTEM
4—7
4.4 FLUIDS AND FILTERS
The following charts list all the necessary lubricants, oils, greases, fuels, coolants and filters required for the KOBELCO
SK330(LC)-6E and SK330NLC-6E hydraulic excavators. Also a chart is provided giving specific information for the
proper lubricants, oils, greases, fuels and coolants to be used in certain climates. Contact KOBELCO distributor to
order the required filters, fluids and lubricants.
A. REQUIRED FLUIDS AND QUANTITIES B. REQUIRED FILTERS
TYPE OF QUANTITIES LOCATION

LOCATION OF USE SYSTEM PART NUMBER
FLUID REQUIRED OF FILTER USE
RETURN FILTER
206 Liters ELEMENT KIT (STD)
HYDRAULIC TANK
(54 GAL) Applicable No. : YN50V00004F3
HYDRAULIC LC08-06201~06322
351Liters YC08-03001~03087
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
(93 GAL) RETURN FILTER
ELEMENT KIT (BREAKER)
ENGINE OIL PAN 28 Liters Applicable No. : YN50V00004F4
(H LEVEL) (7.4 GAL) LC08-06201~06322
YC08-03001~03087
ENGINE OIL PAN 23 Liters RETURN FILTER ELEMENT
(L LEVEL) (6.1 GAL) HYDRAULIC KIT (STD & BREAKER)
Applicable No. : YN52V01008R100
100cc X 4 LC09-06323~
UPPER ROLLER YC09-03088~
(6.1cu.in X 4)
ENGINE OIL TANK SUCTION
430cc X 14 LC50V00001F1
STRAINER
(26cu.in) X 14 TANK BREATHER
LOWER ROLLER YN57V00002S010
430cc X 18 FILTER ELEMENT
(26cu.in) X 18···LC,NLC
PILOT LINE FILTER
350cc X 2 YN50V01001S005
IDLER ELEMENT
(21.4cu.in X 2) ENGINE OIL FILTER
*ME130968
SWING MOTOR 21.5 Liter CARTRIDGE
REDUCTION UNIT (5.7 GAL) AIR CLEANER
GEAR OIL ENGINE LC11P00002S002
TRAVEL MOTOR 10.5 Liter X 2 INNER ELEMENT
REDUCTION UNIT (2.8 GAL X 2) AIR CLEANER
EZ11P00003S002
OUTER ELEMENT
OPERATING "U" JOINT
LEVER JOINT EACH SIDE ENGINE FUEL FILTER
*ME056670
CARTRIDGE
FUEL
ATTACHMENT PINS 16 PLACES ENGINE FEED PUMP
EP GREASE GAUZE FILTER
1 PLACE AIR-CON FILTER
SLEWING RING GEAR YN50V01006P1
90˚ X 4 OPERATOR (OUTER)
TRACK TENSION 2 PLACES CAB AIR-CON FILTER
YT20M00004S050
ADJUSTMENT AS REQ'D (INNER)
WITH LITHIUM * Available from an authorized MMC dealer only.
SWING GEAR 15.7 kg
BASE MoS2
SUMP (BATH) (34.6 lbs)
GREASE
15 Liters C. KOBELCO (BRAND) FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS
RADIATOR
ENGINE (4 GAL)
COOLANT COOLING SYSTEM 34 Liters PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION
TOTAL VOLUME (9 GAL) KSP1000-1001 ENGINE OIL-SAE 15W/40 (1 GALLON)
KSP1000-1005 ENGINE OIL-SAE 15W/40 (5 GALLON)
560 Liters
DIESEL FUEL FUEL TANK KSP1000-1055 ENGINE OIL-SAE 15W/40 (55 GALLON)
(148 GAL)
KSP1000-2005 HYDRAULIC OIL-AW 46 (5 GALLON)
KSP1000-2055 HYDRAULIC OIL-AW 46 (55 GALLON)
KSP1000-4014 GREASE EP/2-14 OUNCE
KSP1000-4035 GREASE EP/2-35 POUNDS
KSP1000-120 GREASE EP/2-120 POUNDS
KSP1000-3035 GEAR OIL 80W90-5 GALLONS
4—8
D. LUBRICANT SPECIFICATIONS
The following information is designed to allow usage of the proper oils, greases, fuels and coolants in various cli-
mates and certain working conditions.
LUBRICANT CLIMATE ZONE

HYDRAULIC OIL FRIGID FRIGID FRIGID~WARM WARM VERY HOT
(ANTI-WEAR, ANTIOXIDANT -30˚C~15˚C -20˚C~30˚C -25˚C~40˚C -5˚C~40˚C 5˚C~55˚C
AND NON-FOAMING) (-22˚F~59˚F) (-4˚F~86˚F) (-13˚F~104˚F) (23˚F~104˚F) (41˚F~131˚F)
*Note:Machines are shipped from factory
with SHELL TELLUS 32S hydraulic oil ISO VG22 ISO VG32 ISO VG32S* ISO VG46 ISO VG68

ENGINE OIL* FRIGID WARM VERY HOT
A.P.I. CLASSIFICATION FOR "SERVICE CD" -30˚C~30˚C -5˚C~40˚C 30˚C and Above
*ALL ENGINES SHIPPED FROM FACTORY (-22˚F~86˚F) (23˚F~104˚F) (86˚F and Above)
WITH SAE30 OR SAE15W40 OIL
ACCORDING TO AMBIENT
TEMPERATURE IN ENGINE OIL PAN. SAE10W30 SAE15W40 SAE15W50

FRIGID WARM VERY HOT
-15˚C~-25˚C -5˚C~-15˚C -5˚C and Above
FUEL (5˚F~-13˚F) (23˚F~5˚F) (23˚F and Above)
WINTERIZED
ASTM D975 No.1 ASTM D975 No.2 ASTM D975 No.2
LUBRICANT
FOR ROLLERS AND IDLERS ON ALL MODELS.
ENGINE OIL A.P.I. Classification for "Service CD"-SAE30
(FOR GENERAL PURPOSE LUBRICATION)
LUBRICANT FOR SWING MOTOR REDUCTION UNIT AND TRAVEL MOTOR REDUCTION
UNITS ON THE FOLLOWING MODELS : SK330(LC)-6E, SK330NLC-6E
GEAR OIL EXTREME PRESSURE GEAR OIL #90
GRADE GL-4 BY A.P.I. CLASSIFICATION
LUBRICANT GENERAL LUBRICATION SWING GEAR SUMP (BATH)

EXTREME PRESSURE MULTIPURPOSE
N.L.G.I. No.2 LITHIUM BASE WITH
GREASE GREASE No.2
MoS2 GREASE
EP TYPE GREASE
LUBRICANT ANTIFREEZE (LLC)

-34˚C (-29.2˚F)
ENGINE COOLANT MIXTURE RATIO SHOULD PROSPECT TO 5˚C (9˚F) LOWER THAN THE
(50% MIXTURE)-EU COLDEST TEMPERATURE THE MACHINE WILL EXPERIENCE. TAKE INTO
(30% MIXTURE)-OCEANIA CONSIDERATION WIND CHILL FACTORS.
NOTE: USE OF BIO-DEGRADABLE OILS

When you use Bio-degradable Oil (BIO OIL), refer to the following information.
1. There are two types of BIO OIL available; vegetable-based and synthetic-based. You are recommended to use the
synthetic-based type, because the vegetable-based oil has a maximum usage temperature of 80˚C (176˚F). Because
of this, the degradation of vegetable-based oil occurs more rapidly, and caused reduced service life.
2. Do not mix either type of BIO OIL with the original factory-filled mineral oil. The hydraulic system has to be flushed
three times if you want to use BIO OIL instead of the factory-filled mineral oil.
3. If you use BIO OIL, slewing and propel parking brake performance will be reduced, because of the lower friction factor
of BIO OIL compared to that of mineral oil.
4. For further information about recommended Bio-degradable oil, please contact KOBELCO distributor.
4—9
4.5 PRE-START(EVERY 8 HOURS) INSPEC-
TION & MAINTENANCE
The following procedures are to be performed every
8 hours or daily, before the machine is started.
ENGINE OIL
FILLER CAP
BE CAUTIOUS OF HOT FLUIDS AND SURFACES.
WEAR GOGGLES, SAFETY SHOES, HARD HAT, ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK
ON SIDE OF ENGINE
WORK CLOTHES AND WORK GLOVES TO PER-
FORM INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE ON THIS
MACHINE.
H
A. ENGINE OIL LEVEL
L
1. Raise engine bonnet.
BETWEEN
LOW & HIGH
2. Locate and pull engine dipstick. Clean it with a clean, IS 5 LITER
dry, lint free cloth. Reinsert into engine. Pull out and
visually inspect the engine oil level on dipstick. See
Figure 4.15. FIGURE 4.15
3. If necessary to add oil, remove Oil filler cap and fill

engine oil to proper level. See Figure 4.15 and refer
to page 4-8 for oil specifications.
ENGINE COOLANT
RESERVOIR
NOTE
After adding oil, check oil level again, replace oil filler cap,
replace dipstick and close engine cover.
FULL
PROPER
LEVEL
B. ENGINE COOLANT LEVEL
LOW
1. Open engine access cover and inspect coolant level
in engine coolant reservoir. See Figure 4.16.
FIGURE 4.16
2. Proper coolant level is between “FULL” and “LOW”
marks. See Figure 4.16.
3. If necessary to add coolant, remove reservoir cap RADIATOR CAP

and fill to proper level with fresh coolant. See Figure
4.16 and refer to page 4-8 for proper coolant specifi-
cations.
4. If no coolant is in reservoir, check coolant level in

radiator. Fill radiator with proper coolant mixture and
replace cap. See Figure 4.17. Then fill reservoir to
proper level.
NEVER REMOVE RADIATOR CAP WHEN ENGINE DO NOT REMOVE WHEN ENGINE IS HOT
IS HOT. ALLOW ENGINE TO COOL BEFORE RE- FIGURE 4.17
MOVING RADIATOR CAP.
4 — 10
C. ENGINE FLUID LEAKS
USE CARDBOARD TO CHECK
FOR PRESSURE LEAKS
1. Inspect complete engine for signs of fluid leaks.
2. When inspecting around pressure lines and hoses

use a stiff piece of cardboard. See Figure 4.18.
Never use hands to check for leaks. High pressure fluid

leaks will penetrate the skin and cause severe injury.
FIGURE 4.18
D. FAN BELT WEAR AND TENSION

Inspect belt tensioner assembly on a new machine af- ALTERNATOR FAN PULLEY
ter the first 50 hours of operation. Then at every 250

hours of engine operation.
1. Measure belt tension on longest span of belt. Belt

deflection should be 8mm ~ 15mm.
BELT DEFLECTION Force : approx.

98N (22lbf, 10kgf)
Fan belt 8 mm ~ 15 mm (0.3˝ ~ 0.6˝)
Air conditioner 7 mm ~ 10 mm (0.3˝ ~ 0.4˝)
2. Loosen mounting nut and adjusting nut, and adjust

tension of belt. See Figure 4.20.
CRANK PULLEY COMPRESSOR
FIGURE 4.19
3. Loosen adjusting bolt, adjust fan belt to the speci- ADJUSTING BOLT MOUNTING NUT
fied tension, and tighten mounting nut and adjusting 8.4 ± 1.0 kgf·m
nut. See Figure 4.20. (61 ± 7 lbf·ft)
4. After adjustment, rotate engine at low idling for about

5 minutes, then check the tension of belt.
5. Adjust the tension of belt of air conditioner turning

adjusting bolt of idle pulley. Figure 4.20.
NOTE
When moving the alternator, try not to damage the stater ADJUSTING NUT
coil section between the front and rear brackets or the 7.7 ± 1.5 kgf·m Force : approx.
(56 ± 11 lbf·ft)
bolts. 98N (22lbf, 10kgf)
FIGURE 4.20
4 — 11
E. AIR CLEANER
9 REST'D AIR
CLEANER
Wear protective glasses or goggles when using com-

pressed air.
NOTE
• The air restriction indicator will not signal if the element is FIGURE 4.21
torn or if the air cleaner compartment is not sealed prop-
erly. If “REST’D AIR CLEANER” icon is displayed, as in-
dicated in Figure 4.21, inspect, clean, and/or replace the
air cleaner elements.
• The removal and cleaning of inner element are not al-
lowed. It may cause engine trouble due to the entry of
dust.
.• When replacing element, cover the engine intake port
to prevent it from the entry of dust.
ENGINE AIR CLEANER
ACCESS DOOR
Cleaning and replacement of outer element.
FIGURE 4.22
Cleaning .......... When warning is indicated on multidisplay
Replacement ... After cleaning of 6th time or an elapse of
1 year
WING NUT
1. Cleaning or Replacement of Outer Element
a. Open engine air cleaner access door with starter

GEAR OIL CAN
switch key. See Figure 4.22
COVER
b. Loosen the wing nut, remove the cover. See Fig-
ure 4.23.
c. Loosen the wing nut, and then pull out the outer
element. See Figure 4.24. FIGURE 4.23
d. Clean the inside of air cleaner housing.
e. To clean the outer element, blow compressed air

{less than 7 kgf/cm2 (100 psi)} up and down along
the folds of the filter element interior to remove OUTER ELEMENT
clogged dust or other contaminants. See Figure
4.25.
GEAR OIL CAN
f . After cleaning, use a light to check the inside of WING NUT
the element for tearing, pinholes, or packing dam-
age. Replace with a new element if necessary.
FIGURE 4.24
4 — 12
g. Set outer element, and install cover.
h. If the restricted icon appears on the multi display

within the 6 times cleaning of outer element, re-
place the element with new one.
FIGURE 4.25
2. Replacement of Inner Elements
a. Loosen the wing nut, remove the inner element.

See Figure 4.26.
WING NUT
b. Set new inner and outer elements, and install the
cover.
GEAR OIL CAN
NOTE INNER ELEMENT
For machines equipped with W (double) element and the
inner element must be replaced together with the outer
element. Don’t fail to replace the inner element with new
one. See Figure 4.24 and 4.26.
FIGURE 4.26
F . ENGINE ELECTRICAL
NEGATIVE (-) CABLE
1. Visually and manually inspect all engine electrical
wiring, connectors and components for signs of dam-
age and malfunction. See Figure 4.27.
2. Repair or replace all damaged or malfunctioning wir-

ing, connectors and components before resuming
operation of the machine.
REMOVE CELL CAPS
OPERATING THE MACHINE WITH DAMAGED OR

FIGURE 4.27
MALFUNCTIONING ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
CAN CAUSE SERIOUS DAMAGE TO THE MACHINE
AND SERIOUS INJURY TO PERSONNEL. REPAIR
OR REPLACE FAULTY COMPONENTS IMMEDI-
ATELY.
4 — 13
G. FUEL LEVEL
1. Right hand fuel tank side and view the fuel level
gauge on side of fuel tank. See Figure 4.28.
2. The fuel tank can be filled through the fuel filler cap
located on top of the fuel tank or by using the auxil-
iary fuel pump located the Battery access cover in
side.
a. Filling tank through fuel filler cap

Open fuel filler cap with key switch key and fill tank FUEL LEVEL GAUGE
to proper level with diesel fuel. See Figure 4.29

and refer to page 4-8 for fuel specifications.
b. Filling tank using auxiliary fuel pump (EU spec.) FIGURE 4.28
1. Open battery access cover, remove the filter end
of the fuel pump suction hose from its storage
housing and insert the fuel suction hose into fuel
FUEL PUMP
supply reservoir. See Figure 4.29. SUCTION HOSE
2. Locate the auxillary fuel pump switch inside the
storage box access door. Place the switch in the
“ON” position. See Figure 4.30. Place pump switch
in the “OFF” position when fuel tank is full.
NOTE
Delivery rate of the auxiliary fuel pump is 30 liters per
minute (7.9 U.S. Gal per minute).
• Do not pump petrol on products with flashpoints below
37°C (98.6°F).
• Do not run dry for more than 30 seconds.
FIGURE 4.29
3. After removing fuel delivery hose from fuel sup-

ply reservoir, coil hose and place filter into its stor-
age housing. Replace fuel strainer and fuel filler
cap.
NOTE
• The suction head of fuel pump is approx. 2.5 m (7.5
feet) locate the fuel drum as near as possible to the
machine.
FUEL PUMP
• After the switch is turned ON, if the fuel pump does not SWITCH
FUEL PUMP
actuate, check the fuse in the fuse box for possible dam- SWITCH
age. The fuse is 15 A (tubular fuse). Applicable No. : Applicable No. :
LC08-06201~06294 LC08-06295~
YC08-03001~03070 YC08-03071~
NOTE FIGURE 4.30

The capacity of fuel pump was changed to 50 Liter/min
after serial No. LC08-06295~, YC08-03071~.
4 — 14
H. HYDRAULIC OIL LEVEL
1. Place the machine in the oil check position on a firm
surface as shown in Figure 4.31.
FIGURE 4.31
2. Right hand hydraulic oil tank access cover and view

the hydraulic oil level in the sight glass on side of
hydraulic oil tank. See Figure 4.32.
FOR SAFE OPERATION ON INCLINES, THE HY-

DRAULIC OIL LEVEL MUST BE MAINTAINED BE- UPPER LIMIT
TWEEN “PROPER LEVEL” AND “UPPER LIMIT”
PROPER LEVEL
MARK.
LOW (ADD OIL)
FIGURE 4.32
3. Use the following instructions to add hydraulic oil :

DEPRESS RUBBER CAP
a. Release hydraulic tank pressure. See Figure 4.33. TO RELEASE PRESSURE
Gasses from hydraulic tank may be hot. Wear safety

equipment.
b. Remove the six mounting bolts from the hydraulic

HYDRAULIC TANK
suction screen cover plate. See Figure 4.34.
FIGURE 4.33
c. Add hydraulic oil through the suction screen, filling
hydraulic tank to the proper level. See Figure 4.34.
REPLACE "O"-RING
d. Before replacing filter cover, replace “O”-ring. Or- PART No. ZD11G20000
der KOBELCO part number ZD11G20000. See Fig- SLOWLY REMOVE
BOLTS & COVER
ure 4.34.
e. Place new “O”-ring in seat. Place cover over open-

ing and install mounting bolts with lockwashers.
f . Torque mounting bolts to proper value. Refer to

torque specifications table.
ADD CLEAN OIL
CLEAN UP ALL SPILLED OIL TO PREVENT FIRES.

DISPOSE OF HAZARDOUS WASTE ACCORDING
FIGURE 4.34
TO ENVIRONMENTAL LAWS AND REGULATIONS.
4 — 15
I . HYDRAULIC FUNCTIONS
CHECK ALL CONTROLS
FOR PROPER FUNCTION
1. Check all hydraulic controls for proper function be-
fore operating the machine. See Figure 4.35.
NEVER OPERATE THE MACHINE WITH A FAULTY

CONTROL OR FUNCTION. MAKE ALL NECESSARY
REPAIRS BEFORE ALLOWING ANY OPERATION.
J . HYDRAULIC OIL LEAKS FIGURE 4.35
1. Check complete hydraulic system for leaks. Use a USE CARDBOARD TO CHECK
small piece of cardboard when checking areas with FOR PRESSURE LEAKS
high pressure. See Figure 4.36.
Never use hands to check for leaks. High pressure fluid

leaks will penetrate the skin and cause severe injury.
2. Check all hoses and lines for signs of damage.
3. Repair or replace damaged hoses and lines before

allowing any operation.
FIGURE 4.36
CLEAN UP ALL SPILLED OIL TO PREVENT FIRES. CHECK AND REPLACE

DISPOSE OF HAZARDOUS WASTE ACCORDING ANY BROKEN WIRES
TO ENVIRONMENTAL LAWS AND REGULATIONS.
K. MACHINE ELECTRICAL
1. Check all switches for proper operation.

CHECK ALL GAUGES AND LCD DISPLAY
2. Visually check all wiring and connectors for signs of
damage, corrosion etc..
3. Repair or replace all damaged or faulty electrical

components before allowing any operation of the
machine.
4. Check all gauges and LCD display on the gauge clus-

ter panel for proper operation. See Figure 4.37.
DAMAGED OR FAULTY ELECTRICAL COMPO-

NENTS CAN CAUSE SEVERE DAMAGE TO THE
MACHINE AND CAUSE SERIOUS PERSONAL IN-
JURY OR DEATH.
FIGURE 4.37
4 — 16
L . STEPS AND HANDRAILS
KEEP STEP CLEAN AND
IN GOOD CONDITION
1. Carefully inspect all mounting steps and handrails
on the machine to make sure they are clean and in
safe working condition. See Figure 4.38.
2. Repair or replace all areas before allowing any op-

eration of the machine.
USE GRIP BARS

Use steps, and handrails when mounting and dismount- AND STEP RAILS
ing the machine. Keep steps, handrails and step rails
clean and in safe working condition. FIGURE 4.38
M. FRAME STRUCTURE
1. Carefully inspect the entire frame structure for signs

of damage, broken welds etc..
DISCONNECT BATTERY
2. Repair or replace all frame components found to be INSPECTING ELECTRICAL
damaged before allowing any operation of the ma- OR WELDING
chine.
3. In cases where welding repair is required, consult

KOBELCO distributor for proper procedures concern-
FIGURE 4.39
ing weld repairs. Use only certified welding person-
nel familiar with structural welding methods to per-
form repairs requiring welding.
DISCONNECT BATTERIES BEFORE WELDING ON CHECK FOR BEND

THIS MACHINE. SEE FIGURE 4.39. CONNECT
WELDER GROUND CABLE 1M (3´-3˝) AWAY FROM
AREA TO BE WELDED.
CHECK SHOE WEAR
N. TRACKS AND COMPONENTS
1. Track shoes FIGURE 4.40
a. Visually inspect track shoes for signs of excessive

wear or damage. See Figure 4.40.
b. Have all repair or replacement work done by

KOBELCO distributor.
c. Check tightness of shoe attaching bolts and nuts. TORQUE

BOLTS
If loose, torque to 120 ± 12 kgf·m (867 ± 87 lbf·ft).
See Figure 4.41.
FIGURE 4.41
4 — 17
2. Track links
a. Inspect links for signs of excessive wear or dam-

age. See Figure 4.42.
b. Have all repair or replacement work done by INSPECT TRACK LINK

KOBELCO distributor. ASSEMBLIES
FIGURE 4.42
3. Sprockets
INSPECT THESE BOLTS
a. Inspect sprockets for excessive wear and damage.

See Figure 4.43.
b. Should the sprockets require service, contact

c. Check and make sure all sprocket bolts are prop-

erly tightened.
INSPECT THESE SURFACES
FIGURE 4.43
4. Idlers
a. Inspect idlers for excessive wear and damage. See

Figure 4.44.
b. Should the idlers require service, contact KOBELCO

distributor.
FIGURE 4.44
5. Rollers
LOWER ROLLER UPPER ROLLER
a. Inspect rollers for excessive wear and damage. See INSPECT THESE SURFACES
Figure 4.45.
b. Should the rollers require service, contact KOBELCO

distributor.
FIGURE 4.45
4 — 18
O. TRACK TENSION
MACHINE
POSITION
1. Operate swing, arm, bucket and boom controls until
machine is set up as shown in Figure 4.46.
SUPPORT LOWER FRAME WITH SUITABLE BLOCKS.
2. In center of track, measure the distance between the

bottom of frame rails and surface of shoe. See Fig-
ure 4.47.
FIGURE 4.46
3. Perform steps 1 and 2 on right track.
4. To increase track tension, set machine as shown in

Figure 4.46 and with grease gun inject extreme pres-
sure No.2 grease into idler adjustment grease nipple
until proper tension is reached. See Figure 4.48. Per-
form this procedure on both tracks.
NOTE 320 ~ 350 mm

After injecting grease, operate the travel control forward (12.6"~13.8")
and reverse for the track being adjusted. This will balance
the tension between the idler and the sprocket. Then re-
measure as shown in Figure 4.47.
5. To decrease track tension, set machine up as shown FIGURE 4.47

in Figure 4.46.
6. Carefully loosen the adjusting grease nipple to allow

grease to escape. See Figure 4.48.
GREASE IN TRACK TENSIONING MECHANISM IS

UNDER EXTREME PRESSURE AND CAN PEN-
ETRATE SKIN CAUSING SEVERE INJURY. KEEP
FACE AND BODY AWAY FROM GREASE NIPPLE TRACK ADJUSTING
AREA. NEVER LOOSEN GREASE NIPPLE MORE GREASE NIPPLE
THAN ONE COMPLETE TURN. IF GREASE DOES
NOT RELEASE AFTER ONE TURN OF THE NIPPLE,
CALL AN AUTHORIZED KOBELCO SERVICE
DEALER FOR ASSISTANCE.
FIGURE 4.48
7. Tighten grease nipple, measure track tension as

shown in Figure 4.48.
8. If necessary, perform steps 5 through 7 on other track.
4 — 19
P. BOOM AND ARM
1. Inspect boom and arm structures for signs of exces-

sive wear and damage. See Figure 4.49.
2. Should repair or replacement be necessary, contact

INSPECT BOOM &

ARM FOR DAMAGE
FIGURE 4.49
DISCONNECT BATTERIES BEFORE WELDING ON

THIS MACHINE. SEE FIGURE 4.50. CONNECT
WELDER GROUND CABLE 1M (3´-3˝) AWAY FROM DISCONNECT BATTERY
AREA TO BE WELDED.
INSPECTING ELECTRICAL
OR WELDING
FIGURE 4.50
Q. CUTTING EDGE, BUCKET TEETH & SIDE CUTTERS
1. Inspect bucket teeth and side cutters for signs of

excessive wear and damage. See Figure 4.51. INSPECT TEETH AND SIDE
CUTTERS FOR DAMAGE
2. Should repair or replacement be required, follow
bucket manufacturers recommendations.
Wear goggles, safety shoes, hard hat, work clothes

and work gloves to perform inspection and maintenance
on this machine.
FIGURE 4.51
3. Should repair or replacement be required, contact

KOBELCO distributor for proper advice.
4 — 20
4.6 50 HOUR (WEEKLY) & NEW MACHINE
BREAK-IN INSPECTION & MAINTENANCE LOOSEN BOLTS
PROCEDURES TO LOWER COVER
Change the engine oil and filter on a new machine

after the first 50 hours of operation. Then change
the engine oil at every 500 hours of operation.
NOTE
One new oil filter is shipped with the machine in the sup-
port kit. This is to be used at the 50 hour oil & filter change.
REMOVE BOLTS AND
LOWER COVER
A. ENGINE OIL AND FILTER ELEMENT

1. Move the machine to a firm, level surface and run
engine for 5 minutes to warm the oil. FIGURE 4.52
DO NOT CHANGE OIL ON A MACHINE THAT HAS

JUST STOPPED WORKING. THE OIL WILL BE EX-
TREMELY HOT. ALLOW THE ENGINE TO COOL
UNTIL OIL IS JUST WARM BEFORE CHANGING.
ENGINE
OIL FILTER
NOTE
• Check the waste oil. If there are metal chips or powder
mixed in the oil, contact KOBELCO distributor.
• The oil filter can not be reused because it is cartridge type.
FIGURE 4.53
2. Remove the four mounting bolts from the engine
lower cover plates. See Figure 4.52.
3. Place the oil container under the filter.
APPLY CLEAN ENGINE OIL
4. Remove the oil filter by turning counterclockwise. See
Figure 4.53.
5. To install the oil filter, apply a thin coat of engine oil
to the gasket of the oil filter, and then secure the
filter by tightening prescribed number of rotations
after the gasket comes in contact with the oil filter
head. See Figure 4.54.
6. When replacing the element only, and not the en-
gine oil, the amount of oil to be added is shown be-
low. FIGURE 4.54
Partially fill filter with oil before installing.
Oil volume ...... Approx. 1.1 Lit (0.29 GAL)
7. Start engine, operate it at idling operation for sev-
eral minutes. Then check filter fitting section for oil
leakage.
8. Install cover just below the engine to the regular po-
sition.
4 — 21
B. ENGINE OIL
LOOSEN BOLTS
1. Move the machine to a firm, level surface and run TO LOWER COVER
engine for 5 minutes to warm the oil.
DO NOT CHANGE OIL ON A MACHINE THAT HAS

JUST STOPPED WORKING. THE OIL WILL BE EX-
TREMELY HOT. ALLOW THE ENGINE TO COOL
UNTIL OIL IS JUST WARM BEFORE CHANGING.
REMOVE BOLTS AND
LOWER COVER
2. Remove the six retaining bolts from the oil pan ac-
cess cover on the bottom, rear center of machine.
See Figure 4.55. FIGURE 4.55
3. Raise engine bonnet and remove oil filler cap. See

Figure 4.56.
4. Place a 30 liter (7.9 Gal) capacity container under oil

pan. Remove engine oil drain plug. See Figure 4.57.
5. Install engine oil drain plug. ENGINE OIL

FILLER CAP
6. Refer to page 4-8 for the proper oil to use and fill
engine oil to proper level. ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK
ON SIDE OF ENGINE
• Total oil volume to be replaced
SK330(LC)-6E, SK330NLC-6E : 28 liters (7.4Gal)
7. Install oil filler cap. Clean up all spilled oil.
8. Start engine, run for 5 minutes. While running, check H

for oil leaks.
L
9. Should any oil leaks be found, repair immediately
BETWEEN
and refill with proper oil. LOW & HIGH
IS 5 LITER
10. Check oil level and close cover.
FIGURE 4.56

government environmental regulation.

Do not over tighten at install plug standard tightening
torque = 5~8 kgf·m. (After tightening by hand, tighten ENGINE OIL
DRAIN PLUG
with ratchet wrench at angle of 15~30°.)
standard tool : l = 250 mm middle type ratchet wrench
FIGURE 4.57
4 — 22
C. FUEL TANK DRAIN
1. Locate and open fuel tank drain valve on bottom of

fuel tank. See Figure 4.58.
2. Allow all water and sediment to drain from fuel tank

into a waste container, then close the drain valve.
FIGURE 4.58
D. WATER SEPARATOR
The water separator isolates water that mixes in with AIR PLUG
the fuel. The case is equipped with a float. When wa-
ter accumulates, the float rises. When the float rises to
WATER SEPARATOR
the level line, drain the water. See Figure 4.59.
1. Loosen the drain plug to drain the water.
2. When the float comes down to the bottom, close the

drain plug. LEVEL LINE
3. Check that fuel is not leaking. FLOAT (RED)

Drain water whenever the float rises to the level line,
regardless of inspection time. DRAIN PLUG
FIGURE 4.59
Clean up all spilled fuel to avoid a fire.

govemment environmental regulation, laws and codes.
E . AIR INTAKE SYSTEM

Inspect all hoses and clamps of the air intake system
on a new machine after the first 50 hours of operation.
Then at every 500 hours of engine operation.
HOSE & CLAMPS
1. Inspect all hoses for damage and tighten all hose FROM AIR CLEANER
clamps. See Figure 4.60. HOUSING
2. Replace any hose found to be damaged before al-

lowing any operation of the machine.
FIGURE 4.60
4 — 23
F . RADIATOR, OIL COOLER AND DEBRIS SCREEN
ENGINE COOLANT
1. Clean radiator after every 50 hours of operation us- TANK ACCESS DOOR
ing pressurized water.
Do not use pressure washer as it will bend the radia-

tor fins. Use standard water pressure.
RADIATOR SUB TANK
2. Open engine air cleaner access door and engine bon- ENGINE AIR CLEANER ACCESS DOOR
ACCESS DOOR
net for cleaning the radiator and oil cooler. See Fig-
ure 4.61. FIGURE 4.61
3. Open engine bonnet and remove the wing bolts re-

ENGINE BONNET
taining the debris screen. See Figure 4.62. Carefully
remove debris screen and clean with pressurized
water.
ENGINE RADIATOR
ACCESS DOOR
FIGURE 4.62
4. Remove wash out access cover from bottom of ma-

OIL COOLER
chine. See Figure 4.63.
5. Rinse all dirt and debris from engine compartment.

Reinstall debris screen and wash out access cover.
Be careful not to bend or damage cooling fins of the

radiator or oil cooler. Replace debris screen if damage
A/C CONDENSER
is found. Repair damaged cooling fins of radiator and
oil cooler.
FIGURE 4.63
NOTE DEBRIS SCREEN

WASH OUT COVER
To remove or install the screen, remove three wing bolts
on the upper section of radiator, and pull out the screen
on the front side then pull the rear screen frontward and
remove. After cleaning it, install it by the reverse proce-
dure.
REMOVE BOLTS
FIGURE 4.64
4 — 24
G. HYDRAULIC RETURN FILTERS
(Applicable No. LC08-06201~06322, YC08-03001~03087) DEPRESS RUBBER CAP
TO RELEASE PRESSURE
Change the hydraulic tank return filter on a new ma-
chine after the first 50 hours of engine operation then
change every 500 hours.
NOTE
One new hydraulic return filter is shipped with the ma-
chine in the support kit. This is to be used at the 50 hours
filter change. HYDRAULIC TANK
Move machine to firm leveled ground and place attach-
FIGURE 4.65
ment in oil level check position.
1. Release hydraulic tank pressure. See Figure 4.65.

THAT HAS JUST FINISHED WORKING. ALLOW MA-
CHINE TO COOL FIRST UNTIL OILS AND FLUIDS
ARE WARM NOT HOT. RELEASE HYDRAULIC
TANK PRESSURE BEFORE WORKING WITH ANY
HYDRAULIC COMPONENT. SLOWLY REMOVE
BOLTS & COVER
2. Remove the six mounting bolts from the hydraulic FIGURE 4.66
return cover plate. See Figure 4.66.
BOLT
Slowly remove the mounting bolts. The filter cover plate COVER
SPRING
is under spring tension. WASHER
O-RING
3. Remove “O”-rings, filter springs and bypass valves.

SPRING
See Figure 4.67.
4. Remove the filter from the housing. See Figure 4.67. BYPASS VALVE
5. Install new filter, bypass valve and spring into hous-

ing.
FILTER
6. Install new “O”-ring, KOBELCO part number

ZD11G20000.
Lubricate “O”-ring befor installing.
7. Install cover plates and torque attaching bolts to

proper value. Refer to specifications section for
torque value.
Applicable No. :
LC08-06201~06322
YC08-03001~03087
Applicable machines No. LC09-06323~, YC09-03088~ are
equipped with long-life return filter. For the return filter re- FIGURE 4.67
placement procedure, see page 4-26.
4 — 25
H. HYDRAULIC RETURN FILTERS
(Applicable No. LC09-06323~, YC09-03088~) DEPRESS RUBBER CAP
TO RELEASE PRESSURE
Change the hydraulic tank return filter on a new ma-
change every 1,000 hours.
NOTE
One new hydraulic return filter is shipped with the ma-
chine in the support kit. This is to be used at the 50 hours
filter change. HYDRAULIC TANK
Move machine to firm leveled ground and place attach-
FIGURE 4.65A
ment in oil level check position.
1. Release hydraulic tank pressure. See Figure 4.65A.

CHINE TO COOL FIRST UNTIL OILS AND FLUIDS
ARE WARM NOT HOT. RELEASE HYDRAULIC
SLOWLY REMOVE
TANK PRESSURE BEFORE WORKING WITH ANY BOLTS & COVER
HYDRAULIC COMPONENT.
FIGURE 4.66A
2. Remove the six mounting bolts (1) and spring washer
(2) from the hydraulic return cover (3). See Figure
4.67A. (1)
(4)
(2)
(3)
Slowly remove the mounting bolts. The filter cover plate (B)
is under spring tension.
(C) (5)
3. Remove “O”-ring (5) and spring (4). See Figure 4.67A.
ELEMENT
(D) (5)
4. Disassemble element assy (A) while turning the handle. ASSY
Disassembling parts ...... (B), (C), (D), (E), (F) (A) (C)
(E)
5. Replace “O”-ring (C) of check valve (B).
(F) (D)
6. Replace packing (F) of plate (E).
7. Replace element, and assemble element assy (A)

(F)
disassembled in procedure (4) again. Applicable No. : ELEMENT KIT
LC09-06323~ P/No. YN52V01008R100
8. Attach element in reverse procedure of the (3) and YC09-03088~
(4) above-mentioned.
FIGURE 4.67A
9. Install cover (3).
Tightening torque : 46.1 ± 4.9 N·m {4.7 ± 0.5 kgf·m}
NOTE
10. Start engine, put the machine on hydraulic oil level Long-life return filter is used.
check position while moving each operating lever, Place an order of return filter element kit,
and check hydraulic oil level. P/No. YN52V01008R100.
4 — 26
I . BATTERIES
Perform complete battery service on a new machine
after the first 50 hours of engine operation.
Then, check electrolyte (acid) every 50 hours.
1. WEAR SAFETY CLOTHES, GOGGLES OR FACE

SHIELD, GLOVES AND SAFETY SHOES WHEN
WORKING WITH BATTERIES.
2. WORK IN A WELL VENTILATED AREA.
3. BATTERY ELECTROLYTE (ACID) IS CORROSIVE.
IF IT COMES IN CONTACT WITH SKIN, EYES OR
CLOTHING, FLUSH WITH LARGE AMOUNTS OF
WATER AND SEEK IMMEDIATE MEDICAL AT-
FIGURE 4.68
TENTION. SEE FIGURE 4.68.
4. BATTERY ELECTROLYTE (ACID) PRODUCES
HYDROGEN GAS THAT IS HIGHLY EXPLOSIVE.
DO NOT ALLOW NEAR SPARKS, FIRE OR
FLAMES AND DO NOT SMOKE WHEN WORK-
ING WITH BATTERIES. SEE FIGURE 4.68.
1. Open battery box access cover. See Figure 4.69.

BATTERY BOX
2. Remove battery cell caps and visually inspect elec-
ACCESS COVER
trolyte (acid) level. Proper level is 10~15 mm (0.4˝ ~
0.6˝) above cell plates. See Figure 4.70.
3. If necessary, fill each cell to proper level with dis-

tilled water only.
4. Remove cables from terminals and clean with hot

water. Coat each terminal with a thin layer of petro-
leum jelly. Clean cables in the same manner and re-
install onto battery.
FIGURE 4.69
5. If cables are found to be in poor condition, replace
with new parts immediately.
NEGATIVE (-) CABLE

• Batteries give off hydrogen gasses that can ex-
plode and cause personal injury.
from batteries.
• Keep all ventilation caps tightly secured. REMOVE CELL CAPS
• Never check charge by placing metal articles

across battery terminals. FIGURE 4.70

when charging.
4 — 27
6. Use a hydrometer to check the specific gravity of
each cell. Compare readings to the chart below.
NOTE
Use hydrometer according to its manufacturer’s instruc- DISCONNECT BATTERY
tions. NEGATIVE (-) CABLE WHEN
. INSPECTING ELECTRICAL
OR WELDING
AMBIENT TEMPERATURE
CHARGE % 20°C 0°C -10°C
(68 F)
° (32 F)
° (14°F)
FIGURE 4.71
100 % 1.26 1.27 1.28
90 % 1.24 1.25 1.26
80 % 1.22 1.23 1.24
75 % 1.21 1.22 1.23
7. When disconnecting batteries, remove the negative

(–) cable first. When connecting batteries, connect
the negative (–) cable last. See Figure 4.71.
8. When the battery requires charging;
a. Disconnect battery cables from terminals.
b. Remove all cell caps.
c. Check for proper electrolyte (acid) level.
d. Connect charger leads to the proper battery termi-

nals.
Make certain not to cross positive and negative termi-

nals when connecting charger.
e. Stop charge if battery overheats.
f . Periodically check the specific gravity of the bat-

teries with a hydrometer. Stop charging batteries
when 100% charged.
NOTE
Battery life can be shortened by overdischarging and over
discharging of the battery. Replace any battery that will
not hold chrage or is difficult to charge.
4 — 28
J . ATTACHMENT LUBRICATION
Lubricate attachment pins every 50 hours of engine
operation. Use extreme pressure multi-purpose grease
No.2 EP type grease. Lubricate all points until grease
oozes.
1. Boom cylinder head pins. See Figure 4.72.
NOTE
If attachment is sank in water, it is recommended to lubri-
cate it every 8 hours. BOOM CYLINDER
HEAD PINS
FIGURE 4.72
2. Boom foot pin. See Figure 4.73.

BOOM CYLINDER
ROD ENDS
3. Boom cylinder rod pins. See Figure 4.73.
ARM CYLINDER
HEAD END
4. Arm cylinder head pin. See Figure 4.73.
BOOM FOOT PIN
BOOM FOOT PIN EACH END
(CENTER)
CENTRALIZED GREASE NIPPLES ON BOOM
FIGURE 4.73
5. Arm cylinder rod pin. See Figure 4.74.
6. Arm to boom pin. See Figure 4.74. BOOM
7. Bucket cylinder head pin. See Figure 4.74.

ARM TO BOOM
PIN
ARM CYLINDER
ROD END
ARM
BUCKET CYLINDER
HEAD PIN
FIGURE 4.74
8. Bucket link pins. See Figure 4.75. BUCKET CYLINDER IDLER LINK TO
ROD END ARM PIN
9. Idler link to arm pin and arm to bucket pin. See Fig-
ure 4.75.
10. Bucket cylinder rod pin. See Figure 4.75.
ARM TO
BUCKET PIN
TOP BUCKET
LINK PIN BOTTOM BUCKET
LINK PIN
FIGURE 4.75
4 — 29
4.7 120 HOUR INSPECTION & MAINTENANCE
PROCEDURE DIPSTICK
A. SWING MOTOR REDUCTION OIL FILL PLUG

Check the oil level of the swing motor reduction unit
on a new machine after the first 50 hours of engine
operation. Then check every 120 hours.
1. Locate the dipstick on the side of the swing motor.

See Figure 4.76. Pull dipstick, wipe clean and rein-
sert all the way in.
2. Pull dipstick and read oil level.

FIGURE 4.76
3. If necessary to add oil, remove plug from oil fill port
and fill to full level with proper oil. See Figure 4.76
and refer to page 4-8 for oil specifications.
Reduction unit may be under pressure.

Remove plug slowly.
4. To drain oil from swing motor reduction unit;
a. Locate drain port under rear of machine. See Fig-

ure 4.77. DRAIN PORT
b. Place a 25 liter (6.6 gallon) container under drain FIGURE 4.77

port and remove plug allowing oil to drain into con-
tainer.
Total Oil Volume
MODEL VOLUME
SK330(LC)-6E
21.5 Liter (5.7 Gal)
SK330NLC-6E
c. Replace plug and tighten securely after all oil is

drained.
d. Fill through fill port using proper oil. See Figure

4.76 and refer to page 4-8 for oil specifications.

MACHINE TO COOL FIRST UNTIL OILS AND
FLUIDS ARE WARM NOT HOT.
4 — 30
B. TRAVEL MOTORS REDUCTION OIL
Inspect oil level of travel motor reduction unit on a new FILL / LEVEL PLUG
machine after the first 50 hours of engine operation.
Then check every 120 hours.
1. Move machine to a firm, level surface. Operate travel

until “FILL / LEVEL” plugs on travel motors are at
top. See Figure 4.78.
2. Stop engine and remove the travel motor reduction

unit oil level plug. See Figure 4.78. If oil just seeps
from the port, oil level is correct.
DRAIN PLUG
FIGURE 4.78
TRAVEL REDUCTION UNIT COULD BE UNDER
PRESSURE. CAREFULLY LOOSEN PLUG AND RE-
MOVE SLOWLY TILL AIR PRESSURE IS RELEASED.
FILL / LEVEL PLUG

3. To add oil, remove the oil FILL / LEVEL plug and add
extreme pressure gear oil #90 grade GL-4 until oil
just begins to flow from check plug.
NOTE
Capacity of each travel motor reduction unit is 10.5 liters
(2.8 Gallons).
DRAIN PLUG
4. Replace all plugs and tighten securely.

FIGURE 4.79
4 — 31
4.8 250 HOUR (3-MONTH) INSPECTION & ALTERNATOR FAN PULLEY ADJUSTING BOLT
MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE
NOTE
Perform all pre-start (every 8 hour and 50 hour) inspec-
tion & maintenance procedures along with the following
120 hour inspection and maintenance procedures.
A. BELT TENSIONER (FAN & AIR CONDITIONER) Force : approx.

98N (22lbf, 10kgf)
Inspect belt tensioner assembly on a new machine af-
ter the first 50 hours of operation. Then at every 250
hours of engine operation.
1. Measure belt tention on longest span of belt. Belt

deflection should be 8 mm ~ 15 mm.
BELT DEFLECTION
CRANK PULLEY COMPRESSOR
Fan belt 8 mm ~ 15 mm (0.3˝ ~ 0.6˝)
FIGURE 4.80
Air conditioner 7 mm ~ 10 mm (0.3˝ ~ 0.4˝)
2. Loosen attaching nut and adjusting nut, and adjust

ADJUSTING BOLT ATTACHING NUT
tension of belt. See Figure 4.81.
8.4 ± 1.0 kgf·m
(61 ± 7 lbf·ft)
3. Loosen adjusting bolt, adjust fan belt to the speci-
fied tension, and tighten attaching nut and adjusting
nut. See Figure 4.81.
4. After adjustment, rotate engine at low idling for about

5 minutes, then check the tension of belt.
5. Adjust the tension of belt of air conditioner turning

adjusting bolt of idle pulley. See Figure 4.80.
ATTACHING NUT
FIGURE 4.81
4 — 32
B. AIR CONDITIONER FILTERS
SCREW SCREW REAR COVER SCREW
Cleaning recirculate and fresh air filters.
Recirculate air filter ... Every 500 hours
Fresh air filter ............ Every 250 hours
1. Cleaning Fresh Air Filter

a. Remove 4 machine screws of rear cover on the
rear side of operator seat, release the lock, and LOCK
remove the rear cover. See Figure 4.82. LOCK
b. Remove the fresh air filter.
NOTE
Water washing is not allowed to clean air filter because it REAR COVER
is paper filter. FIGURE 4.82
c. Cleaning about 10 times is allowed, or replace it

with new one every two years.
RECIRCULATE AIR
2. Cleaning Recirculate Air Filter FILTER
FRESH AIR
a. Raise recirculate air filter slightly, and pull it out. FILTER
b. Clean it with water or compressed air blow.
COVER
NOTE
Washing with organic solvent (gasoline, trichlene, thinner,
etc.) is strictly prohibited.
c. When frequently clogged, or damage is serious,

replace it with new one. MACHINE FRONT
d. After drying, set outside and recirculate air filters
and install cover. FIGURE 4.83
C. INSPECTING COUNTERWEIGHT ATTACHING BOLTS

FOR LOOSENING – FIGURE 4.84
Check bolts and nuts for loosening. Correct torque is
300 ± 30 kgf·m (2,167 ± 217 lbf·ft).
COUNTERWEIGHT
Striking counterweight against obstruction may cause ATTACHING BOLT
loosening of bolts. Check bolts for loosening after 50
hours the first time, and every 250 hours after that.
Unit : kgf·m (lbf·ft)

TORQUE SPECIFICATION
MODEL
(Apply Loctite #262) FIGURE 4.84
SK330(LC)-6E
300 ± 30 (2,167 ± 217)
SK330NLC-6E
4 — 33
PROCEDURES
NOTE
Perform all pre-start (every 8 hour and 50 hour) inspec-
tion & maintenance procedures along with the following APPLY CLEAN FUEL
250 hour inspection and maintenance procedures.
REMOVAL
A. FUEL FILTER
FILTER WRENCH
CLEAN UP ALL SPILLED FUEL.

FUEL OIL IS HIGHLY FLAMMABLE. SPILLED FUEL
CAN CAUSE FIRES.
EXTENSION BAR
1. Put the oil pan under the filter cartridge.
2. Set filter wrench, extension bar and ratchet handle
supplied with the machine and remove the fuel filter RATCHET HANDLE
turning it counterclockwise. See Figure 4.85.

FIGURE 4.85
NOTE
The fuel filter is cartridge type, and so cannot be reused.
3. Clean the filter base and apply clean fuel on the gas-
ket section of new fuel filter lightly.
4. Push it in until the filter gasket of fuel filter comes
into contact with the filter base by hand, and tighten
it with filter wrench 3/4 to 1 turn.
5. Start the engine and idle it several minutes, then
make sure that there is no leakage of fuel.
B. WATER PUMP BEARING LUBRICATION

Lubricate the water pump bearing on a new machine
after the first 50 hours of engine operation. Then check
and lubricate every 500 hours.
1. Open the engine bonnet, lock it open, and locate
grease nipple for the water pump bearing, in front of
the engine. See Figure 4.86.
2. Wipe all dust and mud off the grease nipple.
3. Use N.L.G.I. No. 2 (Lithium soap) wheel bearing
grease to lubricate the bearing.
4. Close engine bonnet.
FIGURE 4.86
NOTE
Do not over grease the water pump bearing. It only re-
quires about one shot of a manual grease gun, which is
equivalent to aprox. 6.1 cc. NEVER USE A PNEUMATIC
GREASE GUN.
4 — 34
C. BLEEDING AIR FROM THE FUEL SYSTEM
AIR PLUG
CLEAN UP ALL SPILLED FUEL. FUEL FILTER

FUEL OIL IS HIGHLY FLAMMABLE. SPILLED FUEL
CAN CAUSE FIRES.
If air contaminates the fuel system, the engine may

become hard to start or it malfunction. Bleed the air PRIMING PUMP
whenever the fuel tank is empty, the water separator
is drained, or the fuel filter element is replaced. See
Figure 4.87. KNOB
AIR PLUG
1. Loosen the knob of the priming pump.
2. Loosen the air plug of the fuel filter.
3. Moving the knob up and down by hand, supply fuel

until air bubbles stop issuing from the air plug.
NOTE
Cover the air plug with a cloth before performing this op-
eration. AIR PLUG
4. Tighten the air plug when the air bubbles stop issu-
ing from it.
5. Move the knob up and down a few times, then set it

in the down position and screw it in to secure it.
NOTE
Wipe away all spilled fuel before starting up the engine.
After engine has started, check for fuel leaks.
6. The air in the injection pump will automatically be

forced out when the engine starts.
TO UPPER RIGHT
FIGURE 4.87
4 — 35
D. GREASING THE SLEWING RING GREASING SWING
BEARING
1. EXTREME-PRESSURE.
MULTIPURPOSE GREASE.
1. Locate the grease nipple at the front of the slewing N.L.G. I No.2 LITHIUM BASE
GREASE EP TYPE.
2. ADD GREASE EVERY 500 HOURS.
3. ROTATE UPPER FRAME ADDING
ring. See Figure 4.88. GREASE EVERY 90° (TOTAL 4X)
2432P2689
2. Using grease gun filled with general purpose EP

grease (refer to page 4-8), lubricate slewing ring with
several shots from grease gun.
3. Swing machine 90° right, and repeat step 2. See la-

bel on frame.
SLEWING RING
GREASE NIPPLE
4. Continue to swing machine at 90°
increments and
lubricating slewing ring until ring has been completely FIGURE 4.88
greased.
E. CHECKING SLEWING RING FITTING BOLTS FOR

BALL
LOOSENING
Check that bolts securing slewing ring are not loos-
ened. SLEWING RING
If loosened, remove bolts once, apply Loctite #262 or
equivalent, and tighten them again.
BOLTS
Torque specification
95 ± 9.5 kgf·m (686 ± 69 lbf·ft)
Alternately tighten bolts facing each other in order. See
Figure 4.89.
LOWER FRAME
NOTE FIGURE 4.89

Since the tightening of slewing ring requires special tools,
contact our representative or service shop.
F . FUEL SYSTEM INJECTION PRESSURE AND NOZZLE

CONDITION (ATOMIZATION)
Perform this inspection and adjustment every 500 hours
of engine operation. Contact KOBELCO distributor for
assistance.
Initial injection pressure : 180 kgf/cm2 (2,560 psi)
4 — 36
G. CHECKING THE AIR CONDITIONER REFRIGERANT
AIR CAPACITY COMPRESSOR
SELECTOR SWITCH SWITCH
1. Start the engine. Set the engine speed to the middle
speed position.
2. Set the machine to the conditions shown below when

checking the refrigerant. See Figure 4.90.
• Air conditioner switch . ON
• Fan switch ...................... HI position (Maximum )
TEMPERATURE MAIN POWER
• Temp. adjustment switch ... Lower temp position ( ) SETTING SWITCH SWITCH
(˚C ˚F SELECTOR SWITCH)
• Door / Window ............... Close
• Compressor switch ........ ON (The lamp lit up) FIGURE 4.90
3. Follow the procedure below and check the refriger-

ant volume by looking through the sight glass (in- Refrigerant volume Description
spection window) on the upper part of the receiver
(A) Proper
dryer. See right table for better reference.
a. Figure (A) shows that the refrigerant volume is
After the air conditioner is turned ON, little
proper. bubbles appear. The refrigerant becomes
transparent, then turns a light milky white.
b. Figure (B) shows that the refrigerant is over
charged. This will make both high and low pres- (B) Overcharged
sure extreme and exert a bad influence on the pres-

sure switch operation and the air conditioning sys- After the air conditioner is turned ON, no
tem. bubbles appear.
(C) Insufficient
c. Figure (C) shows that the refrigerant is insufficient.
Have the refrigerant recharged at your KOBELCO
distributor. After the air conditioner is turned ON,
bubbles appear continuously.
NOTE Bubbles : Refrigerant gas is mixed with

• New refrigerant (HFC-R134a), whose characteristics are refrigerant fluid.
different from conventional CFC-12, is used in this ma-
chine. Do not mix HFC-R134a with CFC-12. No Bubbles : Whole refrigerant becomes fluid
and transparent.
• Keep the air conditioner ready for use all year round.
Operate the air conditioner at least once every week for Cloudy : Refrigerant is separated from oil.
several minutes to rotate the compressor regardless of The fluid becomes a light milky
the season. This will prevent the refrigerant gas from white.
leaking from the compressor sealing.
4 — 37
REMOVE CAP
PROCEDURES SLOWLY
Perform all other inspection & maintenance proce-
dures as previously described in this section.
A. CHANGE ENGINE COOLANT - 2000 HOURS

WEAR GOGGLES, SAFETY SHOES, HARD HAT,
FORM INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE ON THIS ALLOW ENGINE TO COOL BEFORE OPENING
MACHINE. ALLOW ENGINE TO COOL BEFORE
CHANGING FLUIDS. FIGURE 4.91
1. Raise engine bonnet and slowly remove radiator cap. DEBRIS SCREEN
WASH OUT COVER
See Figure 4.91.
2. Locate coolant drain access cover under L.H. rear

of machine. See Figure 4.92. Remove the four re-
taining bolts.
3. Locate radiator drain valve, place a 40 liter (10 Gal)

capacity container under drain tube and turn drain
valve counterclockwise to open. See Figure 4.93.
REMOVE BOLTS
4. After drainage, close drain valve and drain plug, and
feed water in it. FIGURE 4.92
5. Open drain valve and drain plug. And clean it with

flowing water for 10 minutes in low idling state.
Be careful that water hose is not disconnected from
water feeding port of radiator while cleaning and flow-
ing water.
6. After cleaning, stop engine, and also stop water feed-

ing. Then after draining water, close drain valve and
drain plug.
7. After draining, clean it with radiator flush. Clean it ENGINE DRAIN PLUG RADIATOR DRAIN VALVE
following instruction manual for flush in use.
FIGURE 4.93
8. After cleaning, open drain valve and drain plug, then
close them after completely draining water, and fill it
with water and clean out radiator flush material com- NOTE
pletely.
Expected minimum temperature Long life coolant
-14.5˚C (5.9˚F) 30% mixed
NOTE -34˚C (-29.2˚F) 50% mixed
Never spill the coolant on the ground that can cause the Change contaminated and foamy coolant with new one
environmental pollution. as soon as possible.
Cooling water other than long life coolant should be
changed two times a year, in spring and autumn.
4 — 38
9. Fill radiator with water, open drain valve and drain
plug, and clean it flowing water with engine in a low
idling state until clean water is flowing out.
Adjust water feeding and draining so as to keep ra-
diator in full condition.
10. After clean water has drained out, stop engine and
close drain valve and drain plug. See Figure 4.94.
Fill with "long life coolant" in appropriate concentra-
tion. ENGINE DRAIN PLUG RADIATOR DRAIN VALVE
Refer to pages 4-8.
FIGURE 4.94
11. Run engine at low idling for 5 minutes and high idling
for 5 minutes to bleed air contaminated in coolant
(with cap of radiator removed).
12. Drain coolant in reservoir, clean inside of reservoir ENGINE COOLANT

RESERVOIR
and fill it up with long life coolant in appropriate con-
centration to mid point of FULL and LOW. See Fig-
ure 4.95.
FULL
13. Stop engine, fill it with water to the top of radiator
about 3 minutes later, and tighten cap.
14. Return engine bonnet and access door to the closed LOW
position respectively.
FIGURE 4.95
NOTE
Total cooling system volume is approximately 34 liters (9.0
Gal).
4 — 39
B. REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF ENGINE RADIA-
RADIATOR
TOR – SEE FIGURE 4.96 (3) OIL COOLER
The radiator removal and installation procedure is de-
scribed below.
(4) (1)
1. Remove one under cover on the lower side of radia-
tor.
2. Open cap and radiator drain cock and pour the cool- (2)
COVER
ing water into container.
3. Loosen two wing bolts (1) and remove insect proof

net in front of the radiator.
4. Loosen four capscrews (M10) (2) and remove pads

SHROUD
(3) on the RH and LH sides of radiator shoulder.
Loosen four capscrews (M10) (4) of the shroud and
remove the cover. (7)
5. Remove four (4) securing capscrews (M10) (5) on

the upper of radiator.
6. Remove two securing capscrews(M10) (6) on the (5)

lower side of radiator.
INSECT PROOF NET
7. After making sure that the cooling water is completely (6)

gone out, loosen hose band (7) of radiator and re-
move it on radiator side only.
8. Shift the radiator to the oil cooler side, and hang it (7)
paying attention not to damage the insulation. PULL UP
Radiator weight : 36 kg (79 lb)
SHIFT IT TO THE OIL COOLER SIDE
9. After cleaning, install it by the reverse procedure.

FORM INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE ON THIS
FIGURE 4.96
MACHINE. ALLOW ENGINE TO COOL BEFORE
CHANGING FLUIDS.
4 — 40
C. CHANGE HYDRAULIC OIL
NOTE
The following procedures are to be used for normal chang-
ing of the hydraulic oil only.
If necessary to change the hydraulic oil viscosity, change

hydraulic oil due to hydraulic component failure or chang- FIGURE 4.97
ing main pump, contact KOBELCO distributor for assis-
tance. DEPRESS RUBBER CAP
TO RELEASE PRESSURE

FORM INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE ON THIS HYDRAULIC TANK
MACHINE. ALLOW HYDRAULIC OIL TO COOL FIGURE 4.98
BEFORE CHANGING.
1. Move the machine to a firm, level surface and place

the attachment in the hydraulic oil check position.
See Figure 4.97.
NOTE
If machine is cold, warm the hydraulic oil by operating SLOWLY REMOVE
attachment controls before placing machine in the hydrau- BOLTS & COVER
lic oil check position. See Sec. III (page 3-5).
FIGURE 4.99
2. Release hydraulic tank pressure. See Figure 4.98. BOLT
Clean area around cover of dirt and debris. SPRING

WASHER
COVER
3. Slowly remove the six retaining bolts from the suc-
tion strainer cover plate. See Figure 4.99.
4. Remove “O”-ring, and suction strainer from hydrau- O-RING

lic tank. See Figure 4.100.
SUCTION
NOTE STRAINER
Never spill the hydraulic oil on the ground, that can case
the environmental pollution.
FIGURE 4.100
4 — 41
5. Install special suction stopper, part number 24100P978F5,
over suction tube inside hydraulic tank. See Figure 4.101. HYDRAULIC
TANK
6. Place a 206 liter (54 Gal) capacity container under

drain plug. Remove plug and allow all oil from hy-
draulic tank to drain into container.
SUCTION STOPPER
ASSEMBLY
PART No. 24100P978F5
SUCTION
TUBE
FIGURE 4.101
7. Remove the hydraulic drain plug on bottom of hy-

draulic tank. See Figure 4.104.
8. After all oil has drained, carefully and thoroughly clean

inside of hydraulic tank.
9. Replace drain plug and tighten securely.
10. Remove suction stopper and clean outside of suc-

DRAIN PLUG
tion tube with a clean, dry cloth.
11. Carefully inspect suction strainer for damage. If any

damage is found, replace strainer with new part. FIGURE 4.104
Order part number LC50V00001F1.
12. Install strainer assembly onto suction tube.
)
2˝
6.
(2
m
m
666
FIGURE 4.105
4 — 42
13. Install new “O”-ring, part number ZD11G20000, in
BOLT
cover plate mounting surface groove and install suc-
tion strainer cover plate onto hydraulic tank. Make SPRING
WASHER
certain plate boss is inside suction strainer holder. COVER
See Figure 4.106.
14. Torque retaining bolts to proper value. Refer to speci-

fications section. O-RING
15. Fill hydraulic tank to proper level with fresh, clean

hydraulic oil through hydraulic return filter. See Fig-
ure 4.106. SUCTION
STRAINER
Use same viscosity oil in hydraulic tank as was drained.

Refer to page 4-8 for oil specifications.
NOTE
This machine was shipped from the factory with ISO
VG32S viscosity hydraulic oil in hydraulic system.
FIGURE 4.106
4 — 43
D.HYDRAULIC TANK BREATHER
DEPRESS RUBBER CAP
1. Release hydraulic tank pressure. See Figure 4.107. TO RELEASE PRESSURE
THE TEMPERATURE OF HYDRAULIC OIL IS HIGH

IMMEDIATELY AFTER STOPPING THE OPERATION.
SPECIAL ATTENTION MUST BE PAID WHEN RE-
LEASING THE PRESSURE BECAUSE HOT GASES HYDRAULIC TANK
MAY ERUPT.
FIGURE 4.107
2. Remove rubber cap and nut. See Figure 4.108.

RUBBER CAP
3. Remove breather housing. See Figure 4.108.
NUT
FILTER
BREATHER
HOUSING
FIGURE 4.108
4. Remove old filter, clean mounting surfaces and in-

REMOVE FILTER
stall new filter. See Figure 4.109. Order part num-
ber YN57V00002S010.
5. Install breather housing.
6. Install retaining nut and tighten securely.

Torque : 1.0 ~ 1.4 kgf·m (7.2 ~ 10 lbf·ft)
7. Install rubber cap part number YN57V00002S012.
FIGURE 4.109
4 — 44
E . CHANGE OIL IN TRAVEL MOTOR REDUCTION UNITS
Change the travel reduction units oil on a new ma- FILL / LEVEL PLUG
change every 2000 hours.

DRAIN PLUG
1. Move machine to a firm, level surface. Operate travel
until “FILL/LEVEL” plugs on travel motors are at top. FIGURE 4.110
See Figure 4.110.
2. Stop engine and remove the travel motor reduction

unit “DRAIN” Plug. See Figure 4.110.
3. To add oil, remove the oil fill plug and add extreme TRAVEL REDUCTION UNIT COULD BE UNDER
pressure gear oil #90 grade GL-4 until oil just begins
PRESSURE, CAREFULLY LOOSEN PLUG AND RE-
to flow from level plug.
MOVE SLOWLY TILL AIR PRESSURE IS RELEASED.
4. To drain oil, remove “FILL/LEVEL” plug and drain
plug. Allow oil to drain into a 12 liter (3 Gal) capacity
container. Replace drain plug, remove level plug and
fill through fill port using extreme pressure gear oil
#90 grade GL-4.
NOTE
Capacity of each travel motor reduction unit is 10.5 liters
(2.8 Gallons).
5. Replace all plugs and tighten securely.
F . PILOT LINE FILTER

When cleaning or replacing the filter, move the control
lever several times and release the internal pressure
in the pilot line completely.
Prepare an oil pan.
ELEMENT
NEVER CHANGE OILS OR FILTERS ON A MACHINE O-RING

CHINE TO COOL FIRST UNTIL OILS AND FLUIDS CASE
ARE WARM NOT HOT.
RELEASE HYDRAULIC TANK PRESSURE BEFORE FIGURE 4.111
WORKING WITH ANY HYDRAULIC COMPONENT.
1. Open the main pump access door and locate the

pilot manifold mounted to the side of the hydraulic
Tank. See Figure 4.111.
4 — 45
2. Loosen the manifold block case with spanner 24mm
(0.94˝).
3. Clean the removed parts and fit new element and O-

ring in the case.
4. After the case is installed on the filter base, tighten it

with spanner 24mm (0.94˝). ELEMENT
Tightening torque : 2.5 to 3.5 kgf·m(18 to 25 lbf·ft)

O-RING
5. Lock the main pump access door.
CASE
FIGURE 4.112
G. CHANGE OIL IN SWING REDUCTION UNIT

Change the swing reduction unit oil on a new machine
DIPSTICK
after the first 500 hours of engine operation then change
every 2000 hours. FILL PLUG

1. Remove the drain plug on the rear lower side of the FIGURE 4.113
swing reduction unit to drain oil to the container. See
Figure 4.114.
2. Clean the drain plug seal it with teflon tape, and in-
stall.
3. Remove the oil filler plug and fill with extreme pres-
sure gear oil #90 grade GL-4.
4. Using the dipstick, confirm that the extreme pres-

sure gear oil #90 grade GL-4 levels is within the des-
ignated range. See Figure 4.113.
DRAIN PORT
5. Clean the fill plug and install. FIGURE 4.114
NOTE
Capacity of each swing reduction unit is 21.5 liters (5.7
Gallons).
4 — 46
H. ATTACHMENT & DUST SEALS
STABILIZE BUCKET
ON GROUND
1. Bucket Clearance
Inspect bucket clearance frequently for wear. If clear-
ance between bucket and bucket link and/or between
arm and bucket is greater than 1.2mm (0.05˝) adjust
clearance according to instructions.
2. Reversing Backhoe Bucket
a. Move the machine to a firm ,level surface and rest

the bucket on the ground, making certain the bucket
is stable. See Figure 4.115.
FIGURE 4.115
b. Roll “O”-rings onto bucket boss. See Figure 4.116.
c. Remove jam nuts, nuts and pin retaining bolts. See

Figure 4.117.
d. Carefully remove main pins mounting arm and

bucket link to bucket.
e. Rotate bucket 180° or move machine, install arm

and bucket link in their respective positions. See
Figure 4.118.
ROLL "O"-RING ONTO
BUCKET BOSS
NOTE
Make certain “O”-rings are on bucket boss for reinstalla- FIGURE 4.116
tion.
BOLT
f . Install pins, retaining bolts and nuts. Torque to proper

value. Install jam nuts and torque to proper value.
g. Roll “O”-rings into grooves between bucket / arm and

bucket / bucket link. JAM NUT
NUT
NOTE
Inspect “O”-rings for damage or excessive wear. If worn MAIN PINS BUCKET
or damaged replace with new parts to protect seals, pins LINK HERE
and surfaces from dirt and debris which can cause pre-
mature failure. FIGURE 4.117
“O”-Ring Part Number (4 Required) 2445Z1538
BUCKET ARM
LINK HERE HERE
FIGURE 4.118
4 — 47
3. Dust Seals
ATTACHMENT LUBRICATION POSITION
a. The attachment incorporates several dust seals
(8)
that should be periodically checked for damage and (7)
excessive wear. See Figure 4.119. (1)
(8) (2)
b. If excessive wear or damage is found remove seal
(6)
and replace with new parts. (5)
NOTE (10)
Order the following part numbers for replacement seals: (3)
(9) (4)
1. BOOM FOOT – 2445R138D10 (2 Req’d)
2. ARM to BOOM – 2445R138D10 (2 Req’d) FIGURE 4.119
3. ARM to IDLER LINK – 2445R138D7 (2 Req’d)
4. BKT CYLINDER to BKT LINK – 2445R138D8 (4 Req’d)
5. ARM to BUCKET – 2445R220D6 (2 Req’d) LIP OUT
6. BOOM CYLINDER HEAD – 2438U1170S27 (4 Req’d)

7. BOOM CYLINDER ROD – 2438U1170S25 (4 Req’d)
8. ARM CYLINDER HEAD AND ROD – 2438U1170S25 BOSS
(4 Req’d)
9. BKT CYLINDER HEAD AND ROD – 2438U1381S24
(4 Req’d)
10. BUCKET to BKT LINK – 2445R220D6 (2 Req’d)
c. Install replacement seals as shown in Figure 4.120.
d. Make certain pin surface and tapered end are

smooth and free from all burrs or imperfections.
Rough pin surfaces can cause damage to the new
seals.
BUSHING
SEAL
FIGURE 4.120
I . WINDSHIELD WASHER RESERVOIR

OPEN ENGINE AIR CLEANER ACCESS DOOR
Fill the windshield washer fluid reservoir as required
using approved windshield washing fluid. WINDSHIELD WASHER
RESERVOIR CAP
1. Open engine air cleaner access door to locate
washer fluid reservoir. See Figure 4.121.
2. Pull cap off and fill with proper windshield washing

fluid.
3. Replace cap and reposition engine air cleaner ac-

cess door.
FIGURE 4.121
4 — 48
J . CHANGE GREASE IN SLEWING RING GREASE BATH
1. Drain water by removing drain plate located in lower

frame cavity. See Figure 4.122.
If the slewing ring ever becomes submerged in water,

it is mandatory that the sump bath grease be changed.
SUMP BATH
DRAIN PLATE
FIGURE 4.122
2. To replace the slewing bath grease it is necessary to re-

CLEAN & FILL
move the upper frame. Contact KOBELCO destributor to WITH MoS2 GREASE
do it. See Figure 4.123.
SUMP BATH GREASE QUANTITIES CHART

SK330(LC)-6E
GREASE TYPE
SK330NLC-6E
15.7 kg
N.L.G.I.LITHIUM BASE W/MoS2
(34.6 lb)
FIGURE 4.123
4 — 49
4.12 MISCELLANEOUS
A. FUSES
Follow the procedures below to replace “blown” or faulty
fuses.
1. Move seat and seat base completely forward.
2. Remove fuse box cover from fuse box. See Figure

4.124.
3. Locate and remove faulty fuse. Replace fuse with

same amperage fuse as removed. FUSE BOX
FIGURE 4.124
NEVER REPLACE A FAULTY FUSE WITH A HIGHER

AMP FUSE. NEVER USE A “JUMPER” IN PLACE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
OF A FUSE. NEVER SPLICE ACCESSORIES DI-
RECTLY INTO FUSE TERMINALS.
4. Refer to fuse box cover or Figure 4.125 for fuse

amperage and their functions.
NOTE
When ordering replacement fuses, order the following part
numbers: 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
10 AMP – Part number 2479R655S8 No. AMPS FUNCTION
20 AMP – Part number 2479R655S9 1 20A Mechatro Controller (CPU)
2 10A Wiper, Washer Relay
3 10A Engine Controller
4 10A Engine Controller
5 10A Cigar Lighter
6 10A Horn
7 NONE None
8 20A Fuel Supply Pump
9 10A Dome Lamp, Converter (Back up)
10 20A Starter Switch
11 10A DC to DC Converter
12 20A Swing Flasher
13 10A Gauge Cluste
14 20A Wiper, Washer
15 10A Solenoid Valve (Safety Lock Lever)
16 20A Working Light (Front)
17 20A Cab Light (OPT)
18 20A Air Conditioner
19 10A Controller (A/C)
20 20A Spare 24V
FIGURE 4.125
4 — 50
B. PERIODICAL INSPECTION ITEMS
Since there is no definite time table for the replace-
ment of hydraulic lines, tubes and hoses, inspect the
following periodically for tightness and signs of dam-
HEATER
age. Replace all damaged lines, tubes and hoses with HOSES
new parts. Refer to the parts manual for correct part
numbers when ordering.
DO NOT BEND, STRIKE OR DAMAGE HIGH PRESSURE

LINES.
DO NOT INSTALL BENT OR DAMAGED LINES, TUBES FIGURE 4.126
OR HOSES.
REPLACE ALL DAMAGED LINES, TUBES AND HOSES
IMMEDIATELY.
TIGHTEN ALL LOOSE FITTINGS AND CONNECTIONS
TO THE PROPER TORQUE VALUE.
CLEAN UP ALL FUEL AND OIL SPILLS IMMEDIATELY
TO HELP PREVENT FIRES.
NEVER USE HANDS TO CHECK FOR LEAKS CARE-
FULLY INSPECT ALL LINES, TUBES AND HOSES FOR:
1. FITTINGS & CONNECTIONS DAMAGED OR LEAK-
ING. BOOM HOSES
AND TUBES
2. OUTER COVERING OF HOSES WORN, CUT OR
DAMAGED EXPOSING WIRE REINFORCEMENT.
3. HOSE SWELLING OR “BALLOONING”. FIGURE 4.127
4. EVIDENCE OF HOSE BEING KINKED OR COL-
LAPSED.
5. STEEL PROTECTIVE COVERING WORN OR DAM- ARM HOSES
AND TUBES
AGED.
6. LOOSE FITTINGS AND CONNECTIONS.
MAKE CERTAIN ALL CLAMPS, GUARDS AND HEAT
SHIELDS ARE IN PLACE AND SECURE. THIS WILL
HELP PREVENT VIBRATION, EXCESSIVE WEAR OF
COMPONENTS AND EXCESSIVE HEAT DURING OP-
ERATION.
1. Heater Hoses
Inspect the heater hoses between heater and en- FIGURE 4.128
gine for signs of damage and wear. See Figure 4.126.
2. Boom Hoses & Tubes

Inspect boom head and rod hoses and tubes for dam-
age, wear and loose connections. See Figure 4.127.
3. Arm Hoses & Tubes

Inspect arm head and rod hoses and tubes for dam-
age, wear and loose connections. See Figure 4.128.
4 — 51
4. Bucket Hoses & Tubes
Inspect bucket head and rod hoses and tubes for
damage, wear and loose connections. See Figure
4.129.
5. Fuel Lines and Hoses BUCKET HOSES

Inspect fuel lines and hoses for damage, wear and AND LINES
loose connections. Repair or replace fuel lines and

hoses before operating the machine.
FIGURE 4.129
6. Hydraulic Suction Tubes & Hoses USE CARDBOARD TO CHECK

FOR PRESSURE LEAKS
Inspect all hydraulic tubes and hoses for damage,
wear and loose connections. See Figure 4.130.
FIGURE 4.130
7. Radiator Hoses & Cap

Inspect the radiator hoses for signs of damage or
deterioration. Replace hoses if found to be in bad
condition. Inspect the radiator cap seal for signs of
damage and deterioration and replace with new part
if found to be in bad condition. See Figure 4.131.
RADIATOR HOSES
AND LINES
FIGURE 4.131
8. Foam Seals
Inspect the foam rubber seals around the radiator,
oil cooler and on the engine cover. Make certain they
are in place and secure to prevent overheating of
the engine. See Figure 4.132.
FOAM SEALS
FIGURE 4.132
4 — 52
9. Fuel Filler Strainer
Inspect the fuel filler strainer beneath fuel filler cap
FUEL FILLER
for damage, dirt and debris. Make certain the strainer STRAINER
is clean and in place before fueling the machine. See
Figure 4.133. If the strainer is damaged, replace with
a new part. Order part number 2446R326.
NOTE
Do not remove this filter to refuel machine. To do so may
allow dirt and debris to enter fuel tank.
FIGURE 4.133
10. Fuel Lines and Hoses

CHECK FUEL LINES
Inspect fuel lines and hoses for damage, wear and
loose connections. Repair or replace fuel lines and
hoses before operating the machine.
See Figure 4.133A.
FIGURE 4.133A
11. Rear View Mirrors

Inspect the rear view mirrors. Make certain both sides
rear view mirrors are in place, properly adjusted,
clean, and in good condition. Secure them tight to
prevent them from breaking. See Figure 4.133B.
MAKE SURE REAR VIEW MIRRORS ARE

CLEAN AND IN GOOD CONDITION
FIGURE 4.133B
4 — 53
C. MACHINE STORAGE 3. Completely fill fuel tank with fresh, clean fuel to aid
Perform the following procedure to prepare the main preventing condensation of moisture inside the fuel
chine for long term storage. tank.
1. Perform all inspection and maintenance procedures 4. Move machine to an indoor location for storage.
as previously described in this section.
5. Operate bucket and arm completely “IN” extending
2. Thoroughly clean the machine, inspect for damaged cylinders. Then lower boom until attachment is rest-
or worn parts and components and replace or repair ing on the floor. See Figure 4.134.
all damaged or worn parts.
6. Coat cylinder rods with a heavy coat of grease to
prevent corrosion during storage.
7. Remove batteries and store in a well ventilated, warm

Protect CPU and all electrical components from water area.
and steam when cleaning the machine.
POSITION MACHINE AS SHOWN INSIDE A STORAGE BUILDING
HEAVILY GREASE ALL CYLINDER

RODS TO PREVENT CORROSION
FIGURE 4.134
D. CARE DURING STORAGE E. REMOVING MACHINE FROM STORAGE

Every 30 days during storage, it will be necessary to
1. Perform all Inspection and maintenance procedures
start and run the machine to circulate the fluids through
the systems. Before starting clean cylinder rods and as described in this section before bringing machine
out of storage for normal operation.
after running re-grease cylinder rods.
2. Remove drain plugs from travel motor and swing gear
NOTE reduction units to drain off any moisture which may
Run and operate machine for approximately 1 hour to al- have accumulated during storage.
low all fluids to circulate well and reach normal operating
temperatures. 3. Carefully and closely inspect all hydraulic hoses af-
ter long periods of storage for signs of deterioration.
Replace all hoses showing these signs.
4 — 54
INSPECTION MAINTENANCE CHECKLIST
MACHINE MODEL : SK SERIAL No. : MACHINE HOURS :
ITEM OK MAINT. PERFORMED ITEM OK MAINT. PERFORMED

ENGINE OIL LEVEL HYD. FUNCTION OPERATION
ENGINE COOLANT LEVEL CHECK SWITCHES
CHECK FOR FLUID LEAKS CHECK TRAVEL ALARM
CHECK BELT TENSION CHECK SWING BRAKE
CHECK FUEL LEVEL CHECK WARNING LIGHTS
DRAIN WATER SEPARATOR CHECK BUZZER
CHECK AIR CLEANER CHECK GAUGES
CHECK ENGINE ELECTRICAL CHECK HORN
DRAIN WATER FROM FUEL CHECK DISPLAY MONITOR
CLEAN RPE-FILTER BOWL SWING REDUCTION OIL
CHANGE ENGINE OIL SLEWING RING GEAR
CHANGE OIL FILTER GREASE BATH LEVEL
CHANGE FUEL FILTER SLEWING RING PINION
CHANGE WATER SEPARATOR SLEWING RING SEAL
CHANGE COOLANT FILTER SWIVEL JOINT SEALS
CHECK AIR INTAKE SYSTEM DRAIN WATER FROM BATH
CHECK FAN ASSEMBLY GREASE SLEWING RING
CHECK BELT TENSIONER CHANGE GREASE BATH
CHECK VIBRATION DAMPER CHECK BOLTS/HARDWARE
CLEAN RADIATOR CHECK FOR OIL LEAKS
CLEAN DEBRIS SCREEN CHECK LINES FOR DAMAGE
CHANGE ENGINE COOLANT CHECK STEPS
AIR CLEANER ELEMENTS CHECK FRAME STRUCTURE
ADJUST VALVE CLEARANCE CHECK TRACKS & LINKS
CHANGE ETHER CYLINDER CHECK SPROCKET WEAR
HYDRAULIC OIL LEVEL CHECK IDLER WEAR
CHECK HYD FUNCTIONS CHECK ROLLER WEAR
CHECK FOR OIL LEAKS CHECK TRACK TENSION
CHECK HOSES/LINES ADJUST TRACK TENSION
CLEAN SUCTION SCREEN TRAVEL REDUCTION OIL
CHANGE RETURN FILTER CHECK BOOM & ARM
PILOT MANIFOLD FILTER BUCKET TEETH
CHANGE HYDRAULIC OIL SIDE CUTTERS
CLEAN HYDRAULIC TANK GREASE BOOM PINS
INSPECT ALL WIRING GREASE ARM PINS
BATTERY ELECTROLYTE GREASE BUCKET PINS
BATTERY SERVICE CHECK COOLANT ADDITIVE
These item include non-equipped parts by the

machine specification.
MECHANIC:
SIGNATURE: DATE:
4 — 55
Section V – TRANSPORTATION
Table of Contents
TRANSPORTING MACHINE ........................................................................................................................ 5-1 ~ 5-3
Machine Preparation .............................................................................................................................. 5-1
Loading the Machine ............................................................................................................................. 5-1
Securing Machine to Trailer .................................................................................................................. 5-2
LIFTING MACHINE ...................................................................................................................................... 5-3
LIFTING MACHINE WITHOUT ATTACHMENT ........................................................................................... 5-5
SHIPPING DIMENSIONS ............................................................................................................................. 5-7
Machine With Standard Attachments ................................................................................................... 5-7
Boom With Arm Cylinder – Figure 5.13 ................................................................................................ 5-8
Arm With Bucket Cylinder and Bucket – Figure 5.14 ......................................................................... 5-8
Arm With Bucket Cylinder – Figure 5.15 .............................................................................................. 5-8
Bucket - Figure 5.16 ............................................................................................................................... 5-9
5—0
5.1 TRANSPORTING MACHINE
3. Obtain any permits required from proper government
A. MACHINE PREPARATION agencies for transport of machine.
1. Know the total weight, length, width and height of 4. Use only a trailer with a rated capacity sufficient to
the machine being transported. See Figure 5.1. transport the machine.
2. Know route to be traveled. Investigate bridges, over- 5. Make certain trailer has ramps or a ramp is available
passes, trusses and traffic flow on route. for loading and unloading the machine.
11,000 mm (36´-1˝) 2,190 mm (7´-2˝)
3,460 mm (11´-4˝)
(2´-2˝) 4,120 mm (13´-6˝)
100 mm (3.9˝)
700 mm
(2´-4˝)
mm
660
Dimensions and weights are with 3.3 m (10´-10˝) Arm,
1.40 m3 (1.83 cu yd) Bucket and 6.5 m (21´-4˝) Boom
MACHINE WEIGHT (OCEANIA) WEIGHT (EU)

MODEL 600 mm SHOE 600 mm SHOE
NOTE
SK330-6E 24,900 kg (54,900 lb) 24,900 kg (54,900 lb)
Without counterweight.
SK330LC-6E 25,400 kg (56,000 lb) 25,500 kg (56,200 lb)
SK330NLC-6E 25,300 kg (55,800 lb) 25,400 kg (56,000 lb)
FIGURE 5.1
B. LOADING THE MACHINE

THROTTLE CONTROL
HI
LO
NEVER ATTEMPT TO LOAD OR UNLOAD MACHINE

WITHOUT RAMPS.
NEVER USE ATTACHMENT AS AN AID IN LOAD-
ING OR UNLOADING THE MACHINE.
1. Apply parking brakes on tractor and trailer and chock

trailer wheels before attempting to load or unload
machine.
2. Lower ramps of trailer.
3. Place travel speed select switch in 1st ( ) speed
position and move throttle control to the “LO” idle
position. See Figure 5.2.
FIGURE 5.2
5—1
4. Slowly travel machine up trailer ramps and over rear
axles of trailer. See Figure 5.3.
TO PREVENT THE ARM AND BUCKET CYLINDER

(S) FROM ANY DAMAGE, YOU ARE ADVISED TO
FOLLOW THE FOLLOWING INSTRUCTIONS.
DO NOT HAVE THE ARM AND/OR BUCKET CYLIN-
DER FULLY EXTENDED TO A "RAMP OVER CEN-
TER" SITUATION. THIS ALLOWS SUDDEN AND
ABRUPT CONTACT OF THE ARM OR BUCKET TO A 15˚ or less
TRAILER DECK, RAMP OR THE GROUND.
THIS CAN RESULT IN INTERNAL MECHANICAL FIGURE 5.3
CONTACT, WHICH CAN STRETCH THE CYLINDER
ROD(S).
SAFETY LOCK
LEVER IN
5. Slowly travel machine completely onto trailer until in LOCKED
proper transport position. (UP) POSITION
6. Slowly swing machine 180° until attachment is to-

ward rear of trailer.
7. Slowly lower boom until attachment rests on trailer
bed.
8. Place safety lock lever in the up “LOCKED” position.
See Figure 5.4.
9. Turn machine “OFF”, remove key and lock all doors,
filler caps and access panels. FIGURE 5.4
SECURE
Place a cover over the exhaust pipe of the machine FRONT & REAR
and secure to avoid water entering the engine. OF EACH TRACK
C. SECURING MACHINE TO TRAILER

1. Using cable or wire rope of sufficient capacity, se-
cure front and rear of each track to trailer. See Fig-
ure 5.5.
2. Secure attachment to trailer as shown in Figure 5.5.
3. Secure all loose components to trailer. SECURE
ATTACHMENT
FIGURE 5.5
5—2
5.2 LIFTING MACHINE
The following procedures are for lifting the machine,
as built by KOBELCO CONSTRUCTION MACHIN-
ERY CO., LTD. These procedure do not take into ALWAYS USE PROPER LIFTING EQUIPMENT AND
account modifications made to the machine that af- DEVICES.
fect machine weight or center of gravity. USE OF IMPROPER LIFTING EQUIPMENT COULD
1. Locate lifting locations at the front and rear of each ALLOW THE LOAD TO SHIFT OR FALL CAUSING
crawler frame. See Figure 5.6 to 5.8. SEVERE DAMAGE, SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH.
2. Attach cables or wire rope with a capacity rating suf-
ficient to lift the machine, at lifting locations.
Place a hardwood or steel block between cables and DO NOT USE COUNTERWEIGHT LIFTING EYES TO
crawler frame to prevent damage to the tracks from LIFT WHOLE MACHINE.
cables during lifting. See Figure 5.6 to 5.8. LIFTING EYES CAN FALL UNDER THIS LOAD RE-
SULTING IN PERSONAL INJURY.
3. Bring loose ends of cables together at machine cen- REFER TO OPERATOR’S MANUAL FOR PROPER
ter of gravity and attach to an overhead lifting device WAY OF LIFTING MACHINE.
with a rated lifting capacity sufficient to lift the ma-
chine. See Figure 5.6 and 5.8.
TOOLS
NOTE
It may be necessary to place reinforced spreader bars ITEM SIZE Q'TY
between lifting cables to prevent damage to the machine CABLE (A) Ø 45.0 X 15.7 m 1
during lifting. See Figure 5.6 and 5.8. CABLE (B) Ø 45.0 X 15.6 m 1
SPREADER BARS (C) 4.0 m 2
4. Slowly lift and move machine to desired location.
WEIGHT : 33,300 kg (73,400 lb) (A) (B)

ARM : 3.3 m (10´-10˝) (C)
2,000mm
(6´-7˝)
SHOE : 600 mm (23.6˝) (45 ° °)

(14 ° ) (45
MODEL : SK330-6E °)
) (10 4,000mm
CENTER OF GRAVITY (13´-1˝)
3,600mm (11´-10˝)
740mm 210mm 740mm

(29.1˝) (8.3˝) (29.1˝)
NOTE PLACE BLOCK

Lifting machine with wider track shoes will tend BETWEEN EACH
CABLE AND FRAME
to shift the center of gravity slightly forward, DO NOT USE THE COUNTERWEIGHT
toward the center of the slewing ring. LIFTING EYES TO LIFT MACHINE.
FIGURE 5.6
5—3
TOOLS
ITEM SIZE Q'TY
CABLE (A) Ø 45.0 X 15.7 m 1
CABLE (B) Ø 45.0 X 15.7 m 1
WEIGHT : 33,900 kg (74,700 lb)-EU (A) (B)

33,800 kg (74,500 lb)-OCEANIA (C)
2,000mm
(1
(6´-7˝)
°) (45 °
ARM : 3.3 m (10´-10˝) 4° °)
) (13 ) (45
SHOE : 600 mm (23.6˝) CENTER OF GRAVITY 4,000mm (13´-1˝)
MODEL : SK330LC-6E
3,600mm (11´-10˝)
780mm 205mm 755mm
(30.7˝) (8.1˝) (29.7˝)
NOTE
Lifting machine with wider track shoes will tend PLACE BLOCK
BETWEEN EACH
to shift the center of gravity slightly forward, CABLE AND FRAME DO NOT USE THE COUNTERWEIGHT
FIGURE 5.7
TOOLS
ITEM SIZE Q'TY
CABLE (A) Ø 45.0 X 15.7 m 1
CABLE (B) Ø 45.0 X 15.5 m 1
WEIGHT : 33,800 kg (74,510 lb)-EU (A) (B)

33,700 kg (74,290 lb)-OCEANIA (C)
2,000mm
(1
(6´-7˝)
°) (45 °
ARM : 3.3 m (10´-10˝) 5° 1 °)
) (1 ) (45
SHOE : 600 mm (23.6˝) CENTER OF GRAVITY 4,000mm (13´-1˝)
MODEL : SK330NLC-6E
3,600mm (11´-10˝)
780mm 205mm 755mm

(30.7˝) (8.1˝) (29.7˝)
NOTE
Lifting machine with wider track shoes will tend PLACE BLOCK
BETWEEN EACH
to shift the center of gravity slightly forward, DO NOT USE THE COUNTERWEIGHT
CABLE AND FRAME
FIGURE 5.8
5—4
5.3 LIFTING MACHINE (WITHOUT ATTACHMENT) TOOLS
Lift up machine without attachment is the procedure ITEM SIZE Q'TY
described below. See Figure 5.9 to 5.11. CABLE (A) Ø 45.0 X 16.4 m 1
CABLE (B) Ø 45.0 X 15.2 m 1
WEIGHT : 27,300 kg (60,190 lb) (A) (B)

(C)
2,000mm
SHOE : 600 mm (23.6˝)
(6´-7˝)
MODEL : SK330-6E (45 ° °)
) (45
(2
2 °) 4,000mm (13´-1˝)
(1 )
°
CENTER OF GRAVITY
3,600mm (11´-10˝)
740mm (29.1˝) 990 mm 740mm
(40.0˝) (29.1˝)
NOTE
PLACE BLOCK BETWEEN Lifting machine with wider track shoes will tend
EACH CABLE AND FRAME
DO NOT USE THE COUNTERWEIGHT to shift the center of gravity slightly forward,
LIFTING EYES TO LIFT MACHINE. toward the center of the slewing ring.
FIGURE 5.9
TOOLS
ITEM SIZE Q'TY
CABLE (A) Ø 45.0 X 16.4 m 1
CABLE (B) Ø 45.0 X 15.2 m 1
WEIGHT : 27,900 kg (61,500 lb)-EU (A) (B)

27,800 kg (61,290 lb)-OCEANIA
2,000 mm
(2
3° (C)
(6´-7˝)
SHOE : 600 mm (23.6˝) ) °)

(3 (45 ° °)
) (45
MODEL : SK330LC-6E
CENTER OF GRAVITY 4,000 mm (13´-1˝)
3,600 mm (11´-10˝)
780mm (30.7˝) 1,085 mm 755mm (29.7˝)

(42.7˝)
PLACE BLOCK BETWEEN NOTE
EACH CABLE AND FRAME Lifting machine with wider track shoes will tend
FIGURE 5.10
5—5
TOOLS
ITEM SIZE Q'TY
CABLE (A) Ø 45.0 X 16.4 m 1
CABLE (B) Ø 45.0 X 15.2 m 1
WEIGHT : 27,800 kg (61,300 lb)-EU (A) (B)

27,600 kg (60,840 lb)-OCEANIA
2,000 mm
(2
4° (C)
(6´-7˝)
SHOE : 600 mm (23.6˝) ) °) (45 ° °)
(2 ) (45
MODEL : SK330NLC-6E
CENTER OF GRAVITY 4,000 mm (13´-1˝)
3,600 mm (11´-10˝)
780mm (30.7˝) 1,085 mm 755mm (29.7˝)
(42.7˝)
PLACE BLOCK BETWEEN NOTE
EACH CABLE AND FRAME Lifting machine with wider track shoes will tend
FIGURE 5.11
5—6
5.4 SHIPPING DIMENSIONS
A. SK330-6E, 330LC-6E AND SK330NLC-6E
a. Machine With Standard Attachments

Refer to Figure 5.12 for reference in regards to the
machine basic dimensions, as manufactured by
KOBELCO, with standard attachments:
a.1. Standard boom .... 6.5 m (21´-4˝)
a.2. Standard arm ....... 3.3 m (10´-10˝)
a.3. Bucket .................. 1.40 m3 (1.83 cu yd)
11,200mm (36´-9˝)
3,500mm (11´-6˝)
*1,200mm (3´-11˝)
3,360mm (11´-0˝)
3,120mm (10´-3˝)
(19.7˝)
500
mm
4,650mm (15´-3˝) / 4,980mm (16´-4˝)-LC·NLC 600mm (23.6˝ )
5,830mm (19´-2˝) / 5,990mm (19´-8˝)-LC·NLC 3,200mm (10´-6˝ )-STD,LC
3,000mm (9´-10˝ )-NLC
* Marked dimensions do not include height of shoe lug.
FIGURE 5.12
5—7
B. BOOM WITH ARM CYLINDER – FIGURE 5.13
Boom mm (ft-in) 6,500 (21´-4˝)
6,750 X 1,820 X 910

L X H XW mm (ft-in)
(22´-2˝ X 6´-0˝ X 3´-0˝)
Weight w/
kg (lb) 3,240 (7,140)
Arm Cylinder
H
L
FIGURE 5.13
C. ARM WITH BUCKET CYLINDER AND BUCKET – FIGURE 5.14
Arm 2.6 m (8´-6˝) Arm 3.3 m (10´-10˝) Arm 4.15 m (13´-7˝)

Combination
Bucket 1.60 m3 (2.09 cu yd) Bucket 1.40 m3 (1.83 cu yd) Bucket 1.20 m3 (1.57 cu yd)
5,390 X 1,110 X 1,610 6,080 X 1,070 X 1,430 6,940 X 1,070 X 1,240
L X H XW mm (ft-in)
(17´-8˝ X 3´-8˝ X 5´-3˝) (19´-11˝ X 3´-6˝ X 4´-8˝) (22´-9˝ X 3´-6˝ X 4´-1˝)
Weight w/
kg (lb) 2,780 (6,130) 2,810 (6,190) 3,000 (6,610)
Bucket Cylinder
H
FIGURE 5.14
D. ARM WITH BUCKET CYLINDER – FIGURE 5.15
Arm 2.6 m (8´-6˝) 3.3 m (10´-10˝) 4.15 m (13´-7˝)

3,790 X 1,090 X 650 4,490 X 980 X 650 5,350 X 1,030 X 650
L X H XW mm (ft-in)
(12´-5˝ X 3´-7˝ X 2´-2˝) (14´-9˝ X 3´-3˝ X 2´-2˝) (17´-7˝ X 3´-5˝ X 2´-2˝)
Weight w/
kg (lb) 1,650 (3,640) 1,770 (3,900) 2,070 (4,560)
Bucket Cylinder
H
FIGURE 5.15
5—8
E . BUCKET – FIGURE 5.16
Standard bucket is 1.40 m3 (1.83 cu yd)
(A) Length is 1,640 mm (5´-5˝)
(B)
(B) Height is 1,460 mm (4´-9˝)
(C) Width without side cutters is 1,300 mm (4´-3˝)
(D) Width with side cutter is 1,430 mm (4´-8˝)
(E) Bucket weight is 1,040 kg (2,290 lb)
(A)
(C)
(D)
FIGURE 5.16
5—9
Section VI – SPECIFICATIONS
Table of Contents
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS ...................................................................................................................... 6-1 ~ 6-13
Machine Dimensions ............................................................................................................................. 6-1
Working Ranges ..................................................................................................................................... 6-1
Boom ....................................................................................................................................................... 6-2
Arm .......................................................................................................................................................... 6-2
Bucket ..................................................................................................................................................... 6-2
Shoes ...................................................................................................................................................... 6-2
Performance Specifications .................................................................................................................. 6-3
Travel speed ...................................................................................................................................... 6-3
Swing speed ...................................................................................................................................... 6-3
Gradeability ....................................................................................................................................... 6-3
Engine ................................................................................................................................................ 6-3
Hydraulic Components ..................................................................................................................... 6-3
Machine and Components Weights ..................................................................................................... 6-3
Lifting Capacities ................................................................................................................................... 6-4 ~ 6-13
OPTIONAL ATTACHMENTS SPECIFICATIONS ......................................................................................... 6-14
Working Ranges ..................................................................................................................................... 6-14
Bucket and Arm Combinations ............................................................................................................. 6-15
TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS ........................................................................................................................ 6-15
Capscrews and Nuts .............................................................................................................................. 6-15
Nuts and Sleeves ................................................................................................................................... 6-16
Flare Type Fitting Joints ........................................................................................................................ 6-16
Nylon Tube Fitting Joints ...................................................................................................................... 6-16
ORS Joints .............................................................................................................................................. 6-16
Torque Values for Most Common Bolts ............................................................................................... 6-17
MISCELLANEOUS INFORMATION ............................................................................................................. 6-18
Temperature Table ................................................................................................................................. 6-18
Special Pipe Wrenches .......................................................................................................................... 6-18
Weight of Materials Table ...................................................................................................................... 6-18
Caps and Plugs for Tubes and Hose Fitting ........................................................................................ 6-18

6—0
6.1 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS A. MACHINE DIMENSIONS – FIGURE 6.1
The specifications found in this section are given on These dimensions consider the following:
the standard SK330(LC)-6E and SK330NLC-6E hydrau- a. Standard boom ........ 6.5 meter (21´-4˝)
lic excavator as manufactured by KOBELCO CON-
b. Standard arm ........... 3.3 meter (10´-10˝)
STRUCTION MACHINERY CO., LTD. No modifica-
tions or options are taken into consideration in re- c. Bucket ...................... 1.40 m3 (1.83 cu yd)
gard to these specifications. d. Standard shoe .......... 600 mm (23.6˝)
11,200mm (36´-9˝)
3,500mm (11´-6˝)
*1,200mm (3´-11˝)
3,360mm (11´-0˝)
3,120mm (10´-3˝)
(19.7˝)
500
mm
4,650mm (15´-3˝) / 4,980mm (16´-4˝)-LC·NLC 600mm (23.6˝ )
5,830mm (19´-2˝) / 5,990mm (19´-8˝)-LC·NLC 3,200mm (10´-6˝ )-STD,LC
3,000mm (9´-10˝ )-NLC
* Marked dimensions do not include height of shoe lug.
FIGURE 6.1
B. WORKING RANGES – FIGURE 6.2 A

Standard attachment working ranges : B
H
a. BOOM ............................. 6.5 m (21´-4˝)
b. ARM ................................ 3.3 m (10´-10˝)
c. BUCKET
SAE heaped .................... 1.40 m3 (1.83 cu yd)
Struck .............................. 1.00 m3 (1.31 cu yd)
D
Width with side cutters .... 1,430 mm (4´-8˝)

Width w/o side cutters ..... 1,300 mm (4´-3˝)
E
Weight ............................. 1,040 kg (2,290 lb)
ITEM FUNCTION mm SAE

F
A Maximum digging reach 11,220 36´- 10˝

B Maximum digging reach at ground 11,030 36´- 2˝
C Maximum digging depth 7,490 24´- 7˝
D Maximum digging height 10,490 34´- 5˝
E Maximum dumping clearance 7,290 23´- 11˝
G
C
F Minimum dumping clearance 2,620 8´- 7˝

G Max. vertical wall digging depth 6,570 21´- 7˝
H Minimum swing radius 4,290 14´- 1˝
FIGURE 6.2
6—1
C. BOOM – FIGURE 6.3
Standard boom is 6.5 m (21´-4˝)
C
A: Length is 6.5 m (21´-4˝)
Center line to center line of pins.
ARM CYLINDER
B: Height is 1,135 mm (3´-9˝) BOSS
From centerline of boom end to centerline of arm
cylinder boss.
B
C: Width is 830 mm (32.7˝) GROUND LEVEL
From edge to edge of boom foot.

A
Weight : Approximately 2,410 kg (5,310 lb)
FIGURE 6.3
D. ARM – FIGURE 6.4

Standard arm is 3.3 m (10´-10˝)
A: Length is 3.3 m (10´-10˝)
B
Center line to center line of pins.
B: Width is 380 mm (15.0˝)
From edge to edge of arm end.
Weight : Approximately 1,090 kg (2,400 lb)
A
FIGURE 6.4
E. BUCKET – FIGURE 6.5

Standard bucket is 1.40 m3 (1.83 cu yd)
A: Length is 1.64 m (5´-5˝)
B
B: Height is 1.46 m (4´-9˝)

C: Width without side cutters is 1,300 mm (4´-3˝)
D: Width with side cutters is 1,430 mm (4´-8˝)
E: Bucket weight is 1,040 kg (2,290 lb)
A
C
D
FIGURE 6.5
F . SHOES – FIGURE 6.6
1. Standard shoes for the SK330(LC)-6E and SK330NLC-6E

are 600 mm (23.6˝) triple grouser.
2. Quantity of shoes ;
SK330-6E ....................................... 45 per track
SK330LC-6E, SK330NLC-6E ..... 48 per track TRIPLE
GROUSER
SHOE
FIGURE 6.6
6—2
G. PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATIONS H. MACHINE AND COMPONENT WEIGHTS
The following performance specifications are based on The following weight specifications are based on the
the standard machine with standard attachment. standard machine with standard attachment.
1. Travel speed, swing speed gradeability & swing torque 1. Component weights Unit : kg (lb)
DESCRIPTION SPECIFICATION COMPONENT SK330-6E SK330(N)LC-6E
5.7 km per hr (3.5 mph) in mode. COMPLETE MACHINE (STANDARD) 33,300 (73,410) 33,800 (74,510)-NLC
TRAVEL SPEED (EU) 33,900 (74,700)
3.3 km per hr (2.2 mph) in mode. COMPLETE MACHINE (STANDARD) 33,300 (73,410) 33,700 (74,300)-NLC
(OCEANIA) 33,800 (74,500)
SWING SPEED 8.6 min-1 IN M-Mode / "HI" idle.
UPPER FRAME ASSEMBLY 16,300 (35,930) 16,300 (35,930)
GRADEABILITY 70 % (35°)
Counterweight 8,420 (18,600) 8,420 (18,600)
SWING TORQUE 111.6 kN Cab 260 (570) 260 (570)
Boom Cylinder* 270 (600) X 2 270 (600) X 2
2. Engine
Engine* 580 (1,280) 580 (1,280)
Major engine specifications
Radiator & Oil Cooler 170 (370) 170 (370)
Engine maker Mitsubishi (MMC) Pump Assembly 126 (280) 126 (280)
Model 6D16-TLU2D Control valve 170 (370) 170 (370)
Type 4-cycle, water cooled, direct injection Fuel Tank* 204 (450) 204 (450)
with intercooler turbocharger , diesel
Hydraulic Tank* 172 (380) 172 (380)
Number of cylinders-Bore X Stroke 6-118 mm X 115 mm (4.65˝ X 4.53˝)
Swing Motor & Reduction Unit 510 (1,120) 510 (1,120)
Displacement 7,545 liter (460 cu in.)
LOWER FRAME ASSEMBLY (EU) 10,900 (24,030) 11,530 (25,130)
11,400
(25,410)
-NLC
Compression ratio 17.5 : 1
LOWER FRAME ASSEMBLY 10,900 (24,030) 11,340 (25,000)-NLC
Output rating 184 kW / 2,200 rpm (OCEANIA) 11,430 (25,200)
Maximum torque 824 N·m / 1,800 rpm Slewing ring 585 (1,290) 585 (1,290)
Travel Motor & Reductin Unit 360 (790) X 2 360 (790) X 2
Ignition order 1 - 5 - 3 - 6 - 2 - 4 clockwise rotation
Idler Assembly 170 (370) X 2 170 (370) X 2
Injection timing 8° Before Top Dead Point
Lower Roller Assembly (EU) 58 (130) X 14 58 (130) X 18
Intake valve clearance Cold 0.4 mm (0.0157˝)
Lower Roller Assembly (OCEANIA) 58 (130) X 14 58 (130) X 16
Exhaust valve clearance Cold 0.4 mm (0. 0157˝) 30 (66) X 4
Upper Roller Assembly 30 (66) X 4
Electrical system D.C. 24V Track Tension Assembly 190 (420) X 2 190 (420) X 2
Starting motor 24 V – 5 kW Sprocket 88 (190) X 2 88 (190) X 2
Alternator 24 V – 35 A Swivel Joint 30 (66) 30 (66)
Batteries 2 - 12 V - (136 Ah) Track Link w/600mm (23.6˝) Shoes 1,870 (4,120) X 2 1,995 (4,400) X 2
Engine dry weight* 580 kg (1,280 lb) Track Link 840 (1,850) X 2 900 (1,980) X 2
Wax type thermostat ATTACHMENT (STANDARD) 6,000 (13,200) 6,000 (13,200)
Thermostat (bottom by-pass type) Bucket Assembly [1.40m3 (1.83cu yd)] 1,040 (2,290) 1,040 (2,290)
Cooling fan drive method Ø620 (Ø24.4˝) suction type, Arm Assembly [3.3m (10´-10˝)] 1,770 (3,900) 1,770 (3,900)
belt drive, pulley ratio : 0.9
Arm [3.3m (10´-10˝)] 1,160 (2,560) 1,160 (2,560)
Air cleaner Dry type with safety elements
Bucket cylinder* 260 (570) 260 (570)
3. Hydraulic components Idler link 27 (60) X 2 27 (60) X 2

Bucket link 130 (290) 130 (290)
COMPONENT TYPE
Pin (2pcs for mtg bucket cyl. & bucket) 115 (250) 115 (250)
Tandem, variable displacement, Boom Assembly 3,180 (7,010) 3,180 (7,010)
Hydraulic Pumps
axial piston with pilot gear pump.
Boom 2,580 (5,690) 2,580 (5,690)
Swing Motor Axial piston
Arm cylinder* 500 (1,100) 500 (1,100)
Travel Motor Axial piston Pin (mounting the arm) 47 (100) 47 (100)
Control Valves 6 spool multiple control FLUIDS 830 (1,830) 830 (1,830)
Cylinders (all) Double acting Hyd Oil 304 (670) 304 (670)
Return Filter Safety valve containing filter type Eng Oil 25 (55) 25 (55)
Oil Cooler Air cooled Fuel 466 (1,030) 466 (1,030)
Water 35 (77) 35 (77)
4. Digging forces * Dry weight
Arm Length 3.3 m (10´-10˝)
Bucket Digging Force 221 / *242 kN
Arm Crowding Force 165 / *181 kN
* Power boost engaged
6—3
I . LIFTING CAPACITIES
RATED OBJECT HANDLING KOBELCO CONSTRUCTION MACHINERY CO., LTD

SK330LC
CAPACITIES TABLE
SHOE WIDTH 600mm
HEIGHT (m)
LIFT POINT (AXIS)
AXIS
10
ARM (See the following table)
9
8
BOOM (See the following table)
7
Z2
LD 6
COUNTERWEIGHT 8,420 kg
5
4
WORKING CONDITIONS: 3
– with no tool (bucket, clamshell..).
If object handling is performed with 2
tool installed, the weight of the tool 1
shall be deducted from the values
of this table. 0 Z1
1
– with extended bucket cylinder. WORKING CIRCUIT 2
PRESSURE 34,300 kPa
– on a compact or horizontal, level 3
HOLDING CIRCUIT
ground.
PRESSURE 34,300 kPa 4
– in complete swing of the upper 5 Z3
structure 6
AXIS OF ROTATION
7
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
OUTREACH (m)
THESE LOADS ARE VALID FOR THE HEIGHT OF
THE CONSIDERED ZONE (Z.) FOR THE INTENDED OUTREACH
BOOM LENGTH 6.50 m
ARM OUTREACH IN m
LENGTH LOADS IN kg (BOOM FOOT HEIGHT)
(m) OUTREACH (m) 3 4.5 6 7.5 9 MAX REACH
Z2 – 8270 6550 – –
2.60 LD=3.03 Z1 16350 10600 7880 5690 4470 4500 ( 9.02m)
Z3 14600 7960 – – –
Z2 – 7480 5580 4850 –
3.30 LD=3.73 Z1 7110 8810 7870 5650 4370 4070 ( 9.63m)
Z3 17380 7860 5660 – –
Z2 – – 5740 4750 –
4.15 LD=4.57 Z1 11640 10190 7760 5550 4190 3240 (10.40m)
Z3 15540 7650 5470 4180 –
LD:BOOM POINT TO HOOK POINT DISTANCE LC20T01017P2
6—4

SK330LC
CAPACITIES TABLE
SHOE WIDTH 600mm
HEIGHT (m)
(HEAVY LIFT)
LIFT POINT (AXIS)
AXIS
10
9
8
7
Z2
LD 6
5
4
of this table. 0 Z1
1
PRESSURE 37,730 kPa
HOLDING CIRCUIT
ground.
structure 6
AXIS OF ROTATION
7
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
OUTREACH (m)
BOOM LENGTH 6.50 m
ARM OUTREACH IN m
Z2 – 9400 6550 – –
2.60 LD=3.03 Z1 18100 11990 7880 5690 4470 4500 ( 9.02m)
Z3 16720 7960 – – –
Z2 – 8510 6270 4850 –
3.30 LD=3.73 Z1 7950 10170 7870 5650 4370 4070 ( 9.63m)
Z3 19830 7860 5660 – –
Z2 – – 6580 4940 –
4.15 LD=4.57 Z1 12930 11560 7760 5550 4190 3240 (10.40m)
Z3 17810 7650 5470 4180 –
6—5

SK330LC
CAPACITIES TABLE
SHOE WIDTH 800mm
HEIGHT (m)
LIFT POINT (AXIS)
AXIS
10
9
8
7
Z2
LD 6
5
4
of this table. 0 Z1
1
PRESSURE 34,300 kPa
HOLDING CIRCUIT
ground.
structure 6
AXIS OF ROTATION
7
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
OUTREACH (m)
BOOM LENGTH 6.50 m
ARM OUTREACH IN m
Z2 – 8270 6630 – –
2.60 LD=3.03 Z1 16350 10600 8170 5900 4640 4870 ( 9.02m)
Z3 14600 8220 – – –
Z2 – 7480 5580 5020 –
3.30 LD=3.73 Z1 7110 8810 8150 5870 4540 4220 ( 9.63m)
Z3 17380 8140 5870 – –
Z2 – – 5740 4750 –
4.15 LD=4.57 Z1 11640 10190 7790 5770 4360 3240 (10.40m)
Z3 15540 7930 5690 4350 –
6—6

SK330LC
CAPACITIES TABLE
SHOE WIDTH 800mm
HEIGHT (m)
(HEAVY LIFT)
LIFT POINT (AXIS)
AXIS
10
9
8
7
Z2
LD 6
5
4
of this table. 0 Z1
1
PRESSURE 37,730 kPa
HOLDING CIRCUIT
ground.
structure 6
AXIS OF ROTATION
7
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
OUTREACH (m)
BOOM LENGTH 6.50 m
ARM OUTREACH IN m
Z2 – 9400 6760 – –
2.60 LD=3.03 Z1 18100 11990 8170 5900 4640 4870 ( 9.02m)
Z3 16720 8250 – – –
Z2 – 8510 6270 5020 –
3.30 LD=3.73 Z1 7950 10170 8150 5870 4540 4220 ( 9.63m)
Z3 19830 8140 5870 – –
Z2 – – 6580 5110 –
4.15 LD=4.57 Z1 12930 11560 8050 5770 4360 3670 (10.40m)
Z3 17810 7930 5690 4350 –
6—7

SK330LC
CAPACITIES TABLE
SHOE WIDTH 900mm
HEIGHT (m)
LIFT POINT (AXIS)
AXIS
10
9
8
7
Z2
LD 6
5
4
of this table. 0 Z1
1
PRESSURE 34,300 kPa
HOLDING CIRCUIT
ground.
structure 6
AXIS OF ROTATION
7
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
OUTREACH (m)
BOOM LENGTH 6.50 m
ARM OUTREACH IN m
Z2 – 8270 6630 – –
2.60 LD=3.03 Z1 16350 10600 8280 5970 4700 4730 ( 9.02m)
Z3 14600 8220 – – –
Z2 – 7480 5580 5080 –
3.30 LD=3.73 Z1 7110 8810 8250 5940 4600 4280 ( 9.63m)
Z3 17380 8240 5940 – –
Z2 – – 5740 4750 –
4.15 LD=4.57 Z1 11640 10190 7790 5840 4420 3240 (10.40m)
Z3 15540 8030 5760 4410 –
6—8

SK330LC
CAPACITIES TABLE
SHOE WIDTH 900mm
HEIGHT (m)
(HEAVY LIFT)
LIFT POINT (AXIS)
AXIS
10
9
8
7
Z2
LD 6
5
4
of this table. 0 Z1
1
PRESSURE 37,730 kPa
HOLDING CIRCUIT
ground.
structure 6
AXIS OF ROTATION
7
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
OUTREACH (m)
BOOM LENGTH 6.50 m
ARM OUTREACH IN m
Z2 – 9400 6830 – –
2.60 LD=3.03 Z1 18100 11990 8260 5970 4700 4730 ( 9.02m)
Z3 16720 8340 – – –
Z2 – 8510 6270 5080 –
3.30 LD=3.73 Z1 7950 10170 8250 5940 4600 4280 ( 9.63m)
Z3 19830 8240 5940 – –
Z2 – – 6580 5170 –
4.15 LD=4.57 Z1 12930 11560 8140 5840 4420 3710 (10.40m)
Z3 17810 8030 5760 4410 –
6—9

SK330NLC
CAPACITIES TABLE
SHOE WIDTH 600mm
HEIGHT (m)
LIFT POINT (AXIS)
AXIS
10
9
8
7
Z2
LD 6
5
4
of this table. 0 Z1
1
PRESSURE 34,300 kPa
HOLDING CIRCUIT
ground.
structure 6
AXIS OF ROTATION
7
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
OUTREACH (m)
BOOM LENGTH 6.50 m
ARM OUTREACH IN m
Z2 – 8270 6020 – –
2.60 LD=3.03 Z1 16350 10600 7160 5180 4070 4100 ( 9.02m)
Z3 14600 7230 – – –
Z2 – 7480 5580 4440 –
3.30 LD=3.73 Z1 7110 8810 7140 5140 3970 3700 ( 9.63m)
Z3 17380 7130 5140 – –
Z2 – – 5740 4530 –
4.15 LD=4.57 Z1 11640 10190 7040 5040 3800 3190 (10.40m)
Z3 15540 6920 4960 3780 –
6 — 10

SK330NLC
CAPACITIES TABLE
SHOE WIDTH 800mm
HEIGHT (m)
(HEAVY LIFT)
LIFT POINT (AXIS)
AXIS
10
9
8
7
Z2
LD 6
5
4
of this table. 0 Z1
1
PRESSURE 37,730 kPa
HOLDING CIRCUIT
ground.
structure 6
AXIS OF ROTATION
7
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
OUTREACH (m)
BOOM LENGTH 6.50 m
ARM OUTREACH IN m
Z2 – 8670 6020 – –
2.60 LD=3.03 Z1 18100 11060 7160 5180 4070 4100 ( 9.02m)
Z3 16720 7230 – – –
Z2 – 8510 6170 4440 –
3.30 LD=3.73 Z1 7950 10170 7140 5140 3970 3700 ( 9.63m)
Z3 19830 7130 5140 – –
Z2 – – 6320 4530 –
4.15 LD=4.57 Z1 12930 10760 7040 5040 3800 3190 (10.40m)
Z3 17810 6920 4960 3780 –
6 — 11

SK330NLC
CAPACITIES TABLE
SHOE WIDTH 800mm
HEIGHT (m)
LIFT POINT (AXIS)
AXIS
10
9
8
7
Z2
LD 6
5
4
of this table. 0 Z1
1
PRESSURE 34,300 kPa
HOLDING CIRCUIT
ground.
structure 6
AXIS OF ROTATION
7
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
OUTREACH (m)
BOOM LENGTH 6.50 m
ARM OUTREACH IN m
Z2 – 8270 6210 – –
2.60 LD=3.03 Z1 16350 10600 7420 5370 4230 4260 ( 9.02m)
Z3 14600 7490 – – –
Z2 – 7480 5580 4800 –
3.30 LD=3.73 Z1 7110 8810 7400 5330 4130 3850 ( 9.63m)
Z3 17380 7390 5340 – –
Z2 – – 5740 4690 –
4.15 LD=4.57 Z1 11640 10190 7290 5230 3950 3240 (10.40m)
Z3 15540 7180 5150 3940 –
6 — 12

SK330NLC
CAPACITIES TABLE
SHOE WIDTH 800mm
HEIGHT (m)
(HEAVY LIFT)
LIFT POINT (AXIS)
AXIS
10
9
8
7
Z2
LD 6
5
4
of this table. 0 Z1
1
PRESSURE 37,730 kPa
HOLDING CIRCUIT
ground.
structure 6
AXIS OF ROTATION
7
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
OUTREACH (m)
BOOM LENGTH 6.50 m
ARM OUTREACH IN m
Z2 – 8930 6210 – –
2.60 LD=3.03 Z1 18100 11440 7420 5730 4230 4260 ( 9.02m)
Z3 16720 7490 – – –
Z2 – 8510 6270 4600 –
3.30 LD=3.73 Z1 7950 10170 7400 5330 4130 3850 ( 9.63m)
Z3 19830 7390 5340 – –
Z2 – – 6520 4690 –
4.15 LD=4.57 Z1 12930 11140 7290 5230 3950 3330 (10.40m)
Z3 17810 7180 5150 3940 –
6 — 13
6.2 OPTIONAL ATTACHMENTS SPECIFICA- A
TIONS B
The following working ranges specifications are based H
on the standard machine with optional attachments.
A. WORKING RANGES – FIGURE 6.7

1. Attachment with :
a. BOOM ............................. 6.5 m (21´-4˝)
D
b. ARM ................................ 4.15 m (13´-7˝)
E
c. BUCKET
SAE heaped .................... 1.20 m3 (1.57 cu yd)
Struck .............................. 0.84 m3 (1.10 cu yd)
F
Weight ............................. 930 kg (2,050 lb)
G
C
FIGURE 6.7
2. Attachment with :
a. BOOM ............................. 6.5 m (21´-4˝)
b. ARM ................................ 2.6 m (8´-6˝)
c. BUCKET
SAE heaped .................... 1.60 m3 (2.09 cu yd)
Struck .............................. 1.20 m3 (1.57 cu yd)
Weight ............................. 1,130 kg (2,490 lb)

6 — 14
B. BUCKET AND ARM COMBINATIONS
BUCKET m3 (cu yd) ARM

SAE (JIS) JIS, SAE 2.6 m 3.3 m 4.15 m
(HEAPED) (STRUCK) (8´-6˝) (10´-10˝) (13´-7˝) •••• Normal working
1.20 (1.57) 0.84 (1.10)
•••• Standard
• • • • Light duty only
1.40 (1.83) 1.00 (1.30)
• • • • Do not use this combination
1.60 (2.09) 1.20 (1.57)
1.80 (2.35) 1.40 (1.83)
6.3 TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS

The following torque specifications are provided for use when actual torque value of a fastener is not known.
A. CAPSCREWS AND NUTS

1. Metric coarse thread standard tightening torque values. Make certain to tighten all capscrews & nuts to proper
torque values.
Torque Value Unit : kgf·m (lbf·ft)
Classification 4.8 T 7T 10.9 T
NOMINAL SIZE NO LUBRICATION OIL LUBRICATION NO LUBRICATION OIL LUBRICATION NO LUBRICATION OIL LUBRICATION
M6 P=1 0.45 ± 0.05 (3.2 ± 0.4) 0.38 ± 0.04 (2.7 ± 0.3) 0.98 ± 0.1 (7.1 ± 0.7) 0.83 ± 0.08 (6.0 ± 0.6) 1.77 ± 0.18 (12.8 ± 1.3) 1.5 ± 0.15 (10.8 ± 1.1)
M8 P=1.25 1.09 ± 0.11 (7.9 ± 0.8) 0.92 ± 0.09 (6.6 ± 0.7) 2.4 ± 0.2 (17.3 ± 1.4) 2.0 ± 0.2 (14.4 ± 1.4) 4.3 ± 0.4 (31.0 ± 2.9) 3.6 ± 0.4 (26.0 ± 2.9)
M10 P=1.5 2.2 ± 0.2 (15.9 ± 1.4) 1.83 ± 0.18 (13.2 ± 1.3) 4.7 ± 0.5 (33.9 ± 3.6) 4.0 ± 0.4 (28.9 ± 2.9) 8.5 ± 0.9 (61.3 ± 6.5) 7.2 ± 0.7 (52.0 ± 5.1)
M12 P=1.75 3.7 ± 0.4 (26.7 ± 2.9) 3.2 ± 0.3 (23.1 ± 2.2) 8.1 ± 0.8 (58.5 ± 5.8) 6.8 ± 0.7 (49.1 ± 5.1) 14.6 ± 1.5 (105 ± 10.8) 12.3 ± 1.2 (88.8 ± 8.7)
M14 P=2 5.9 ± 0.6 (42.6 ± 4.3) 5.0 ± 0.5 (36.1 ± 3.6) 12.8 ± 1.3 (92.5 ± 9.4) 10.8 ± 1.1 (78.0 ± 7.9) 23 ± 2 (166 ± 14) 19.5 ± 1.9 (140 ± 14)
M16 P=2 9.0 ± 0.9 (64.9 ± 6.5) 7.6 ± 0.7 (54.8 ± 5.1) 19.5 ± 2.0 (140 ± 14.4) 16.4 ± 1.6 (118 ± 11.5) 35 ± 4 (252 ± 28.9) 29 ± 3 (209 ± 21.6)
M18 P=2.5 12.4 ± 1.2 (89.6 ± 8.7) 10.5 ± 1.0 (75.8 ± 7.2) 27 ± 3 (195 ± 22) 23 ± 2 (166 ± 14) 49 ± 5 (354 ± 36) 41 ± 4 (296 ± 29)
M20 P=2.5 17.5 ± 1.7 (126 ± 12.3) 14.7 ± 1.4 (106 ± 10.1) 38 ± 4 (274 ± 29) 32 ± 3 (231 ± 22) 68 ± 7 (491 ± 51) 57 ± 6 (412 ± 43)
M22 P=2.5 23 ± 2 (166 ± 14) 19.6 ± 2.0 (142 ± 14) 51 ± 5 (368 ± 36) 43 ± 4 (310 ± 29) 92 ± 9 (663 ± 65) 77 ± 7 (555 ± 58)
M24 P=3 30 ± 3 (217 ± 22) 24 ± 3 (173 ± 22) 65 ± 7 (469 ± 51) 53 ± 5 (383 ± 36) 118 ± 12 (852 ± 87) 96 ± 10 (693 ± 72)
M27 P=3 44 ± 4 (318 ± 29) 36 ± 3 (260 ± 22) 96 ± 10 (693 ± 72) 78 ± 8 (563 ± 58) 173 ± 17 (1250 ± 120) 140 ± 14 (1010 ± 100)
M30 P=3.5 60 ± 6 (433 ± 43) 50 ± 5 (361 ± 36) 131 ± 13 (946 ± 94) 110 ± 11 (794 ± 79) 235 ± 24 (1700 ± 170) 198 ± 20 (1430 ± 140)
M33 P=3.5 81 ± 8 (585 ± 58) 68 ± 7 (491 ± 51) 176 ± 18 (1270 ± 130) 148 ± 15 (1070 ± 110) 317 ± 32 (2290 ± 200) 266 ± 27 (1920 ± 200)
M36 P=4 105 ± 10 (758 ± 72) 88 ± 9 (636 ± 65) 227 ± 23 (1640 ± 170) 190 ± 19 (1370 ± 140) 409 ± 41 (2960 ± 300) 343 ± 34 (2480 ± 250)
2. Metric fine thread standard tightening torque values. Make certain to tighten all capscrews & nuts to proper torque
values.
Torque Value Unit : kgf·m (lbf·ft)
Classification 4.8 T 7T 10.9 T
NOMINAL SIZE NO LUBRICATION OIL LUBRICATION NO LUBRICATION OIL LUBRICATION NO LUBRICATION OIL LUBRICATION
M8 P=1.0 1.15 ± 0.11 (8.3 ± 0.8) 0.97 ± 0.1 (7.0 ± 0.7) 2.5 ± 0.2 (18.0 ± 1.4) 2.1 ± 0.2 (15.2 ± 1.4) 4.5 ± 0.4 (32.5 ± 2.9) 3.8 ± 0.4 (27.4 ± 2.9)
M10 P=1.25 2.3 ± 0.2 (16.6 ± 1.4) 1.91 ± 0.19 (13.8 ± 1.4) 4.9 ± 0.5 (35.4 ± 3.6) 4.2 ± 0.4 (30.3 ± 2.9) 8.9 ± 0.9 (64.2 ± 6.5) 7.5 ± 0.7 (54.2 ± 5.1)
M12 P=1.25 4.0 ± 0.4 (28.9 ± 2.9) 3.4 ± 0.3 (24.5 ± 2.2) 8.7 ± 0.9 (62.8 ± 6.5) 7.3 ± 0.7 (52.7 ± 5.1) 15.7 ± 1.6 (113 ± 13) 13.2 ± 1.3 (95.3 ± 9.4)
M16 P=1.5 9.4 ± 0.9 (67.9 ± 6.5) 7.9 ± 0.8 (57.0 ± 5.8) 20 ± 2 (144 ± 14) 17.2 ± 1.7 (124 ± 12) 37 ± 4 (267 ± 29) 31 ± 3 (224 ± 22)
M20 P=1.5 19 ± 9 (137 ± 14) 15.8 ± 1.6 (114 ± 14) 41 ± 4 (296 ± 29) 34 ± 3 (246 ± 22) 74 ± 7 (535 ± 51) 62 ± 6 (448 ± 43)
M24 P=2 32 ± 3 (231 ± 22) 27 ± 3 (195 ± 22) 70 ± 7 (506 ± 51) 58 ± 6 (419 ± 43) 126 ± 12 (910 ± 87) 105 ± 10 (758 ± 72)
M30 P=2 65 ± 6 (469 ± 43) 54 ± 5 (390 ± 36) 142 ± 14 (1030 ± 100) 118 ± 12 (852 ± 87) 255 ± 26 (1840 ± 190) 212 ± 21 (1530 ± 150)
M36 P=3 109 ± 11 (787 ± 79) 91 ± 9 (657 ± 65) 238 ± 23 (1720 ± 170) 198 ± 20 (1430 ± 140) 428 ± 43 (3090 ± 310) 357 ± 36 (2580 ± 260)
6 — 15
B. NUTS AND SLEEVES
B
SLEEVE NUT
O.D. (Ø) O.D. (Ø)
TUBE SIZE OPPOSING FLATS

MANUFACTURER'S WORKING PRESSURE TORQUE VALUE
O.D. X THICKNESS mm
NAME kgf/cm2 (psi) kgf·m (lbf·ft)
mm (in) Dimension B
10 X 1.5 (0.394 X 0.059) 19 4.5 ± 0.5 (33 ± 4)
15 X 2.0 (0.591 X 0.079) 27 15 ± 2 (108 ± 14)
350 (4,980)
NIPPON A.M.C 18 X 2.5 (0.709 X 0.098) 32 18 ± 2 (130 ± 14)
Travel line only
22 X 3.0 (0.866 X 0.118) 36 22 ± 2 (159 ± 14)
28 X 4.0 (1.10 X 0.157) 41 28 ± 3 (203 ± 22)
350 (4,980)
IHARA KOATSU 35 X 5.0 (1.38 X 0.20) 55 35 ± 4.5 (253 ± 33)
Travel line only
C. FLARE TYPE FITTING JOINTS D. N2 (NYLON) TUBE FITTING JOINTS

Overtightening of flare type (Union nut type) metal joints
may cause damage to nuts, seat surfaces and prevent 1. Clean tube and make certain tube end is trimmed
smooth.
optimum sealing resulting in oil leaks.
2. Insert tube into fitting until tube end is securely seated
1. Pipe Threads
Unit : kgf·m (lbf·ft) in fitting body.
NOMINAL SIZE TORQUE VALUE
3. Tighten the nut by hand.
1 / 4˝ 2.5 ± 0.3 (18.1 ± 1.8)
3 / 8˝ 5 ± 0.5 (36.2 ± 3.6) 4. Use a spanner wrench, securely tighten nut by turn-
1 / 2˝ 6 ± 0.6 (43.4 ± 4.3) ing 1-1/4 turns.
3 / 4˝ 12 ± 1.2 (86.8 ± 8.7) PLASTIC SLEEVE
1˝ 14 ± 1.4 (101 ± 10)

1-1 / 4˝ 17 ± 1.7 (123 ± 12)
1-1 / 2˝ 21 ± 2.1 (152 ± 15)
2˝ 42 ± 4.2 (304 ± 30)
BODY NUT NYLON

TUBE
E. ORS JOINT (O-RING SEALING TYPE)
OPPOSING FLATS TORQUE VALUE WORKING PRESSURE

NOMINAL SIZE
mm kgf·m (lbf·ft) kgf/cm2 (psi)
1-14 UNS 30 • 32 14 ± 1.4 (101 ± 10) 350 (4,980)
Hose mouth ring
1-3/16 12 UN 36 • 41 18 ± 1.8 (130 ± 13) 385 (5,475)
and coupling
1-7/16 12 UN 41 • 46 21 ± 2.1 (152 ± 15) (Power Boost)
CONNECTOR O-RING NIPPLE
NUT
6 — 16
F. TORQUE VALUES FOR MOST COMMON BOLTS
Follow the table below and tighten or retighten every capscrew and nut. Check for any loose or missing capscrews or
nuts before daily operation and during periodical inspections. Retighten or supply new parts for missing ones as
required.
Size Q'ty Location Tightening torque kgf•m (lbf·ft)

M5 5 • Sending unit mounting (fuel tank) • 0.2 ± 0.02 (1.4 ± 0.1)
M6 6 • A/C Condenser mounting • 0.45 ± 0.1 (3.2 ± 0.7)
4 • Muffler mounting (Nut-Upper) • 1.1 ± 0.1 (7.9 ± 0.7)
M8 4 • Muffler mounting (Nut-Lower) • 0.9 ± 0.09 (6.5 ± 0.7)
4 • A/C compressor mounting • 2.7 ± 0.3 (20 ± 2.2)
6 • Swivel joint dust cover mounting • 1.5 ± 0.2 (10.8 ± 1.4)
2 • Slewing grease bath inspection cover mounting • 3.0 ± 0.3 (21.7 ± 2.2)
16 • Floor plate rubber mouting • 4.7 ± 0.5 (34 ± 3.6)
M10 4 • Air cleaner mounting • 4.0 ± 0.4 (29 ± 2.9) Apply Loctite #262
12 • Power take-up bracket mounting • 4.0 ± 0.4 (30 ± 2.9) Apply Loctite #262
12 • Hydraulic oil tank cover mounting • 4.7 ± 0.5 (34 ± 4.0)
2 • Lower frame grease cover mounting • 1.1 ± 0.1 (7.9 ± 0.7)
3 • Swivel joint mounting • 11 ± 1.0 (80 ± 7) Apply Loctite #262
8 • Cab mounting • 11 ± 1.5 (80 ± 11)
M12 8 • Engine mounting (Rear side) • 7.5 ± 0.8 (54 ± 5.8) Apply Loctite #262
4 • Engine mounting (Front side) • 10 ± 1.0 (72 ± 7) Apply Loctite #262
14 • Travel motor cover mounting • 8.5 ± 0.5 (62 ± 4)
6 • Fuel tank mounting • 22 ± 2.0 (159 ± 14) Apply Loctite #262
M16
4 • Floor plate rubber mounting nut • 19 ± 2.0 (137 ± 14)
4 • Engine mounting • 39 ± 4.0 (282 ± 29) Apply Loctite #271
M18
8 • Power take-up coupling mounting • 33 ± 3.0 (238 ± 22)
4 • Hydraulic pump mounting • 44 ± 4.0 (318 ± 29) Apply Loctite #262
4 • Idler and idler adjuster connection • 55 ± 5.5 (398 ± 40) Apply Loctite #262
4 • Radiator mounting • 57 ± 6.0 (412 ± 43) Apply Loctite #262
M20
4 • Hydraulic tank mounting • 55 ± 6.0 (398 ± 43) Apply Loctite #262
4 • Upper roller mounting • 55 ± 5.5 (398 ± 40) Apply Loctite #262
52 • Sprocket mounting • 55 ± 5.5 (398 ± 40) Apply Loctite #262
56
• Lower roller mounting • 75 ± 7.5 (542 ± 54) Apply Loctite #262
(72-LC,NLC)
M22
180
• Shoe bolt mounting • 120 ± 12 (868 ± 87) Apply SAE30 CD
(192-LC,NLC)
10 • Side cutter mounting (GD) • 105 ± 5 (759 ± 36)
35 • Slewing bearing outer race mounting • 95 ± 9.5 (687 ± 69) Apply Loctite #262
36 • Slewing bearing inner race mounting • 95 ± 9.5 (687 ± 69) Apply Loctite #262
M24
14 • Swing reduction unit mounting • 95 ± 9.5 (687 ± 69) Apply Loctite #262
36 • Travel motor mounting • 95 ± 9.5 (687 ± 69) Apply Loctite #262
8 • Track guide mounting • 95 ± 9.5 (687 ± 69) Apply Loctite #262
M27 10 • Side cutter mounting (HD) • 160 ± 16 (1157 ± 115)
M36 4 • Counterweight mounting • 300 ± 30 (2170 ± 217) Apply Loctite #262
5/8-18 2 • Idler adjuster grease nipple mounting •6±1 (43 ± 7)
UNF
6 — 17
6.4 MISCELLANEOUS INFORMATION D. CAPS AND PLUGS FOR TUBES AND HOSE FITTINGS
A. TEMPERATURE TABLE C
˚C ˚F ˚C ˚F ˚C ˚F ˚C ˚F ˚C ˚F ˚C ˚F Tube & Hose Plugs

-10 14 55 131 120 248 185 365 250 482 315 599
-5 23 60 140 125 257 190 374 255 491 320 608
0 32 65 149 130 266 195 383 260 500 325 617
5 41 70 158 135 275 200 392 265 509 330 626 B
10 50 75 167 140 284 205 401 270 518 335 635
15 59 80 176 145 293 210 410 275 527 340 644 A
20 68 85 185 150 302 215 419 280 536 345 653
25 77 90 194 155 311 220 428 285 245 350 662
30 86 95 203 160 320 225 437 290 554 355 671
35 95 100 212 165 329 230 446 295 563 360 680
TUBE "A" INTERNAL "B" NUT "C" EXTERNAL
40 104 105 221 170 338 235 455 300 572 365 689 DIA. (For hose end) (Use with "A") (For tube end)
45 113 110 230 175 347 240 464 305 581 370 698
10 mm ZF83P10000 ZF93N10000 ZF83H10000
50 122 115 239 180 356 245 473 310 590 375 707
15 mm ZF83P15000 ZF93N15000 ZF83H15000
Example of how to convert 45˚C to ˚F:
18 mm ZF83P18000 ZF93N18000 ZF83H18000
˚F = 1.8 X ˚C + 32 ˚F = 1.8 X 45 + 32 = 81 + 32 = 113˚F
22 mm ZF83P22000 ZF93N22000 ZF83H22000
Example of how to convert 122˚F to ˚C
˚C = 0.56 (˚F - 32) ˚C = 0.56 (122 - 32) = 0.56 X 90 = 50˚C 28 mm ZF83P28000 ZF93N28000 ZF83H28000
35 mm ZF83P35000 ZF93N35000 ZF83H35000
B. SPECIAL PIPE WRENCHES
A
B
G C Male PF Plugs
"D"
"C"
D
F E Unit : mm (in) "B"
TUBE PART
A B C D E F G
DIA. No.
15 27 70 22 12.7 8 40 16
2421T160 "A"
(0.591) (1.06) (2.76) (0.87) (0.50) (0.32) (1.57) (0.63)
Dia. (ø)
18 32 70 22 12.7 11 42 19
2421T138
(0.709) (1.26) (2.76) (0.87) (0.50) (0.43) (1.65) (0.75)
22 36 70 22 12.7 11.5 48 23
2421T130
(0.866) (1.42) (2.76) (0.87) (0.50) (0.44) (1.89) (0.91)
28 41 109 22 12.7 14.5 60 29 60˚
2421T115
(1.10) (1.614) (4.29) (0.87) (0.50) (0.57) (2.36) (1.14)
35 55 90 45 20 20.5 81 41 Unit : mm
2421T314
(1.38) (2.17) (3.54) (1.77) (0.79) (0.81) (3.19) (1.61) PLUG PART "A" "B" "C" "D"
SIZE NUMBER O.D. (Ø) LENGTH LENGTH FLATS
C. WEIGHT OF MATERIALS TABLE PF 1/4 2444Z2728D1 13.5 16.5 24.5 14
lb/yd3 kg/m3 Material (loose weight) PF 3/8 2444Z2728D2 16.6 17.5 25.5 17
700 420 Wood chips
PF 1/2 2444Z2728D3 20.6 20.0 31.0 22
750 440 Peat, dry
950 560 Cinders PF 3/4 2444Z2728D4 26.2 21.5 34.0 27
1170 690 Peat, wet PF 1 2444Z2728D5 33.3 23.5 36.0 36
1600 950 Topsoil
1780 1050 Coal
2100 1250 Calcite
2100 1250 Earth, loam Female PF caps
2250 1330 Shale
SIZE PART NUMBER
2400 1420 Sand, dry
2500 1480 Clay, dry PF 1/4 2444Z2729D1
2550 1510 Earth, dry PF 3/8 2444Z2729D2
2600 1540 Limestone, broken or crushed PF 1/2 2444Z2729D3
Thread Screw
2700 1600 Earth, wet
PF 3/4 2444Z2729D4
2800 1660 Clay, wet
2800 1660 Rock, granite, blasted & broken PF 1 2444Z2729D5
2850 1690 Sand, moist PF 1 1/4 2444Z2729D6
2900 1720 Sand and gravel, dry
3100 1840 Sand, wet
3400 2020 Sand and gravel, wet
6 — 18
Section VII – TROUBLESHOOTING
Table of Contents
GENERAL TROUBLESHOOTING ............................................................................................................... 7-1 ~ 7-3

7—0
7.1 GENERAL TROUBLESHOOTING
This troubleshooting information covers the compo- replacement of components or adjustment of valves
nents and systems as described in this operator’s be required, contact KOBELCO distributor for assis-
manual. Should in depth troubleshooting, repair or tance.
SYS PROBLEM PROBABLE CAUSE POSSIBLE REMEDY

a . Low hydraulic oil level a. Fill oil to specified level
a. Tighten suction pipe hose
b. Air leaking into the suction pipe
1. All operating speeds clamp or replace hose
are slow or power is c . Hydraulic pump damaged a. Repair or replace
lost d. Pilot gear pump damaged a. Repair or replace
e . Main relief valve is not adjusted correctly a. Adjust or replace
f . Pilot relief valve is not adjusted correctly a. Adjust or replace
a . Cylinder seal is damaged a. Repair or replace
2. A specific cylinder b. Control valve or overload valve functions incorrectly a. Repair or replace/Bleed
functions improperly or there are signs of air in the cylinder air from cylinder
or loses power c . Pilot valve is damaged a. Repair or replace
d. Pilot valve piping is loose a. Retighten
3. The cylinder position a . Cylinder seal is scored a. Repair or replace
will not hold with b. Control valve or overload valve is damaged a. Repair or replace
OPERATING
operating lever in c. Overload valve is not operating a. Repair or replace

neutral d. Pilot valve is damaged a. Repair or replace
a . Brake valve is not working a. Repair or replace
b. Hydraulic motor (swing) is not working or swing gear
a. Repair or replace
4. Machine does not is damaged
swing c . Swing bearing is damaged a. Repair or replace
d. Pilot valve is not working a. Repair or replace
e . Swing reduction unit is damaged a. Repair or replace
a . Brake valve is not working a. Repair or replace
b. Control valve is not working a. Repair or replace
5. Swing speed is slow
c . Hydraulic motor (swing) is not working a. Repair or replace
d. Hydraulic pump is not working a. Repair or replace
6. Abnormal sound a . Insufficient lubrication of swing gear and bearings a. Grease
occurs when swinging b. Low oil level in the swing reduction unit a. Refill with proper oil
7. "With swing stopped, a . Brake valve malfunctions a. Repair or replace
the machine drifts b. Set pressure of brake valve is incorrect a. Adjust or replace
and is hard to control" c . Brake lining is worn a. Repair or replace
a . Too much track tension a. Adjust track tension
1. Machine does not b. Dirty track links and shoes a. Clean tracks
travel smoothly c . Brake valve is not working a. Repair or replace
d. Travel reduction unit is damaged a. Repair or replace
a . Hydraulic pump is damaged a. Repair or replace
b. Poor engine performance a. Repair or replace
TRAVEL
c . Main relief valve pressure is set incorrectly a. Adjust or replace

2. Traveling power is
d. Low hydraulic oil level a. Fill to proper level
insufficient
e . Hydraulic motor (travel) is not working a. Repair or replace
f . Brake valve is not working a. Repair or replace
g. Seal in swivel joint is scored or oil is leaking a. Repair or replace
a . Unequal tensions on tracks a. Adjust tension
3. Machine does not
b. Set pressures of main relief valves unbalanced a. Adjust.
travel in a straight
line c . Performances of hydraulic travel motor has
a. Repair or replace
deteriorated
7—1

a . Oil cooler core clogged a. Clean
HYDRAULIC
b. Engine fan belt slipping a. Adjust or replace

1. Temperature rise in
c . Low hydraulic oil level a. Refill to specified level
the hydraulic oil
tank. a. Replace with correct,
d. Wrong type hydraulic oil used
new oil
e . Hydraulic pump is not working a. Repair or replace
1. Engine oil pressure is a . Engine oil level low a. Fill to specified level
too low. (Buzzer sounds b. Oil leaking a. Repair & fill to proper level
GAUGE CLUSTER DISPLAY
and icon displays) c . Wrong oil viscosity a. Replace with proper oil
a . Low coolant a. Fill to proper level
b. Coolant leaking a. Repair & fill to proper level
2. Abnormal rise in the c . Loose radiator cap a. Tighten
coolant temperature
d. Radiator core clogged a. Clean cooling system
(Buzzer sounds and
icon displays) e . V-belt loose or damaged a. Tighten to proper tension
f . Rust or scale in coolant a. Flush system / fill to level
g. Faulty thermostat a. Replace
a . Clogged air cleaner a. Replace elements
3. Air cleaner clogged
b. Hoses from air cleaner to turbo clogged a. Clean, repair or replace
a . Battery disconnected a. Connect
1. Starter does not turn b. Battery discharged a. Charge
or turns slowly which
c . Battery terminals disconnected, loose, or corroded a. Clean and connect
does not start the
engine d. Ground cable disconnected a. Connect
e . Engine oil viscosity too thick (Cold weather) a. Change to proper oil
a . Insufficient fuel a. Refuel
b. Improper starting procedure a. Refer to pages 3-2~3-4
2. Starter turns but c . Air in fuel line a. Bleed
engine does not start d. Clogged fuel filter a. Replace element
e . Clogged air cleaner a. Replace elements
f . Air heater circuit malfunctioning a. Check circuit
a . Low idling RPM a. KOBELCO serviceman
3. Engine tends to stop b. Fuel filter clogged a. Replace element
at low speed c . Air cleaner clogged a. Replace element
ENGINE
d. Improper valve clearance a. KOBELCO serviceman

a . Fuel filter clogged a. Replace element
b. Air cleaner clogged a. Replace elements
4. No power c . Improper valve clearance a. KOBELCO serviceman
d. Loose clamps on the air inlet hose (with turbo charger) a. Tighten clamps
e . Cracked air inlet hose (with turbo charger) a. Replace hose
a . Insufficient coolant a. Refill coolant
b. Clogged radiator a. Clean cooling components
5. Engine overheats
c . V-belt to loose or damaged a. Adjust or replace belt
d. Faulty thermostat a. Replace
6. Engine exhaust is a . Air cleaner clogged a. Replace elements
black b. Improper valve clearance a. KOBELCO serviceman
a . Fuel leak a. KOBELCO serviceman
7. Poor fuel b. Air cleaner clogged a. Replace elements
consumption c . Loose clamps on suction hose (with turbo charger) a. Tighten clamps
d. Cracked suction hose (with turbo charger) a. Replace w/new hose
7—2

a . Improper oil a. Replace with correct oil
8. Excessive oil b. Oil leak a. KOBELCO serviceman
consumption c . Improper oil replacement intervals a. Change at correct interval
d. Improper warming-up operation a. Refer to page 3-6
ENGINE
a . Low oil volume a. Fill to specified level

9. Engine oil pressure
b. Oil leak a. KOBELCO serviceman
does not rise
c . Improper oil viscosity a. Replace with proper oil
a . Battery terminals disconnected loose, or corroded a. Clean & tighten terminals
b. Low battery electrolyte a. Fill cells w/distilled water
10. Battery dies often
c . V-belt loose or damaged a. Adjust or replace belt
d. Defective battery a. Replace battery
7—3
Section VIII – SCHEMATICS
Table of Contents
ELECTRIC CIRCUIT DIAGRAM (A) (Applicable No. LC08-06201~06322, YC08-03001~03087) ............. 8-1
ELECTRIC CIRCUIT DIAGRAM (B) (Applicable No. LC08-06201~06322, YC08-03001~03087) ............. 8-2
ELECTRIC CIRCUIT DIAGRAM (C) (Applicable No. LC08-06201~06322, YC08-03001~03087) ............. 8-3
ELECTRIC CIRCUIT DIAGRAM (D) (Applicable No. LC08-06201~06322, YC08-03001~03087) ............. 8-4
ELECTRIC CIRCUIT DIAGRAM (A) (Applicable No. LC09-06323~, YC09-03088~) ................................. 8-5
ELECTRIC CIRCUIT DIAGRAM (B) (Applicable No. LC09-06323~, YC09-03088~) ................................. 8-6
ELECTRIC CIRCUIT DIAGRAM (C) (Applicable No. LC09-06323~, YC09-03088~) ................................. 8-7
ELECTRIC CIRCUIT DIAGRAM (D) (Applicable No. LC09-06323~, YC09-03088~) ................................. 8-8

8—0
8.1 SK330(LC)-6E & SK330NLC-6E ELECTRICAL SCHEMATICS
8 FUEL SUPPLY PUMP
CONVERTER BACK UP
ENG.CONTROLLER
4 ENG.CONTROLLER
A. ELECTRIC CIRCUIT DIAGRAM (A)
RY 1B CONTROLLER
Applicable No. LC08-06201~06322
5 CIGARETTE
MECHATRO
YB 9 ROOM LIGHT
LIGHTER
KEY SW.
YC08-03001~03087 C-6 : ENG. CONTROLLER
RELAY
HORN
SW-45 : MEMORY RESET SW.
RY 1A
3A
3B
WV 10
WY 2
WG 6
328 GrR 301 Sb B SW-44 :
4 6-82 6-71
1.25
1.25
WV
DIAG DISPLAY SW. (NORMAL CONNECT)
YL
G
302 BrW
Y
R 6-37
F-1 : FUSE BOX 3B 6-93
E-18 : Q-ADJ RESISTOR
20A
10A
10A
10A
10A
10A
20A
10A
20A
G
51 2W 3A 6-92 303 BrG
6-46
54 2R 52 5R E4 B
22 6-99 Y
55 1.25WP 4 16
E5 B
50 1.25L 23 6-100 304 GB
53 5Y 6-56 7
SHIELD
305 GL
10A
20A
10A
20A
10A
20A
20A
20A
10A
20A
6-58 1 ENG.CONTROLLER CHECK CONNECTOR
C-6 : B
4
ENG. CONTROLLER
WG
1.25
1.25
RW
1.25
1.25
1.25
RESERVE 20 1.25
WR
WB
RG
WL
B
RB
CONVERTER 11 OL
RL
B
W
6-87 5 MMC ENG. HARNESS
23 22
B
FLASHER WORK 12
CLUSTER 13
WIPER, 14
SOLENOID 15
WORK 16
OPT. WORK 17
AIR CON. 18
AIR CON. 19
6-42
WASHER
LIGHT
306 W Y SE-30 :
GAUGE
LIGHT ALARM
6-4
ENG. REVOLUTION
LIGHT
C-1 : 307 B B SENSOR FOR ELECTRIC
6-15
MECHATRO GOVENOR CONT.
SHIELD
CONTROLLER 55 1.25WP
4 3 SHIELD
6-54
54 G
308 G
6-34
E4 B
309 B
6-52
54 R
310 R R VB
6-33
E5 W
311 W W POWER GND
6-51
SHIELD
60A 312 LW L PWM
6-35
51 G
60A 313 BW G
E-12 : E-12 : 6-43 BUF VIST
E2 B
BATTERY BATTERY 314 YV Y
6-36 VCC
51 R 60B 60B 60B
315 BrY Br SIGNAL GND
B 6-53
E3 W 67 BG
6-1 316 BP B PULL DOWN
6-9
GOV.
SHIELD R-22 :
700 WG 6-60 317 V V
ENG. EMERGENCY STOP RELAY 6-22 LIMP HOME
R-21 : KEY ON 62 W
R
R-1 : BATTERY RELAY 6-61 VB
GLOW
RELAY W POWER GND
POSITION
SW-1 : 4 2
PREHEATING
TERMINAL
KEY SW. D-9 318 LY L

60 WL 59 W 6-44 PWM
762 GL
58 P
START
319 BrB Br
6-17 SIGNAL GND
ACC
OFF
D-1
ON
331 YB Y
10 1.25WV 6-45 VCC
10 B
ENGINE START 63 WY 320 WR O
ACC 6-65 6-5 NE SENSOR 2
M
61 GrB L-13 : DIAG LAMP (RED)
60B
G1 R-3 : GLOW RELAY 329 LgR

G2 GLOW 4 6-91
63 WY 33 20B 34 20B
ST
B
330 Lg
6-40
B M E D-4
M-1 : STARTER MOTOR L-14 : DIAG LAMP (ORANGE)
66 5L
S
E-2 : ALTERNATOR 323 YR YL
M-2 : STARTER RELAY 64 LW B 6-75
S E 5B
B E WATER TEMP.
D-3 66 L SENSOR
59 W 324 BrL Y
R R 6-27
30 G
P P 325 L (5V) YR
65 WR 6-6
L L 326 OL (SIG) LW BOOST
6-18
R-4 : SAFETY RELAY 327 GrL (GND) GW SENSOR
6-28
C-1 : MECHATRO CONTROLLER
E-3 : HOUR METER 781 R ACCEL 1

16-16 16-13 (SIG) 6-73
65 WR B 780 W
H·M ACCEL 1
16-14 (GND) 6-83
SHIELD
ACCEL 2
15-24 (SIG) 6-50
CHARGE 65 WR ACCEL 2
12-13 (GND) 6-84
KEY ON 60 WL
12-15
PREHEATING 61 GrB
12-16
RY
1A 15-12
E2 B
CONTROLLER EARTH 3 15-25
RY
1B 15-13
E3 B
CONTROLLER EARTH 4 15-26 TO PAGE
YB 15-14 8-2
9
LC03Z00020P1 (01)
8—1
B. ELECTRIC CIRCUIT DIAGRAM (B) FROM
PAGE 8-1
YC08-03001~03087 WR (5V) C-1 :
11-33 MECHATRO CONTROLLER
SE-16 : 517 P
11-32
ACCEL POTENTIO 967 BW (GND)
11-31
PRESS.SENSOR 900 RB (5V)
11-15
SE-1 : 500 LgR
11-14
BUCKET DIGGING 950 BrR (GND)
11-13
901 RL (5V)
SCHEMATIC NOMENCLATURE SE-2 : 501 LgW
11-16
11-17
BUCKET DUMP 951 BL (GND)
SYMBOL COLOR Example of wire color : 11-18
902 W (5V)
SE-3 : 502 LgY 11-3
B Black BOOM RAISING 952 BR (GND)
11-2
11-1
N
903 OB (5V) IO AL SE
G Green SIT RM LEA
TERMINAL
Stripe color (Blue) SE-4 : 503 LO
11-4
11-5
PO NO RE
BOOM LOWERING SW-4 : SWING PARKING RELEASE SW.
953 BrW (GND)
L Blue 904 OL (5V)
11-6
545 Lg
11-9 12-18 1 SV-1 :
R Red Base color (White) SE-7 : ARM IN
504 PG
954 BrL (GND)
11-8 2
720 PB B
SWING PARKING
11-7 701 V
15-22 3 BRAKE SOL.
905 OW (5V)
W White SE-8 : ARM OUT
505 PL
11-10
11-11 702 LgB B SV-3 :
15-21
Abreviations : BZ • • • • • Buzzer 955 Gr (GND) 11-12 TWO-SPEED SELECT SOL.
Y Yellow 906 YB (5V) 703 P B SV-2 :
SV • • • • • Solenoid valve SE-6 : 506 VY
11-21
11-20
15-23
POWER BOOST SOL.
P Pink SW • • • • Switch SWING RIGHT 956 GrL (GND) 11-19
907 YG (5V)
O Orange SE • • • • • Sensor SE-5 : 507 VG
11-22 15-6
740 BO PSV-B :
11-23 741 GrR P2 BY-PASS CUT
SWING LEFT 957 Br (GND)
Br Brown M • • • • • • Motor 908 YL (5V)
11-24 15-7 PROPORTIONAL SOL.
11-27
Lg Light Green R • • • • • • • Relay SE-9 : 508 VY
11-26 15-8
742 VR PSV-C :
TRAVEL PRIORITY
TRAVEL RIGHT 958 BY (GND) 743 GrB
11-25
L • • • • • • • Light 909 YR (5V)
15-9 PROPORTIONAL SOL.
Gr Gray SE-10 :
11-28
PSV • • • Proportional solenoid valve TRAVEL LEFT
509 Sb
959 BG (GND)
11-29 15-4
744 BP PSV-D :
P1 BY-PASS CUT
Sb Sky Blue D • • • • • • • Diode
11-30 15-5
745 PW
PROPORTIONAL SOL.
910 WY (5V)
12-9
SE-26 :
V Violet E • • • • • • • Electrical fitting P1 NEGA-CON.
510 GR
960 BY (GND)
12-8 15-10
746 BrG PSV-A :
PUMP VALUABLE
12-7 747 YV
15-11 RECIRCULATION
911 RG (5V)
SE-27 : 511 LY
12-11
P2 NEGA-CON. 961 BW (GND)
12-12
912 RW (5V)
SE-28 : 13-15
512 Sb
BACK PRESS. 13-14
962 GrG (GND)
13-13
915 YL (5V)
12-3
515 V 749 GrG
SE-22 : PUMP P1 12-2 15-18 PSV-P1 :
965 BrB (GND)
12-1 748 VR PUMP P1
916 YR (5V)
12-4
516 L
C-2 : CLUSTER GAUGE SE-23 : PUMP P2 12-5
966 BrY (GND)
12-6
W 21-7
13 751 GY
SE-14 : ENG. WATER 913 RB (5V) 15-20 PSV-P2 :
600 YR 21-3 TEMP INDICATOR 13-4 PUMP P2
COOLANT THERMO 513 LgR 750 VW
C-1 : SE-20 : P1 OPT. 13-5 15-19 PROPORTIONAL SOL.
SENSOR 553 VW 963 BW (GND)
5 MECHATRO 13-6
CONTROLLER FUEL METER 914 RL (5V)
B 601 BrR 21-4 13-3
SE-15 :FUEL SENSOR 514 GO
SE-11 : P2 OPT. 13-2
964 BL (GND)
13-1 738 WG
16-7 PSV-H :
739 G SWING PRIORITY
16-8
PROPORTIONAL SOL.
B 542 GrG
SW-21 : POWER BOOST SW. 14-11
B 543 GO
SW-35 : HEAVY LIFT SW. 17-9
B
21-6
A M B SE-13 : 580 W
12-20
ENG. REVOLUTION SENSOR 581 B
FOR MECHATRO CONTROLLER 12-21
LCD SHIELD
12-22
21-2 770 R
14-25
21-1 582 W
14-26
21-8 980 B
14-27
SHIELD
14-28
DISPLAY BUZZER MODE WASHER

SELECT STOP
SW.
LED LED
TO PAGE 8-3
TRAVEL DECEL WORKING WIPER
SPEED LIGHT
SELECT SW.
8—2
C. ELECTRIC CIRCUIT DIAGRAM (C) C-1 : MECHATRO CONTROLLER C-3 : SW.BOX ASSY
FROM
Applicable No. LC08-06201~06322 PAGE 8-2
JIB
JIB + N&B
YC08-03001~03087 JIB + EXTRA
JIB + N&B + EXTRA
547 GB
SW-6 : ENG. WATER TEMP. SW. 14-1 32-12 590 LY SW-43 : JIB PRESS. SW.
OPT.
548 GY
SW-7 : ENG. OIL PRESS. SW. 14-2
32-8 562 O SW-43 : WARM-UP SW.
B 549 Lg
SW-8 : AIR FILTER RESTRICTION SW. 14-3 930 RG (5V) 31-6
14-18
B 550 BG 704 LgR 31-4 32-9 564 LY 982 BG SW-15 :
SW-23 : ENG.OIL LEVEL SW. 14-5 14-20 17
705 LG 31-3 CONFLUX / SINGLE SELECT SW.
14-21 C-3
B 551 GL 706 VW 31-2
SW-24 : ENG. COOLANT LEVEL SW. 14-6 14-22 OPT.
707 LY 31-1
B 552 BrL 14-23
SW-25 : HYD. FLUID LEVEL SW. 14-7 556 BrW 31-5 R-5 : HORN RELAY
14-19
330Ω 981 GW (GND) 31-8 6 WG 83 GO B
60 RY 14-24 6 E-5 : HORN HIGH
1B
84 WR B B
553 VW
E-6 : HORN LOW
SE-15 : FUEL SENSOR 5 14-8 SW-10 : HORN SW.
982 BG (GND) 31-7

17
SW-15 :
B 563 O CONFLUX / SINGLE
SW-37 : HYD.FLUID TEMP.SW. 17-8 L-5 : ROOM LIGHT
SELECT SW.
9 YB
9
5 YL B
5 E-14 : CIGARETTE LIGHTER
R-7 : WIPER RELAY ASSY

B 566 LW WY
SW-42 : ENG. OIL FILTER SW. 16-15 2
2
PREVENT SPARK WIPER MOTOR RELAY
RELAY E-10 :
1.25RB 1 3 80 GrR M-3 : RECEIVER DRIER
14 R-6 : E-11 : AIR COMPRESSOR CLUTCH
708 LR 6 WIPER MOTOR 85 WB C-4 : 150 BP 155 BR
14-12 WORKING LIGHT 7
AIR
B 583 VW 540 LG 709 GB 7 18 1.25WG CON. 1.25B SW-13 :
13-16 14-13 18
AMP. AIR CONDITIONER SW.
SW-39 : SW-12 : WIPER MOTOR
19 RL 151 R
OVER LOAD OVER LOAD REVERSING RELAY B 19 24V 24V
B 10 152 G
DETECT SW. ALARM SELECT SW. 4 81 GrB TXD RXD
710 Gr 8 153 W
14-14 RXD TXD
154 B
GND
SHIELD
WINDOW WASHER M-4 :
MOTOR RELAY WASHER MOTOR
5 COOLING
82 GO B
UNIT
711 GrL 9
14-15
557 L
14-9
558 G
14-10
R-20 : TIMER
15
15 WB 87 YV E D 86 OW B
SW-11 : SV-4 :
LEVER LOCK SW. OPERATING LEVER LOCK SOL.
B
TIMER A
17-11
TO PAGE
8-4
8—3
D. ELECTRIC CIRCUIT DIAGRAM (D)
YC08-03001~03087 C-1 :
MECHATRO CONTROLLER
FROM
PAGE 8-3
E-22 : DC-DC CONVERTER

OL 96 WG
11 IGN 12V
E-23 : 12V SOCKET
YB 97 YV
9 24V MEM
B
B
GND
ANT. E-7 : TUNER AM & FM

98 LW
1 (+)
99 Br E-8 : SPEAKER LEFT
7 (-)
100 LR
PB 559 B 96 WG 2 (+)
17-13 SW-19 : WIPER INTERLOCK SW. 4 101 OB E-9 : SPEAKER RIGHT
8 (-)
R-6 : WB 97 YV (BACK UP) B
L-6 : BOOM WORKING LIGHT RIGHT 11 9
WORK LIGHT RELAY
16
1.25 RW 85 1.25WB WB
L-1 : BOOM WORKING LIGHT LEFT
WY
2 7 WB B
C-4 : L-2 : FRAME WORKING LIGHT RIGHT
INSTALLED ON THE SPOT
713 BrY AIR CONDITIONER AMP.
14-16
R-19 : FLASHER RELAY L-3 SWING FLASHER LEFT & REAR WORKING LIGHT
RG 401 GR W
12
R R-9 : CAB WORKING LIGHT RELAY 1
1.25WL 90 RY RY B L-7 :
714 WB 17 CAB WORKING LIGHT FRONT 1
14-17
WL 89 BrL B RY B L-8 :
715 GW 402 YG Y SW-26 : CAB WORKING LIGHT FRONT 2
17-3
CAB WORKING RY B L-15 :
LIGHT SW. CAB WORKING LIGHT FRONT 3
716 WV 1.25WL 92 RW RW B L-16 :
17-4 403 Br R B B CAB WORKING LIGHT FRONT 4
WL 89 RW B L-18 :
SW-9 : CAB WORKING LIGHT BACK
B 560 LgY RW B
SWING FLASHER 17-10
R-11 : CAB WORKING LIGHT RELAY 2 L-17 : BACK LIGHT
SW.
401 GR W
R OPT.
SW-40 :
ROTARY LIGHT SW.
WL 91 Y B
402 YG Y 17 L-10 : ROTARY LIGHT
JIB + EXTRA 403 Br R B B

M-11 : FUEL SUPPLY PUMP
SW-46 : EXTRA PRESS. SW. 15A
L-4 : 8
1.25WL B
B 593 GY 591 WY SWING FLASHER RIGHT & REAR WORKING LIGHT
14-4
D-5 SW-16 : L-11 :
ENG.ROOM LIGHT SW. ENG. ROOM LIGHT
YB B
9
594 LgY 592 VY
17-12
POWER SHIFT D-6
OPT. SW-47 : SV-11 :
EXTRA & BREAKER SW. EXTRA SOL.
15
WB 94 RL B
OPT.
8—4
8.2 SK330(LC)-6E & SK330NLC-6E ELECTRICAL SCHEMATICS
A. ELECTRIC CIRCUIT DIAGRAM (A)
YC09-03088~
NOTE
Auto idling stop function
EU ...................... STD.
OCEANIA ........... OPT.
LC03Z00030P1 (01)
8—5
B. ELECTRIC CIRCUIT DIAGRAM (B)
YC09-03088~
SCHEMATIC NOMENCLATURE
SYMBOL COLOR Example of wire color :
B Black
G Green Stripe color (Blue)
L Blue
R Red Base color (White)
W White
Abreviations : BZ • • • • • Buzzer
Y Yellow
SV • • • • • Solenoid valve
P Pink SW • • • • Switch
O Orange SE • • • • • Sensor
Br Brown M • • • • • • Motor
Lg Light Green R • • • • • • • Relay
L • • • • • • • Light
Gr Gray
PSV • • • Proportional solenoid valve
Sb Sky Blue D • • • • • • • Diode
V Violet E • • • • • • • Electrical fitting
8—6
C. ELECTRIC CIRCUIT DIAGRAM (C)
YC09-03088~
8—7
D. ELECTRIC CIRCUIT DIAGRAM (D)
YC09-03088~
8—8
Section IX – OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT
Table of Contents
HYDRAULIC BREAKER .............................................................................................................................. 9-1 ~ 9-4
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS ............................................................................................................................. 9-5 ~ 9-6
MAINTENANCE FOR NIBBLER / BREAKER ............................................................................................. 9-7
REINFORCEMENT OF ATTACHMENT ....................................................................................................... 9-7
EXTRA (GRAPPLE, CLAMSHELL, ETC.) AND EXTRA & BREAKER ....................................................... 9-8
ROTARY MULTI CONTROL VALVE (OCEANIA SPEC.) ............................................................................. 9-9

9—0
9.1 HYDRAULIC BREAKER
A. SELECTION OF THE HYDRAULIC BREAKER
When mounting the breaker on the hydraulic excavator, it is necessary to match stability, hydraulic pressure, and the
oil level for each breaker. To select hydraulic breakers, contact your KOBELCO distributor.
B. BEFORE OPERATING THE HYDRAULIC BREAKER

Consult your KOBELCO distributor for the piping or enforcement of the arm when installing the hydraulic breaker.
REPLACE THE HYDRAULIC RETURN FILTER ACCORDING TO THE REPLACEMENT SCHEDULE TABLE
LISTED ON PAGE 9-7. Thoroughly read the hydraulic breaker operation manual and SAFETY PRECAUTIONS from
this section, as well as the safety precaution’s section on this manual to avoid damaging the machine or hydraulic
breaker during operation. SELECT THE APPROPRIATE HYDRAULIC FLOW FOR THE BREAKER BY FOLLOW-
ING THE INSTRUCTIONS DETAILED IN PAGE 9-2.
C. HYDRAULIC OIL LEVEL CHECK AND CONTAMINATION PREVENTION

When the hydraulic breaker is not installed on the machine, attach the blank plugs to the tube end on the arm top end
and the hose end on the hydraulic breaker side to prevent dust and water from entering into the piping.
Before starting operation, check the capscrews on the tube fixing clamps for looseness, and the connections of the
tubes and hoses for oil leakage.
D. BASIC OPERATION

PRECAUTIONS AND OPERATION PROCEDURES
FOUND IN THIS MANUAL BEFORE OPERATING
THE MACHINE OR ANY ATTACHMENT.
SAFETY LOCK LEVER

1. Start machine and place the safety lock lever in the IN UNLOCKED
“UNLOCKED” (Down) position. See Figure 9.1. (DOWN) POSITION
2. Move throttle control to the “HI” idle position.

FIGURE 9.1
3. Using boom, arm and bucket controls set the breaker
or nibbler to desired position.
4. Release control pedal lock rod. See Figure 9.2. PUSH LOCK ROD
FORWARD
5. Make certain breaker or nibbler is in desired position TO RELEASE
and against material to be broken.

6. Place right foot on pedal and depress with toe to ac-
tivate breaker or nibbler. See Figure 9.2. PULL LOCK ROD
BACKWARD
7. Operate breaker or nibbler for one minute then re- TO LOCK PEDAL
lease pedal.
DEPRESS PEDAL
WITH TOE TO
ACTIVATE
OPERATION OF BREAKER OR NIBBLER LONGER FIGURE 9.2

THAN ONE MINUTE INTERVALS COULD CAUSE
PREMATURE WEAR OR DAMAGE TO THE ATTACH-
MENT AND THE MACHINE.
IF MATERIAL IS NOT BREAKING, REPOSITION
BREAKER OR NIBBLER AND REPEAT OPERATION NEVER LEAVE THE OPERATOR CAB WITH ENGINE
IN ONE MINUTE INTERVALS. RUNNING.
9—1
E. BREAKER AND NIBBLER SELECTOR SWITCH
This machine is provided with breaker or nibbler single
circuit and nibbler and breaker Bi direction flow circuit.
To use breaker or nibbler, select circuit appropriate to
the specification through switch on the rear side of
driver’s seat. See Figure 9.3.
1. Switch Position
Specification Switch Position Circuit
Breaker Single flow
Nibbler
Nibbler Bi direction flow
Never turn switch on (Bi direction flow) to operate

breaker. It may cause damage of machine.
FIGURE 9.3
F . SELECTION OF B (BREAKER) MODE – SEE FIG-

URE 9.4 AND 9.5 FLOW L
RATE min
In case the attachments in option like breaker, etc. are
used, the flow rate can be altered to optimum value
automatically.
Adjust the max. flow rate by the following procedure.
Each time the work mode is pressed, the work mode
indicator lamp is switched to · or in order.
1. Adjusting Max. Flow Rate

Turn the screen change switch of gauge cluster ON
within 3 to 10 seconds after turning the starter switch
ON (E/G does not start) and the mode switch to B FIGURE 9.4
(breaker) mode, and the mode is switched to adjust
mode.
KPSS WORK MODE LAMP
2. Flow Rate Display
The last stored flow rate is indicated on the display,
but the max. flow rate is initially displayed as a refer-
ence.
Each time the mode switch is pressed the displayed
value of flow rate increases, and each time the buzzer
stop switch is pressed the displayed value decreases.
Since the increasing and decreasing action starts in
2 seconds after pressing either of switches and is FLOW
RATE
L
min
KPSS WORK
indicated by graduation of 10 L/min, release the hand MODE SWITCH
immediately after the desired value of flow rate is
displayed.
The flow rate can be adjusted within the range of
max. flow rate and min. flow rate.
Turn the screen change switch ON again, and the SCREEN CHANGE SWITCH
maximum value of flow rate is stored and the adjust
mode is canceled. FIGURE 9.5
9—2
G. CONTROL PEDAL
1. Hydraulic Breaker Single Circuit

Release pedal lock on the right front side of driver’s
seat to operate pedal. See Figure 9.6.
Precaution for pedal operation.

The operation varies in the specifications, so before
operating, read the operator’s manual carefully.
Foot pedal depressing section Operating condition

Depress toe section Breaker starts operation
Pedal in neutral position Breaker stops operating PUSH LOCK ROD
FORWARD
TO RELEASE
2. Nibbler and Breaker Combined (Conflux) Circuit
Release pedal lock on the right front side of driver’s PULL LOCK ROD
DEPRESS PEDAL
seat to operate pedal. See Figure 9.6. WITH TOE TO
BACKWARD
TO LOCK PEDAL
ACTIVATE
Hydraulic breaker
Depress heel section Breaker starts operation
Pedal in neutral position Breaker stops operating FIGURE 9.6
Nibbler
Depress toe section Nibbler close
Depress heel section Nibbler open
NEVER LEAVE THE OPERATOR CAB WITH ENGINE

RUNNING.
9—3
H. SETTING SELECTOR VALVE – FIGURE 9.7
For machines provided in nibbler and breaker specifi-
cation, the selector valve installed on the main control
valve is required to be switched to the position corre-
sponding to the specification.
NOTE (A)
• Inappropriate switching of selector valve may cause

decrease of work efficiency and operating speed due to
inferior operation, and also cause damage of machine. FIGURE 9.7
Securely switch selector valve.
IN SERVICE OF BREAKER
• Be sure to switch selector valve 1 or 2 times a month TO HYD TANK
periodically. SOCKET BOLT
1. Tools Used B
TO ATT
N
SELECTOR CIRCUIT TOOLS
VALVE
Spanner (24 mm) TO C/V
MAIN
(A)
(Circuit) Allen Wrench (5 mm)
FIGURE 9.8
2. Setting Procedure – FIGURE 9.8 ~ 9.9 IN SERVICE OF NIBBLER

TO HYD TANK
a. Use a allen wrench to loosen and remove the
socket bolt.
b. Use a wrench to turn the selector valve to the proper
position. N
TO ATT
B
c. After the valve is in the proper position, tighten the

socket bolt.
TO C/V
d. Markings of the selector valve are shown below.
B : Breaker
FIGURE 9.9
N : Bi direction flow of nibbler
I . SETTING STOP VALVE – FIGURE 9.10

Stop valve on arm top end is used to stop hydraulic oil
flowing.
Free : Hydraulic oil flows.
Stop : Hydraulic oil stops flowing.
Before removing attachment, set stop valve to “STOP” (B)
position.
1. Tools Used
STOP CIRCUIT TOOLS

VALVE mm
24
MAIN
(B) Spanner (24 mm)
(Arm)
FREE STOP
FIGURE 9.10
9—4
9.2 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
The following safety precautions should be used in
conjunction with all other safety precautions found
in this manual.

PRECAUTIONS AND OPERATING PROCEDURES
THE MACHINE OR ANY ATTACHMENT.
FIGURE 9.11
A. USE FOR INTENDED PURPOSE – FIGURE 9.11

Use the attachment only for its intended purpose. If
not used in accordance with the manufactures instruc-
tions, the excessive pressure exerted on the boom,
arm and frame structure of the machine will cause pre-
mature failure of the components.
B. PASSENGERS
Never allow passengers on the attachment or machine. INSTALL GUARD
AND CLOSE WINDOWS
C. PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT – FIGURE 9.12 FIGURE 9.12

Install protective guards on the machine and close the
all window to protect the operator from flying debris.
Also the operator and all personnel in the vicinity of
the machine should wear protective gear such as safety
shoes, hard hat, gloves and face shield or goggles.
D. CYLINDERS – FIGURE 9.13

Do not operate boom, arm or bucket cylinders to stroke
ends when using a breaker attachment. Doing this can
cause undue stress on the cylinder rods and result in
damage.
FIGURE 9.13
E . AVOID CONTINUOUS OPERATION – FIGURE 9.14

Operate the breaker or nibbler in one minute intervals.
Operation for longer than one minute at a time can
Within
cause high oil temperatures and damage the accumu- One Minute
lators, cylinder seals and possibly pump damage.
FIGURE 9.14
9—5
F . HOSE SURGE – FIGURE 9.15
Should the hydraulic hoses begin to surge or vibrate
abnormally during operation of a breaker or nibbler,
immediately stop operation and contact KOBELCO
distributor for assistance. This problem often is a re-
sult in damaged accumulators and can also result in
valve failure.
FIGURE 9.15
G. DO NOT USE DROPPING FORCE – FIGURE 9.16
Never use the dropping force of the attachment to break
or drive objects. This will cause extensive damage to
the attachment and machine structure.
FIGURE 9.16
H. DO NOT USE SWING FORCE – FIGURE 9.17
Never use the swing force of the machine for pushing
or sliding objects. This will cause premature failure of
the attachment and other machine components.
FIGURE 9.17
I . DO NOT LIFT – FIGURE 9.18
Never use an optional attachment to lift or transport
objects or material. Doing so can cause extensive dam-
age to the attachment, the machine structures and
cause injury or death.
FIGURE 9.18
J . WORKING RANGES – FIGURE 9.19 UNACCEPTABLE WORK RANGE
Never operate an optional attachment over the sides
of the machine. Only operate over the front or rear of
the tracks.
ACCEPTABLE ACCEPTABLE
WORK RANGE WORK RANGE
UNACCEPTABLE WORK RANGE
FIGURE 9.19
9—6
9.3 ADDITIONAL MAINTENANCE FOR NIBBLER
/ BREAKER DEPRESS RUBBER CAP
TO RELEASE PRESSURE
It is necessary to perform the following maintenance
schedule in regard to hydraulic oil and filters along
with normal inspection and maintenance as described
in Section IV of this manual for the nibbler / breaker
optional attachment.
HYDRAULIC TANK
FIGURE 9.20
REPLACEMENT SCHEDULE
1ST 2ND REGULAR
COMPONENT LOCATION
MAINTENANCE MAINTENANCE MAINTENANCE
CHANGE HYDRAULIC OIL HYDRAULIC TANK EVERY 600 HOURS
RETURN FILTER FOR
NIBBLER/BREAKER
(P/No. YN50V00009P1) HYDRAULIC TANK 50 HOURS 250 HOURS EVERY 250 HOURS
Applicable No. : LC08-06201~06322
YC08-03001~03087
RETURN FILTER ELEMENT KIT
FOR STD & NIBBLER/BREAKER
(P/No. YN52V01008R100) HYDRAULIC TANK 50 HOURS 250 HOURS EVERY 250 HOURS
Applicable No. : LC09-06323~
YC09-03088~
9.4 REINFORCEMENT OF ATTACHMENT

The use of machine with breaker and nibbler may
cause damage of attachment. So contact your
KOBELCO distributor to reinforce arm.
9—7
9.5 EXTRA (GRAPPLE, CLAMSHELL, ETC) AND
EXTRA & BREAKER
A. BASIC OPERATION

PRECAUTIONS AND OPERATION PROCEDURES
SAFETY LOCK LEVER
IN UNLOCKED
THE MACHINE OR ANY ATTACHMENT. (DOWN) POSITION
1. Start machine and place the safety lock lever in the FIGURE 9.22
“UNLOCKED” (Down) position. See Figure 9.22.
PLACE EXTRA SWITCH
2. Move throttle control to the “HI” idle position. IN THE "ON" POSITION
3. Using boom, arm and bucket controls set the attach-

ment to desired position.
4. Place the “EXTRA” switch, located on the L.H. con-

trol console, to the “ON” position. See Fig-ure 9.23.
PRESS HERE
5. Use the boom, arm and bucket controls to po-sition FOR "OFF"
the attachment.
6. Place right foot on pedal and depress with toe to close

attachment and depress back of pedal with heel to FIGURE 9.23
open attachment. See Figure 9.24. PUSH LOCK ROD DEPRESS PEDAL
FORWARD TO RELEASE WITH TOE TO ACTIVATE
7. After operation is complete or operator is re-quired
to leave the machine, place pedal lock rod in the PULL LOCK ROD
BACKWARD
locked position, operate attachment in hydraulic oil
TO LOCK PEDAL
check position, move throttle control to “LO” idle po-
sition. EXTRA SPEC.
For machine provided in extra & breaker specification,
before starting operating, unlock left control pedal. See
Figure 9.24.
NEVER LEAVE THE OPERATOR CAB WITH ENGINE

RUNNING. PUSH LOCK ROD
FORWARD
TO RELEASE
PULL LOCK ROD

BACKWARD
DEPRESS PEDAL
TO LOCK PEDAL
WITH TOE TO
ACTIVATE BREAKER SPEC.
FIGURE 9.24
9—8
9.6 ROTARY MULTI-CONTROL VALVE KNOB (1)
This machine can provide 4 types of control pattern
(ISO, K, H, M) only by changing the lever of rotary
multi-control valve.
STOP THE ENGINE WITHOUT FAIL AT TIME OF (2)

CHANGE OVER.
A. LEVER OF ROTARY MULTI-CONTROL VALVE
1. Place the attachment to the ground, and stop the

engine. FIGURE 9.25
2. Open the radiator cover and air cleaner cover on the

machine left side with starter key.
3. Remove screw (1) and adjust the lever (2) position

ROTARY MULTI CONTROL.
to the desired control lever pattern.
CHANGEOVER PROCEDURE
SCREW
K ：KOBELCO • STOP THE ENGINE
KNOB ISO：KAWASAKI
KATO • LOOSE SCREW AND SET
NOTE IHI LEVER POSITION
M ：MITSUBISHI
Shift the lever from H position to M or K position pulling up H ：KOMATSU • TIGHTEN SCREW
HITACHI
the lever knob. SUMITOMO
4. After setting the control pattern, tighten screw (1) to TURN LEVER WITH
STOP THE ENGINE
WITHOUT FAIL AT
fix lever (2) with hand. Never use tools. PULLING THE KNOB TIME OF CHANGEOVER
5. Close the cover and lock it.
6. Operate the attachment and make sure that the con- FIGURE 9.26
trol lever pattern is adjusted to the desired one.
9—9
B. RESTICKING OPERATION PATTERN LABEL
• IDENTIFY THE CONTROL LEVER PATTERN WITH-

OUT FAIL BEFORE STARTING OPERATION TO
AVOID THE MISOPERATION. DON’T FAIL TO
IDENTIFY THE MOVEMENT OF RESPECTIVE
CONTROL LEVER.
• THE OPERATION WITH THE LEVER THE CON-
TENTS OF THE OPERATION PATTERN LABEL
DOES NOT COINCIDE WITH THE ACTUAL MA-
CHINE MOVEMENTS COULD CAUSE PERSONAL
INJURY.
• RESTICK THE CONTROL PATTERN LABEL,
WHICH COINCIDES WITH THE ACTUAL MACHINE LOCATED INSIDE CAB L.H.
MOVEMENTS, OR ADJUST THE LEVER PATTERN
FIGURE 9.27
OF THE ROTARY MULTI-CONTROL VALVE TO
THE CONTENTS OF THE OPERATION PATTERN
LABEL.
NOTE
The control pattern label is a magnet sticking type. It should
be store because it is required when changing the control
pattern.
Stick label on the arrow mark position as shown in illus-

tration.
C. HYDRAULIC CONTROL LABELS
HYDRAULIC CONTROL LEVERS HYDRAULIC CONTROL LEVERS
ISO PATTERNS YN20T01089P1 H PATTERNS YN20T01090P1
HYDRAULIC CONTROL LEVERS HYDRAULIC CONTROL LEVERS
KOBELCO PATTERNS YN20T01091P1 M PATTERNS YN20T01092P1
9 — 10
Section X – SPECIAL PROCEDURES
Table of Contents
GENERAL ..................................................................................................................................................... 10-1
RELEASING TRAVEL MOTOR BRAKES .................................................................................................... 10-1 ~ 10-3
LOWERING ATTACHMENT WITH ENGINE FAILURE ................................................................................ 10-4
RELEASING SWING BRAKE ...................................................................................................................... 10-6 ~ 10-8

10 — 0
10.1 GENERAL
ATTACHMENT ON
The SK330LC-6E & SK330NLC-6E machine incorpo- GROUND
rates automatically applied spring brake systems in
the travel motors and swing motors. These systems
will automatically engage the brakes when engine is
stopped making it impossible to move the machine.
This section contains the required procedures for re-
leasing the travel motor brakes, the swing motor brake
and lowering the attachment to the ground should
sudden engine failure be experienced.
CHOCK BLOCKS AT
FRONT AND REAR OF
EACH TRACK

PRECAUTIONS AND PROCEDURES FOUND IN THIS
MANUAL BEFORE ATTEMPTING ANY OPERATION,
MAKE CERTAIN CHOCK BLOCKS ARE SECURE
INSPECTION, MAINTENANCE OR REPAIR OF THIS
AT FRONT AND REAR OF EACH TRACK BE-
MACHINE, ATTACHMENT OR ANY OF ITS SYSTEMS.
FORE ATTEMPTING TO RELEASE BRAKES.
NEVER STAND IN THE PATH OF THE TRACKS
WHEN RELEASING BRAKES.
THE PROCEDURES FOUND IN THIS SECTION SHOULD FIGURE 10.1

BE PERFORMED BY A WELL TRAINED EXPERIENCED
SERVICE TECHNICIAN WHO IS FAMILIAR WITH THE
KOBELCO SK330(LC)-6E MACHINES.
10.2 RELEASING TRAVEL MOTOR BRAKES

A. TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT REQUIRED
1. Four chock blocks.
2. One 14 mm allen wrench.
3. One 8 mm allen wrench.
4. Two 12 liter (3.2 Gal) capacity drain pans.
THROTTLE IN KEY SWITCH IN
5. One M10-1.5 X 30 mm lifting eyes.
"LO" POSITION "OFF" POSITION
6. Overhead lifting device capable of lifting and holding
45 kg (100 lb). FIGURE 10.2
7. Torque wrench 8 ~ 10 kgf·m (58 ~ 72 lbf·ft) capacity

or better.
8. Thread sealant. (For drain and check/fill plugs)
REMOVE CHECK / FILL
9. Rubber or soft faced mallet. PLUG WITH 14 mm
ALLEN WRENCH
B. PROCEDURES
1. Place chock blocks at front and rear of each track to
prevent machine from moving when brakes are re-
leased. See Figure 10.1.
2. Lower attachment to ground. See “10.3 Lowering at-
tachment” for proper procedures, page 10-4.
3. Turn key switch “OFF” and remove key. See Figure
10.2.
4. Remove check/fill plug from each travel motor using FIGURE 10.3
the 14 mm socket head wrench. See Figure 10.3.
10 — 1
5. Place a clean 12 liter (3.2 gallon) capacity drain pan REMOVE DRAIN
under each travel motor drain plug and remove drain PLUG WITH
14 mm SOCKET
plug using the 14 mm socket head wrench. See Fig- WRENCH
ure 10.4.
6. After all of the gear oil has drained, cover the drain
pans to prevent contamination and move them to an
area away from the machine.
7. Remove the sixteen plate mounting bolts from the 12 LITER (3.2 GAL)
travel motor reduction unit cover plates. See Figure CAPACITY DRAIN PAN
10.5.
8. Remove the two bolts from the bossed areas and FIGURE 10.4
install the two M10-1.5 X 30 mm lifting eyes into each
REMOVE 22
of these holes. See Figure 10.6. MOUNTING BOLTS
9. Attach the overhead lifting device to the lifting eyes WITH 8 mm SOCKET
WRENCH
and remove most of the slack from the chain or cable.
10. Using a rubber mallet, gently strike the edge of the
cover plate to help release plate from housing.
Be careful not to damage lip of cover plate. Any dam-

FIGURE 10.5
age to the lip could result in a gear oil leak.
REMOVE BOLTS FROM INSTALL M10-1.5 X 30 mm
11. After cover plate has release from housing, carefully BOSSES WITH 8 mm LIFTING EYE INTO
SOCKET WRENCH EACH BOSS
move cover away from machine with lifting device.
12. Install the one M12-1.75 X 20mm lifting eye into one
of the pinion gear shafts. See Figure 10.7.
When removing the following components it will be

necessary to have a clean area free of dirt and grit to
lay these components.
13. Attach the overhead lifting device to the lifting eye FIGURE 10.6
and remove most of the slack from the cable or chain.
See Figure 10.7. INSTALL M12-1.75 X 20 mm
LIFTING EYE INTO PINION
14. Carefully by hand work the planetary gear assembly GEAR SHAFT
free from the housing. See Figure 10.7.
Be aware of and protect hands from pinch areas when

removing and installing planetary gears or any other
component which may cause personal injury.
WORK PLANETARY GEAR

ASSEMBLY FREE FROM
HOUSING WITH LIFTING
DEVICE AND HANDS
FIGURE 10.7
10 — 2
15. Lower the planetary gear assembly to a clean sur-
face such as a piece of plywood with the “Sun Gear
B” facing up. See Figure 10.8.
REMOVE / INSTALL
"SUN GEAR B"
16. Carefully remove “Sun gear B” from the planetary AND LAY ON A
CLEAN SURFACE
gear assembly by hand and lay aside. See Figure
10.8.
17. Carefully remove the “drive gear” from the planetary

gear assembly and lay aside. See Figure 10.9.
18. Install “sun gear B” back into the planetary gear as-
sembly. See Figure 10.8.
19. Remove splined coupling from center of second plan-

etary gear assembly in travel reduction housing. See FIGURE 10.8
Figure 10.10.
20. Using lifting device, install planetary gear assembly

REMOVE "DRIVE GEAR"
back into housing. AND LAY ON A CLEAN
SURFACE
21. Install cover plate onto housing and tighten all bolts
securely.
22. Install drain plug into cover plate and replace gear
oil into travel reduction unit through fill / check port to
proper level.
23. After steps 4 through 22 have been performed on

both travel reduction units, the machine may be towed
to an area where repairs can be made.
FIGURE 10.9
24. After repairs are made reinstall the “drive gear” in
reverse order. Use the following torque specifications
for bolts and plugs.
REMOVE
TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS "SPLINED COUPLING"
AND LAY ON A CLEAN
COVER BOLTS ..... 5.5 ~ 6.5 kgf·m (40 ~ 47 lbf·ft) SURFACE
PLUGS .................. 5 ~ 6.5 kgf·m (36 ~ 47 lbf·ft)
(Use thread sealant on plugs)
FIGURE 10.10
10 — 3
10.3 LOWERING ATTACHMENT WHEN SUDDEN ENGINE FAILURE OCCURS
A. HOW TO LOWER ATTACHMENT – FIGURE 10.11

The port relief valve is used to return the oil remaining above hold pressure opens the poppet, the plunger
in the cylinder to the hydraulic tank to protect the pip- moves rightward and the continuity from P to R is made.
ing when the pressure inside of piping rises higher than And the oil remaining in the cylinder returns to the tank.
the set pressure owing to the external load exerted on With this, attachment can be brought down to the
the cylinder, and also may be used as a measures to ground while engine stops.
lower attachment when the engine stops owing to
trouble, etc. NOTE
After loosening lock nut of port relief valve as adjuster Before loosening adjuster screw, mark those positions,
screw is loosened the set pressure gradually falls. and after bringing down attachment to the ground, tighten
When the set pressure decreases lower than the hold adjuster screw to the marked positions.
pressure of cylinder currently holding attachment, the
PISTON POPPET LOCK NUT
P P
R R
PLUNGER SEAT SPRING TO TANK
BOOM CONFLUENCE BOOM

SLEWING
CUT & ARM CONFLUENCE BUCKET
ARM TRAVEL LEFT
TRAVEL RIGHT
BOOM SPOOL ARM REGENERATION
& CUT TRAVEL
STRAIGHT
PBb
PLc1
Drc
Bb
BOOM (Ab)
CYLINDER
R R
H H
FIGURE 10.11
10 — 4
B. HOW TO LOWER ATTACHMENT – FIGURE 10.12
When engine stops because of troubles, the relief
valve incorporated in the holding valve mounted on
the boom cylinder head side is available to lower at-
tachment.
As shown in the figure, after loosening lock nut of
stop valve as setscrew is loosened, the poppet is
opened and then the oil remaining in the boom cylin-
der head side returns to the tank through T port en-
HOLDING
abling attachment to be lowered. VALVE
NOTE RELIEF
After lowering attachment, tighten the above setscrew to VALVE
the specified torque without fail.
Be careful when lowering attachment. Do not stand

under boom. LOCK
NUT
FIGURE 10.12
10.4 HYDRAULIC TANK PRESSURE – FIGURE

DEPRESS RUBBER CAP
10.13 TO RELEASE PRESSURE
How to release air pressure remaining in the hy-
draulic tank.
After engine stops, the air pressure remaining in
the hydraulic tank.
Can be released by pushing valve on the air
breather rubber cap several times (5 ~ 7 times). Air
breather mounted on the upper part of hydraulic
tank.
FIGURE 10.13
10 — 5
10.5 RELEASING SWING BRAKE
MAKE CERTAIN THAT THE ATTACHMENT IS ON

THE GROUND TO HELP PREVENT SUDDEN RO-
TATION OF THE UPPER STRUCTURE BEFORE
ATTEMPTING TO RELEASE THE SWING BRAKE.
REFER TO PAGE 10-5 FOR ATTACHMENT LOWER-
ING PROCEDURES.
KOBELCO highly recommends the use of a hydrau-

REMOVE HOSES, TUBES
lic hand pump to release the swing brake manually AND FITTINGS FROM COVER
when the engines fails to start. Refer the Figure
10.14 to use the proper fitting connector on PG port. FIGURE 10.14
Remove the hose and install the proper connector
on PG port. Install the hydraulic hand pump and
apply hydraulic pressure as follows: IP
TOP VIEW SWING MOTOR
2
SK330(LC)-6E, SK310NLC-6E ... 29 kgf/cm (413 psi)
DB
In highly contaminated environments it is recommended B PB
IP
to remove the whole swing motor assembly, if a hy- PG
draulic hand pump is not available. Refer to the shop A PA
manual for special instructions or contact your
KOBELCO distributor for assistance. When the swing
motor is removed, make sure to use caps and plugs M
on hoses, tubes and fittings to protect the hydraulic 2-M12 DEPTH 18
SIDE VIEW LIFTING CAPACITY
system from any contamination. Also, a cover must be PB PA 220kg/2 bolts
SWING
used to protect the swing reduction unit. If this approach SHOCKLESS
L
VALVE
is taken, and the swing reduction unit becomes con- RELIEF
M DB VALVE
taminated, make sure to flush and clean the swing re-
duction unit. Refer to page 4-8 and 4-9 for proper oil A,B
and component capacity.
If a hydraulic hand pump is not available, and the PG

contamination can be controlled easily, then pro-
ceed to the next page for specific instructions on a
IP
different alternative to release the swing parking
brake.
Code Name Size Torque Remarks

Use safety protection such as: hard hat, working gloves, N•m {kgf•m}
safety shoes and safety glasses when needed to per- A,B Main port 2-PF3/4 167 {17}
form this job. M Make-up port PF1 216 {22}
DB Drain port PF1/2 108 {11}
PA, PB Gauge port PF1/4 36 {3.7}
PG Brake release port PF1/4 36 {3.7}
L Gear oil level port PT1/2 65 {6.6}
IP Gear oil filling port PT3/4 98 {10}
FIGURE 10.15
10 — 6
A. TOOLS & EQUIPMENT REQUIRED
1. Handtools required for removal of hydraulic tubes, INSTALL PROPER

hoses and fittings. CAPS AND PLUGS
ON HOSES, TUBES
AND FITTINGS TO
2. Plugs and caps for tubes, hoses and fittings. HELP PREVENT
CONTAMINATION
3. 12 mm allen wrench. ENTERING THE
SYSTEM
4. 5 mm allen wrench.
5. Two M12-1.75 X 18 mm lifting eye.

FIGURE 10.16
6. Overhead lifting device capable of lifting and holding
100 kg (220 lb).
7. Plenty of clean, dry shop rags and/or paper towels. REMOVE THE TWO PLUGS
AND INSTALL LIFTING EYES
8. 17 mm allen wrench. (M12-1.75 X 23 mm)
9. 45 kgf·m (325 lbf·ft) torque wrench.
B. PROCEDURES
1. Lower attachment to ground. Refer to previous page

for proper procedures in lowering the attachment.
2. Remove all hoses and tubes from the swing motor

top plate and swing valve to gain access to the top
plate mounting bolts. See Figure 10.14.
TOP COVER
3. Install the proper plugs and caps onto hoses, tubes
and fittings to avoid the possibility of contamination FIGURE 10.17
entering the hydraulic system. See Figure 10.15.
Use only plugs and caps designed to properly seal the SWING SHOCKLESS VALVE
specific hose, tube or fitting they are to be installed on.
4. Remove two plugs, as indicated in Fig. 10.16, and

install 2 X M12-1.75 X 14 mm eye bolts. LOOSEN (4) COVER MOUNTING BOLTS
NOTE
Place a large quantity of clean, dry shop rags around the
swing motor to help catch any overflow of hydraulic oil
from the removal of the top plate.
5. Loosen the four top plate mounting bolts with the 17 FIGURE 10.18
mm allen wrench. See Figure 10.17.
10 — 7
6. Remove two top plate mounting bolts from corners
REMOVE TWO BOLTS,
opposite of each other. See Figure 10.19.
OPPOSITE CORNERS
OF EACH OTHER
7. Attach overhead lifting device to the lifting eye and
remove most of the slack from the cable or chain.
8. Carefully remove the remaining two bolts from the

top mounting plate.
NOTE FIGURE 10.19

The top plate will raise from spring pressure as the last
two bolts are removed. Some movement of the upper
frame may be experienced as the spring tension is re-
leased.
9. Using the overhead lifting device, carefully lift the

REMOVE ALL
swing motor top plate and swing valve assembly off
SPRINGS
of and away from the swing motor.
Do not allow any dirt or debris to enter the slewing mo-

tor or settle on the top plate.
FIGURE 10.20
10. Carefully remove all brake springs and place in a

container filled with fresh, clean hydraulic oil. Then,
seal the container to prevent contamination. See Fig-
ure 10.20.
11. Align the holes of the distributor plate in the swing

motor until they are located toward the front and back ALIGN DISTRIBUTOR PLATE
HOLES TOWARDS FRONT
of the swing motor housing. See Figure 10.21. AND REAR OF HOUSING
12. Carefully place the top plate over the swing motor
and align the dowel pins of the top plate with the
holes in the distributor plate. See Figure 10.22.
13. Carefully and slowly lower the top plate into position
on the swing motor and install, by hand, the four top
FIGURE 10.21
plate mounting bolts.
DOWEL PINS
Make certain the top plate dowel pins and the distribu-
tor plate holes mesh together.
FIGURE 10.22
10 — 8

Sk330nlc-6e Manual

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Originaltitel

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

Sk330nlc-6e Manual

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

APPLICABLE No.

READ, UNDERSTAND AND FOLLOW ALL SAFETY

Book Code No. S2LC00014ZE03

Because of the size of some of the machine compo-

21. Do not operate a machine if any rotating part is dam-

22. Be careful when servicing or separating the tracks.

part of what you must follow. Read, understand and operat re w

OBSERVE ALL SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

B. WEAR PROTECTIVE CLOTHING

C. READ AND UNDERSTAND THE OPERATOR’S

D. KEEP OPERATOR’S MANUAL IN MACHINE CAB

E. HOW TO HANDLE LIFE HAMMER

F. PREPARE FOR EMERGENCIES

H. PERFORM PRE-START INSPECTION

I . ENGAGE SAFETY LOCK LEVER BEFORE LEAV-

J. SIGNS, SIGNALS & FLAGMEN SAFETY LOCK LEVER

K. KEEP FIRE AWAY FROM FUEL AND OIL

L. USE CAUTION NEAR NOISE

N. AVOID HOT SURFACES & AREAS USE GRIP BARS

O. USE THE PROPER OPTIONAL ATTACHMENT

P. PREVENT FIRES USE PROPER ATTACHMENT

SOUND HORN BEFORE STARTING

E. BOOM, ARM & ATTACHMENTS

ALWAYS PLACE ATTACHMENTS ON THE

F. OPERATING ON INCLINES OR SLOPES

LINE VOLTAGE Minimum Distance - M (FEET)

I . FROZEN OR SNOW COVERED WORK SITES

USE EXTREME CAUTION ON FROZEN OR SNOW

J. FILLED OR UNSTABLE GROUND

L. PARKING THE MACHINE

1.5 INSPECTION & MAINTENANCE SAFETY

B. TOOLS & EQUIPMENT

E. SET THE ATTACHMENT

F. CLEAN THE MACHINE

G. PRESSURIZED FLUIDS & LUBRICANTS KEEP MACHINE CLEAN

H. SUPPORT THE MACHINE RELEASE HYDRAULIC TANK PRESSURE

SUPPORT THE MACHINE

K. TRACK SHOE TENSION

N. DISPOSE OF WASTE PROPERLY

USE PROPER LIGHTING

A. WEAR PROPER PROTECTIVE CLOTHES

B. KEEP AWAY FROM FIRE OR FLAMES

D. USING BOOSTER CABLES MAKE CERTAIN OF THE POSITIVE (+) AND

If using another machine or vehicle to boost batter-

1. SWING-DANGER 3. ACCUMULATOR CONTAINS PRESSURIZED GAS

ACCUMULATOR CONTAINS PRESSUREIZED GAS.

Pressurized hot oil can

AVOID ACID BURNS

KEEP VENT CAPS TIGHT AND LEVEL

PREVENT BATTERY EXPLOSION

explode and cause personal injury.

ZL11N00404 ZL11N02604 ZL11N05204

12. DO NOT CLIMB UPON ENGINE COVER-WARNING

The swing parking brake release switch

Swing parking brake release switch YN20T01351P1

• While operating swing aciton,

17. NIBBLER & BREAKER OPERATION-CAUTION

Do not set this switch to nibbler combined flow

Be careful not to pinch

19. SAFETY LOCK LEVER-WARNING 21. DO NOT PINCH YOUR HAND(S)-CAUTION

Machine may move suddenly and cause serious

ENGINE OIL PAN DRAIN PLUG

RATCHET WRENCH ME158710